A DISCOVERY OF THE FRAVDVlent practices of JOHN DARREL Bachelor of Arts, in his proceed CONCERNING THE PRETENDED POSSESSION and dispossession of William Somers at Nottingham: of Thomas Darling, the boy of Burton at Caldwall: and of Katherine Wright at Mansfield, & Whittington: and of his dealings with one Mary Couper at Nottingham, detecting in some sort the deceitful trade in these latter days of casting out Devils.  We may not do evil that good may come of it. Rom. 3. Dum per mendacium tenditur ut doceatur fides, id demum agitur, ut nulli habenda fides, Aug. ad Consentium. Cap. 4. 
IN DOMINO CONFIDO.  
I W.  
LONDON Imprinted by john Wolf. 1599   

The Epistle to the Reader.  
THe feat of juggling and deluding the people by counterfeit miracles, hath been as ancient, as it hath been too-currant in all nations of the world, wherein the Egyptians were grown so expert, that their sect of enchanters durst challenge God his ambassador in working of wonders, until they were shamefully foiled at making of Lice. As these were mated by a silly vermin, so the rabble of Bell his priests took as foul a fall, whose grosser wits could devise no better way to purchase an opinion of deity to their God of flies, then by feigning, that his omnipotency lay in infinite eating, pretending that his Godhead was able to consume as much in a night, as two hundred men. These had a public aim, the countenancing of false religion, by a face of deity, falsely drawn upon stocks and stones, for a private end of a private person. We have a notable precedent in the Arch-iugler Simon Magus: the drift of whose feigned miracles in bewitching the people, was to be reputed 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 a wonderful man, and to be pointed at with this Euge, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉; this man is the power of Almighty God. Add unto these, Numa Pompilius his feigned Nymph, Socrates his Genius, Sertorius his Hind, Mahomet's false conceited Dove, we shall find the tract of all miraclemongers to bend to one of these two ends: either gracing of false religion by this graceless feat, or the raising of their own greatness in the opinion of the people. The great Impostor of Rome, master of this faculty, hath so led the world in a string, by this Legerdemain: bewitching by his counterfeit miracles, the minds of the ignorant, given to adore all, that they do not apprehend in the weakness of their sense, as he doth now proclaim by one of his Heralds with open mouth. Nemo unquam haereticorum miraculum edidit: none but he and his scholars can cog a miracle kindly, and he and his Priests can dispatch a miracle as easily as a squirrel can crack a nut: a miracle in the bread, a miracle in the wine, a miracle in holy water, a miracle in holy oil, a miracle in our Lady's milk, a miracle in the asses tail, a miracle in Lamps, candles, beads, breeches, rags, bones, stones, omnia stultorum & miraculorum plena, nothing done in his religion without a miracle and a Vice. And that which passeth all, the least bone of a canonised Saint, (traitor Saint Campion forsooth), hath more force in it sometimes to cast out a Legion of devils, than the name of jesus, than prayer, fasting, invocation of the Trinity, exorcizing, conjuring, and Mary's relics, Cross, holy water, and all. And would to God the Pope could vaunt of this trick alone, that none but he and his were seen in this mystery: and that there were not risen up amongst us scholars, not out of his school, but of his occupation as touching this point, who, (upon what aim, I leave to God & their conscience, such as it is), whether upon Simon Magus his 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, to seem to be great in the people's eyes: or the enchanters pride, to cross God his governors in the church, who profess not this pretty feat: or the Bellites conceit, to grace an idol of their own idle brains: or of an impious simplicity, holding it lawful to lie, cog, and fain, so as it be to a good end, and (as their favourites term it) to the glory of God, have taken upon them to be deeply seen in this mystery of devils. And one especially above the rest, hath played his public prize in this juggling science, casting out more devils by prayer and fasting after a good dinner, perhaps at afternoon, than we read that ever any of the Apostles at so full a season did. Which being now discovered to be but a pure play, containing two principal parts, of a vice and a devil, there hath been devised two miserable shifts to help him off the stage, that he might not be hissed at of all the world. One, that this action (like the day of judgement acted on a stage) though feigned in itself, yet procured reverence and fear in the simpler and loser sort, whilst the imaginary devils seemed to stand in such awe of the word of God: the other, that to cast out a Devil, is no such great matter, as men make account of, being but mirandum & non miraculum, in the nature of a wonder, and not of a miracle. The former is borrowed from a Champion of the Popes, who to uphold the shop of his forgeries and lies in an Apologetical treatise: sticketh not to affirm this impious rule: honesta docendi ad pietatem nunquam potest esse ratio inhonesta: So as a man's meaning be good and religious, it skills not, though his means be bad and impious. A singular foundation to uphold the Pope his playhouse, and to make religion a pageant of Puppittes. It was peradventure at the first, a supposed good intent to devise the fearful fire of Purgatory, the least sparkle whereof, is of more tormenting force, than all the fires that be in the world: that men might be more fearful, of committing small sins. And so likewise the painting of Almighty God like an ancient Philosopher, with a grave long beard, and a book in his hand, that the boys might have a reverend impression of his fatherlike wisdom: voluntary poverty whip, pilgrimages, images, worshipping of relics, and adoration of the Cross, and the blessed Budget of all the Pope his pedlary & trash, is blanched over with as fair a face of good intent to the glory of God, as this juggling mystery of casting out devils. Open but this crevice in the door of the church, that ill may be done to any good end: you shall have religion like a Homer's Ilias, a farthel of fictions, & a bundle of lies. God is truth, & will be worshipped in spirit and truth: all falsehood and forgery are of the Devil, and as opposite to truth, and consequently unto God, as death unto life, and darkness unto light. Saint Austin his resolution is of so high a pitch in this point, 
Ad Crescentium cap 4.  as he saith plainly it is not lawful to dissemble for the safety of a man's soul. And the heathen Philosopher in the fourth of his Ethics, speaks better Christianity in this case, than our juggling divines 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 a lie is simply bad, and simply to be condemned.  
The second shift is as silly as this is sinful, that to cast out a Devil is but a wonder, and not in the nature of a miracle in deed. What dull conceits had the rulers of the jews, that they could not see this sly silly shift, to deprave the miracles of our saviour Christ, and to tell the people there was no just cause they should believe, that our Saviour was the son of God, in doing such mighty miracles among them: the chief one whereof was casting out devils, by reason that action was but Mirandum & non miraculum. a strange thing for silly people to wonder at, and not a miracle to enforce them to believe. But they not able to deny the evidence of the miracle, put it upon Belzebub, alleging that it was done by the Prince of the devils. Our Saviour pointing at the hand that did the deed, tells them that it was no other power then the finger of Almighty God: secluding both the arm of nature, and help of the Devil, from this divine action. And if our Devill-stingers can point out a finger equal to the finger of God, and challenge as good interest in it, as our Saviour Christ did, or his Apostles, they shall easily obtain the credit of effecting a miracle. There is a place in the last of S. Mark, wherein they mightily please themselves, and taking it as a rod of defence to maintain their cause, it proves in handling, a serpent that devoureth them up. The words are these: These signs shall follow them that believe in my name: they shall cast out devils, and shall speak with new tongues, & shall take away serpents, and if they shall drink any deadly thing, it shall not hurt them, they shall lay their hands upon the sick, and they shall recover. Foelix quem faciunt etc. I doubt not but they are wise enough to keep themselves warm, and to deny joining issue out of this place, but rather take example from a giddy brother of theirs, who conceiting a warrant out of these words for proof of certain brainsick conclusions, that he held, made this his issue, that if he took down Ratsbane, and it did him no hurt, that then his positions should be received as the Oracles of God: which he doing accordingly, and for a little time, not feeling any harm to ensue, was ravished with a wonderful jollity of this his strange trial. But his pitiful Metamorphosis was as quick and strange: for as soon as the poison came near unto his heart, he roared, yelled, and raged exceedingly, and in this miserable torment ended his life. We will not be so hard taskmaisters, as to put them to this trial for their extraordinary gifts, but will set them up an easier rest. Let them with all their juggling drive out a melancholic spirit, out of any poor soul in Bedlam, let them lay their hands upon those that are troubled with the dropsy, sciatike, or the gout: let them recover sight to the blind, or limbs to the lame, and we will give ear unto their application of that scripture. But if they be unfaithful in those lesser mites, who will trust them in matter of their greater treasures? These gifts are acknowledged by the fathers, to have shined in the Apostles time, and in some few ages after the Apostles: but always with this note, as the learned hold, in ijs qui dono miraculorum claruerunt, in such as were evidently endued with the gift of working miracles. Touching the niceness of the difference between Mirandum & miraculum, both terms spring from one root of wonder or marvel: an effect which a thing strangely done doth procure in the minds of the beholders, as being above the reach of nature and reason: and not only God his supernatural acts done in the land of Egypt, are called marvels and wonders, but one and the self act done by the finger of God, hath divers and sundry names given it in divers and sundry considerations. Christ his miracles in the 4. of Saint john are generally called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as being significations of his omnipotent power. His miracle in the 5. of Luke, showed upon the man taken with the palsy, is called by the multitude that beheld it, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, because it extended the compass of their conceit. In the 8. of john, Christ his deeds are called 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, for their power in amazing the understanding and senses: and so 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as causing men to gaze: 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, as procuring wonder: 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, for the excellency of their cause: and 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, for their wonderful effect: and the very same names that are given by the holy Ghost to the acts of Christ, effected by the only finger of God, are attributed to false prophets in the 13. of Mark, and to Antichrist himself in the second of the second to the Thessalonians, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, in all power and signs and wonders. And therefore, whether they juggle under the colour of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, or 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, the feat is alike, and the deceit all one. Thus much for a taste of Devill-drivers legerdemain: open the curtain, and see their puppets play.  
S. H.   

The First Book.  
This first Book containeth the number, that are pretended to have been dispossessed by M. Darrel: The occasion that his practices were called in question by her majesties Commissioners for causes ecclesiastical at Lambeth: The endeavours of M. Darrel's friends to extol both him and his doings: The great uncertainty of the grounds, whereupon M. Darrell, and all other casters out of Devils do in these days build their skill, and of the shifts they have, not only to set themselves on work, but also to maintain their credits, when their juggling is called into any question.  

CHAP. I. The number of such persons as are said to have been dispossessed by M. Darrel's means.  
IOhn Darrell a Bachelor of Arts, being about the age of three or four & twenty, but then no minister (as he saith) did take upon him about thirteen years since to cast, first one Devil, and afterwards (upon a pretended repossession) eight Devils, out of a maid near seventeen years old in Darbishire, named Katherine Wright. 
M. Darrell ad art. 4. & add 8.  The history of this feat he himself writ, and gave one copy of it to the Lady Bowes.  
From the time above mentioned uz. 1586. till the 28. of March in the year 1596. M. Darrell for aught that is generally known, was out of work. Notwithstanding (besides the publishing of the said history) he omitted few occasions to intimate, what he had done touching Katherine Wright. Insomuch as growing thereby into some small credit with the simpler sort: he became very pert and proud in that respect. Something to this purpose he confesseth in these words: 
M. Darrell ad art. 8.  Some thought that I did glory somewhat too much in the action of casting forth Devils. The cause of which his glory enlarged itself forsooth in the said year 1596. when pretence is made that he cast a Devil out of a boy in Burton, called Thomas Darling, then about the age of fourteen years. Of this worthy act a book being penned by one jesse Be a Saddler in Burton, the same was first contracted by one M. Denison a minister in that country: and then after it had been seen and allowed by M. Darrell, & M. Hildersham, it was published in print: and was commonly sold and called for, by this title, uz. The book of the dispossessing of the boy of Burton.  
What M. Darrell took upon him after this his second exploit, it may be surmised by glorying in the first. But yet his name was not so famous, until the 17. of March next following, when being sent for into Lancashire by one M. Starkie, upon the report of M. Dee his Butler, who told the said M. Starkie what M. Darrell had done at Burton, he dispossessed in the said M. starkie's house seven persons, at one clap: uz. john Starkie, Anne Starkie, Margaret Hardman, Elinor Hardman, Ellen Holland, Margaret Byrom, and jane Ashton: which jane is since fallen into the hands of certain Seminary priests, and hath been carried by them up and down that country, to sundry recusants houses (as certain idle men were wont to carry puppets) and by her cunning counterfeiting of certain fits, & staying of herself by the secret directions of the said Priests, she hath gotten God knoweth what: they by such lewdness have won great credit, but her majesties subjects, have in the mean time been shamefully abused.  
Of the dispossessing of the said seven parties, there is a book that runneth from hand to hand, penned by M. Dicons preacher at Leigh (as M. Darrell saith,) and justified from point to point (although very childishly) by one M. More, a preacher of his own allowance: who joined with M. Darrell in the pretended dispossessing of the said seven. Touching which book there are added (in the end of the said history of the boy of Burton) these words, uz. Shortly you shall have the true story come forth of those seven in Lancashire, that were possessed with unclean spirits, and all seven delivered at one time by this man: 
M. Darrell ad art. 6.  meaning M. Darrell, as he himself confesseth.  
But of all that ever M. Darrell dealt with, William Somers one of Nottingham supposed to be possessed, is the youth, by whom (as it seemeth) he hath won his spurs in the opinion of many, especially women. He had in his hands nine of the former persons, but two or three days, and so dispatched them: but Somers stuck in his fingers almost five months. When he began with Katherine Wright, he dealt but rudely & (as he confesseth himself) unskilfully: Marry by the time that he took Somers in hand at Nottingham, which was in November 1597. he was grown his craft's master. Of his proceed with the said Somers, and of the said Summer's fits, divers treatises are come abroad. M. Darrell himself hath written a short history concerning that matter, and besides that, an Apology of his own penning, for the justifying of himself is lately come out in print: there is also published & printed an other book in his behalf: entitled, A brief narration of the possession, dispossession, & repossession of W. Somers.  
Lastly, M. Darrell having played his tricks so long with William Somers, that all which the boy could do began to grow very stolen in Nottingham, than he attempted to practise with Mary Cooper the sister of Somers, and there was no remedy but she must be possessed: and so he set a new matter on foot, which was very zealously followed by certain wives in that town: but before it came to any perfection M. Darrell began to be disclosed for a dissembler. Touching all these (saving those in Lancashire) examinations have been taken, and aswell by the confessions of the parties, as by divers other circumstances, it doth plainly appear, that all which was done betwixt Darrell and them was merely counterfeited. But for as much as his greatest piece of cunning and legerdemain was employed chief about Somers, (as having then learned more iugling-skill than before) and that his practices with that boy, were and still are so greatly insisted upon by him & his friends, that nothing will be digested that is spoken against them: the greatest pains have been taken to find out the packing that hath been used in this cause.   

CHAP. II. The occasion why M. Darrel's dealing with Somers was called into question at Lambeth.  
IT is a common use when any men for matters of crime are called into question, (and especially if they are like to fall out hardly with the defendants) to discredit the witnesses, to slander the plaintiffs, and to take exceptions both to the judges, and to their proceedings. And hereof the course that M. Darrell and his friends have held, may be an example: he the said M. Darrell being charged with diverse notable cozenages, in pretending by hypocritical sleights to cast out Devils. The particulars to this purpose in every point are not here so pertinent: some of those only, that concern the occasions pretended, why M. Darrell hath been called into question, and the persons that by authority have looked into this cause, and the witnesses that have been produced in it, are meet to be considered: For they do argue a great combination or association to have wrought some great work, if they had not by fortune stumbled in their way.  
Some give it out, 
I.B. etc.  that the detecting of one Alice Freeman to be a Witch, was the occasion through M. Freeman her kinsman's dealing, that William Somers was first accounted to be a counterfeit. Others of deeper insight, say that the Devil himself envying the happy estate of Nottingham, by means of M. Darrel's preaching there, 
The written Treatise.  did raise up that slander of possession to hinder it. There be also that give it out (justly as they say) that the first occasion of moving this evil (forsooth) against M. Darrell, was his threatening the judgements of God against such Pastors, as let their people perish for lack of instruction. 
The brief Narration.  And one seemeth to ascribe the hard conceit held by some, of M. Darrel, to the want of faith, telling us that when Lazarus was raised from the dead, some were hardened, and complained upon our Saviour. The same fellow also reporteth, that it hath been given out by one, a great man amongst them (meaning her majesties Commissioners for causes ecclesiastical) that seeing they have taken it in hand, they will have the credit of it: insinuating that otherwise M. Darrell might long before this time have been discharged, as a man blameless and innocent in those points whereof he was accused, and to strengthen this gross untruth, that appertaineth, (as shameless as the other,) where he sayeth that there hath been running to the Court, to forestall the Lords and Ladies of Honour, and to hinder the preferring of petitions in M. Darrel's behalf, to the Lords of her majesties Privy Council. Who have troubled the Lords and Ladies in that matter, they know best themselves: but indeed some have done it, peradventure to have had Darrel's practices smothered up, for the avoiding (forsooth) of such slander, as might otherwise fall upon the Ministry. But above all the rest, that is a substantial conceit, that M. Darrel cannot be endured, because he hath such a feat in casting out Devils as many other men want. It cannot be endured (sayeth the author of it) that those kind of men, which are accounted the offscouring of the world, 
Narration.  should be thought to have such interest in Christ jesus, as that by their prayers and fasting, he should as it were visibly descend from heaven, and tread down Satan under their feet: whereas other men, who account themself, more learned, excellent, and wise, than they, do not withal their Physic, Rhetoric, pomp & primacy accomplish the like. But God hath chosen the foolish things of the world, to confound the wise, and the weak things of the world to confound the mighty. A place indeed of scripture aswell applied, as that in the fourth of S. Matthew, He will give his Angels charge over thee, least at any time thou shouldest dash thy foot against a stone. But to insist no longer upon these vanities and foolish surmises: the true occasion, that moved her majesties said Commissioners to intermeddle with this Impostor, (wherewith his confederates and companions are so much grieved) and to proceed therein as they have done, was as followeth.  
William Somers having counterfeited himself to be possessed, dispossessed, and repossessed, and held on that course successively, for the space of about three months: he did at the last, being got out of M. Darrel's hands, confess and avow, that all he had done that while, was but dissembled: showing to the Mayor and Aldermen of Nottingham, how he had acted all his former fits. Herewith M. Darrell and his friends were greatly moved, especially when they perceived the boys said confession to be so generally believed, as that there began an hart-burning amongst the neighbours: some holding with M. Darrell, and some against him. 
I. W.  To meet therefore with this mischief, and hearing (as it is supposed) that the Archdeacon of Derby had written to the L. Archbishop of Canterbury touching that matter, it was thought good to use some prevention, and to procure a Commission from the L. Archbishop of York for the examination of such witnesses, as should be produced in the behalf of M. Darrel, to prove that Somers had not dissembled. The said Commission obtained, exceptions were taken against it, because all the Commissioners were addicted to M. Darrell. Thereupon it was renewed, 
M. Euington ad artic. 34. pag. 190 Pet. Clerk then Mayor. William Freeman. Nich. Shepherd. john Couper.  and upon one M. Euingtons' motion, some were made Commissioners to join with the rest, that were known to have disliked of M. Darrel's proceedings. When the time came that this second Commission was to be executed, (certain persons having been examined,) Somers was brought before the Commissioners, who shortly after his coming, fell to the acting of some of his fits in their presence, upon a former Compact and Agreement made betwixt him and others, before he came thither.  
Herewith, all that favoured M. Darrell, began to rejoice, 
M. Aldridge narration.  and to run abroad into the town, telling their friends with great joy, that Somers was now found to have been no dissembler: but the rest that had held a contrary opinion, they were greatly rated and checked: insomuch as when some of them came out of the house where the Commissioners sat, they were not only rated at exceedingly, 
Nich. Shepherd.  but to one of them by the throwing of a stone some violence was offered. Thus M. Darrell and his friends triumphed for nine or ten days, having by the direction of the said Commissioners Somers amongst them again, who playing his old tricks denied that he had dissembled. But this their joy ended, when the said days were expired: for Somers, by the direction of the L. Chief justice of the common Pleas, was no sooner gotten again out of the hands of M. Darrell and his friends, but of himself he confessed (as before) the whole course of his dissimulation, and why he had affirmed to the said Commissioners, that the fits acted before them were not counterfeited. 
I. W  With this alteration M. Darrell and his adherentes were greatly troubled; the parts taking on both sides began to be more violent, and the town became to be extraordinarily divided, one railing upon an other, at their meeting in the streets, as they were affected in that cause. The pulpits also rang of nothing but Devils, 
M. Aldridge  and witches: wherewith men, women, and children were so affrighted, as many of them durst not stir in the night, nor so much as a servant almost go into his masters cellar about his business without company. Few grew to be sick or evil at ease, but strait way they were deemed to be possessed. Briefly such were the stirs in Nottingham about this matter, as it was feared the people would grow (if they were not prevented) to further quarrels and mutinies, or to some greater inconvenience.  
Hereof the L. Archbishop of Canterbury being advertised by the said L. Chief justice, and others, did think it in his wisdom very necessary to call for M. Darrell by virtue of her majesties Commission for causes Ecclesiastical, who being accordingly sent for, appeared before him and others at Lambeth: from whence he was committed to prison, by reason of his absurd and untrue (but yet very confident) assertions: giving thereby just occasion to suspect, that he was but a counterfeit: and order was taken for the further examination of that cause, according to the usual course by the laws of the Realm, in such cases provided. The issue whereof was, that upon the hearing of M. Darrell, and the depositions against him in open Court, before the Lord Archbishop of Canterbury, the L. Bishop of London, the Lord Chief justice of her majesties Bench, the L. Chief justice of the Common Pleas, M. D. Caesar M. of the Requests, M.D. B'ing Deane of the Arches, and M. D. Stanhope: (the Earl of Shrewesbury and some other gentlemen of good note, with many others being present,) he the said M. Darrell, was by the full agreement of the whole Court, condemned for a counterfeit: and together with M. More (his companion, who took upon him to justify the said Darrell, and had otherwise greatly misbehaved himself) they were both of them deposed from the Ministry, and committed to close prison, there to remain until order were taken for their further punishment. The justice of which sentence will sufficiently appear by this treatise, enforced (as it were) to be published by the casting out of certain Pamphlets, which do so much impeach it: suffering none to escape their bitterness, that have dealt against M. Darrell (but yet for the truth) in this cause.  
Upon M. Darrel's first committing, & within a while after, some matters began to break out against him, besides the Confession of Somers: it remaineth to note how many of his friends were kindled, and what choler they showed by depraving, not only of such lawful courses as were taken to find out the truth, but also of those persons that had to deal therein: notwithstanding they were oft desired but to stay themselves, and suspend their judgements, until the cause were thoroughly examined, heard, and determined. diverse of them came up to London, & in secret corners exclaimed bitterly against his committing to prison, justifying by many devices his former actions. Those who had dealt in his behalf at Nottingham (thinking by his imprisonment themselves to be touched) ceased not to solicit great personages in his behalf. Hard words were given out against such as had M. Darrell in examination, and the rest also of her majesties said Commission. A letter was written to the Lord Bishop of London, threatening him with the authority of great persons, who were said (but falsely) to have taken upon them the defence of M. Darrell: and resembling both him and another of Honour (as the author termeth them) to the two false judges that condemned guiltless Susanna, and to the Scribes and Pharisees that took council together to put Christ to death  
But of that which is more worthy of reprehension in them, it might in some sort have been borne with (as the common Proverb sayeth) for losers to have their words: so for them to have taken their pleasure in speaking what they list, whilst the matter did hang in suspense, and was but in the way of trial. But now seeing that after long deliberation M. Darrell hath been judged for a dissembler (as is before expressed) which might have satisfied any reasonable men: it cannot but be thought a very outrageous course, to continue such like their bold and railing lewdness, and with some increase thereof to publish their choler and stomachs in print, giving forth at their pleasures some other written copies containing the like stuff. They that imagine Somers was not possessed, 
The preface to M. Darrel's Apology.  but did counterfeit (sayeth the Preface) do by consequence deny the sovereignty of our Saviour in the action. And one of the written Pamphelites: To deny the work of the Devils, and God in the dispossession of Somers, may seem to be after a sort, to deny them in the Gospel. Indeed if M. Darrel's credit were as good in saying, that Somers was possessed, and that by his, and his fellows means he was dispossessed: as the Evangelists and Apostles ought to be, when they tell us of diverse that were possessed in Christ's time, (whom our Saviour did not only himself deliver, but gave power also to them and others to do the like,) than their said Collections were pertinent. Otherwise many false knaves from time to time, having deluded the people with hypocrisy, and pretence of casting out devils, it is a suggestion of Satan for any to collect, that thereby the said actions of our Saviour, & his Apostles, are in any sort blemished: but let them rail on.  
The proceedings against M. Darrell and others, (sayeth the Author of the brief Narration) Have been very violent. And again, being brought before the seat of justice, they who at the same time gave gentle audience to Papists, Arrians, Atheists, and Blasphemers, would not permit M. Darrell to speak any thing almost in his own defence. And the Author of the Preface to M. Darrel's Apology: M. Darrell hitherto could not obtain so much, as patiented audience, or any judicial course of proceeding. Again, Their proceedings have been indirect, contrary to the royal commandment of her Majesty, her laws, and lawful Liberties of her loyal Subjects. And again, the said Narration: his judges became parties, pleaders, and accusers: Again also M. Darrell and M. More are now imprisoned for giving testimony to the truth. Again, let men beware in crediting false rumours against those holy men of God, who do now, or shall hereafter suffer in this holy cause. Again, the Devil and his Agents conspire in one complotte, against this mighty work of the Lord jesus. It seemeth so evidently to be the finger of God, as though we ourselves should forsake it, as with judas to betray our Master: Yea with Pharaoh set ourselves to obscure it: Yet the Lord if he love us, will rather make the stones to cry and utter it, yea the devils themselves to acknowledge it, than it shall be hid. Again, when they have had their swinge but a little, they will be ashamed of their own folly: Again, I would advise them that slander this work, and persecute the servants of God without cause, to take heed, lest they be found even fighters against God. He that sitteth in Heaven sees their devices, and laughs them to scorn, and they and all their conspiracies, plots, slaunderinges, and revilings shall consume like a snail. And again, when the Saducees, Gallenistes, and Naturalistes of our time have considered of the matter, we will expect some new objections. In the mean season let him that is filthy, be filthy still: but do Satan what he can, wisdom shall be justified of her children.  
These are children indeed: To what ripeness in railing think you they will grow, by the time they be men? It is true that there is a wisdom: whose children by their outward appearance they may well be accounted. Of which wisdom S. james speaking sayeth. If ye have bitter envying etc. rejoice not, neither Bee liars against the truth, for this wisdom descendeth not from above, but is earthy, sensual, and devilish. And S. Jude cometh also as near them: who maketh it a particular note of false seducers, to speak evil of them who are in authority.  
Now as concerning the witnesses that are used in this matter: the said wisdoms children are mightily (as it seemeth) offended with them, and with such also as did examine them. The witnesses (saith the Preface) that voluntarily offered to be deposed for the truth, were repulsed: all partial persons that could be thought upon, were presently called. Also the Narrator: These proper Commissioners refused such as were willing to justify the truth upon their oaths, they picked out whom they listed, and wrote what pleased them. And a third writeth thus to the Bishop of London, concerning himself, & others in authority. You condemn the guiltless servants of God, upon Summer's bare report only, excepting eight or nine false witnesses, who say, that they think in their consciences, that the said Somers did but counterfeit. If these fellows words or writings deserved any answer, the truth in this behalf were sufficient to stop their throats: being so wide & open sepulchres of falsehood and corruption. But their tongues are their own, and of likelihood they are determined if they can (as it is in the Psalm) to prevail with them. Howbeit (as by the way, and a little to clear these calumniations) be it observed, that the whole number of witnesses produced against M. Darrell, being about forty and four: thirty and four of them at the least, are such as had some extraordinary liking of him, & were reputed to be his friends and favourers. Of the said forty and four, twelve were used by Master Darrell himself, as witnesses examined to prove Somers no dissembler: four of them being ministers. Seven came up to London, to justify his proceedings, and to procure him what friendship they could: three of them also being ministers, and eight others not reckoned before, are preachers or graduates. If there be some three or four of the whole number, that suspected more falsehood in M. Darrel's proceedings then the rest, yet are their depositions, but unto some one or two points, and those not greatly material. The matters of importance, whereby M. Darrel's juggling is detected, are deposed by his chiefest friends: and therefore there is no such cause of clamour, why they should either be charged with partiality, or falsehood. If they have in any sort offended, it may be thought to be rather in concealing something that they knew, then in devising of any untruths against him. And for the writers of their examinations, they were men lawfully authorized in that behalf, and public Notaries, sworn to deal truly in such causes. Besides, every of the said examinations is subscribed with the hand of the party examined, and of the Commssioners who took the same. But it is an easy matter to speak evil, for such as are of the devising and slandering humour: who care not what they either say or write, so they think it may serve their turn.  
Why these men should thus be overcarried, that nothing will content them, but that when they have not what they would, they will thus lay about, may be a question. There is mention made before of a combination or association: the intent whereof may be left at large. Some little guesses may be made, so they be not enforced as concludent. M. Darrell being taken at Nottingham by some, for a time, to be a marvelous bug to scar the Devil, was in the heat thereof chosen by certain in the town, to be their preacher, having otherwise no lawful authority in that behalf. 
The written treatise.  This choice, one of his friends termeth such a comfortable calling, and so warrantable, that very few ministers in our Church have had the like. The author of the brief Narration, to draw us peradventure from further dealing with M. Darrell, or at the least to show his humour, propoundeth in his margin this question, uz. Whether a Bishop and Elder be all one in scriptures. And M. More, (as cunning as M. Darrell in dealing with Satan) saith: that the faith of the Church established under the Pastors and Teachers etc. shall bring forth this fruit, namely, to cast out devils: etc. Hereunto it may be added, that many, who have taken M. Darrel's cause most to heart, have been noted heretofore as favourers of the overworn Consistorian faction. Of these premises it would peradventure anger them, if any should collect, that in all likelihood, seeing neither by learning, nor sufficient arguments, they could heretofore prevail, for the setting up of their Presbyterial conceits, they thought to supply their wants therein, by this devise of casting out devils. It were to be wished, that at the last they would leave this giddiness, or at the least touching the matter in hand, to think more reverently of those that be in authority, and not persist as yet they do, in the further justification of M. Darrell, their weakness therein being more apparent by those points that follow.   

CHAP. III. How M. Darrel's friends have set out the pretended dispossessing of William Somers.  
AS M. Darrel's favourers have been bold to slander the persons and courses held for the detecting of his cozenages: so are they very earnest (by extolling above the rest, the pretended dispossessing of William Somers) to justify therein his course and proceed with him. The brief Narration termeth it, A marvelous work of God: a glorious work greater then which hath scarcely been heard of, either in our days, or in the days of our forefathers for many years. The truth of this work (saith he) shall break forth as a light, and the glory thereof as a burning lamp. And again: it is a candle lighted by God upon a candlestick, in the heart & centre of the land, that the beams thereof might shine forth, and give light to all the Realm. And another of his friends in his said written treatise telleth us, that, All who love the Lord jesus in sincerity, must be careful to clear & publish this work, as the wonderful work of Christ's own finger. And again: it may be justly hoped, that it will prove a matter of as great consequence, as ever any such work that the Lord gave extraordinarily, since the time that he restored the Gospel amongst us, and as profitable to all that truly profess the Gospel of jesus Christ.  
These fellows (we see) are marvelously ravished with this superexcellent wonder. But mark how truly one of them speaketh: peradventure against his will. It will prove (forsooth) to be a matter of as great consequence, and as profitable, as ever any such work, since the restitution of the Gospel amongst us. Any such work: you may believe him. For the pretended dispossessing of the maid of Chester, was nothing else but a ridiculous toy. M. Darrell himself will not say, that Devils are cast out in such sort. And like to that was the casting of a Devil out of one Mildred, the base daughter of Alice Norington, at Westwell in Kent, in the year 1574. which for all the goodly pretences that were made by two ministers, Roger Newman, & john Brainford (equally to M. Darrell and M. More) was confessed in the end to be but a mere cozenage. Read M. Scots discourse of witchcraft, the 7. book, the first Chapter. It seemeth that practice was one of M. Darrel's patterns. Such a work also was the very wonderful and strange miracle of God, (as the title of the book runneth) showed upon a Dutchman, of the age of xxiii. years, which was possessed of ten Devils, and was by God's mighty providence dispossessed of them again, the 27. of januarie, in the year 1572. Notwithstanding that the Mayor of Maidstone, Nicasius Vanderscheure, (the minister of the Dutch Church there) and john Stikelbowe (the instrument forsooth, that cast out the said Devil) with divers others, did subscribe that pamphlet. In this number may also be ranged, the strange news out of Sommersetshire, Anno 1584. termed, a dreadful discourse of the dispossessing of one Margaret Cooper at Ditchet, from a devil in the likeness of a headless bear. Hereunto in like manner may be added, the very strange vexation of the maid of Bury: of Agnes Brigges, and Rachel Pinder in London: all of them counterfeit and lewd practices, resembling or imitating the wicked devices of the holy Maid of Kent: who by the instigation of two false Priests, Edward Bocking, and Richard Masons (with their associates) took upon her in King Henry the eights days, to have marvelous trances, to the great admiration of the whole country: as it appeareth very fully in the Statutes at large. An. Hen. 8.25. Cap. 12.  
But why doth M. Darrel's friend omit the dispossessing of Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, & the seven. in Lancashire? Are not their deliverances of as great consequence as that of William Somers? Surely they are thought so: & the profit which is expected, that will ensue of all those four strange works, is, the punishment due to such lewd cozenages: that others hereafter may eschew such wicked practices.  
But let us hear M. Darrel's said friend tell his own tale, how the dispossessing of Somers will prove so profitable: It will so do (saith he) by confounding all Atheists, who think there are no Devils: by convincing the Papists, who hold, that our Ministers can not dispossess any: by discovering of witches, Satan by Somers having disclosed many: by teaching us in Somers, that God's providence reacheth even to children: by encouraging us to fast & pray often, the same being of force to cast out Devils: and by the general furtherance it giveth to the Gospel, whilst thereby we may learn, (saith M. Moor, or his companion, one M. Dicons, writing in deed of the seven. in Lancashire) that it is God's word which we now preach, even the sword of the spirit which slayeth Satan.  
It is not amiss, that the Papists are driven to the Devil, to seek after his testimonies for the confirmation of many things: As to win a better estimation, & greater liking of their Sacrament of the Altar: their praying to Saints: their fusty relics: their conjured holy water: their Agnus Dei: & of their shavelings, and hypocritical Exorcists, they bear the world in hand, that the Devil can not endure any of them, and that he doth not therein dissemble, (as seeming to be troubled with them,) per astutiam, through craft thereby to deceive, but per infirmitatem, in that he is not able for their holiness (indeed) to abide them. And let them comfort themselves (seeing they will not be reclaimed) with that uncertain distinction, and many other such like stratagems of Satan. But for ministers of the Gospel, or any other, (that would seem to favour it) to send us to M. Darrel's dealing with William Somers, for the confounding of Atheists, for the convincing of Papists, or for our assurance, that the word of God is truly preached amongst us, must of necessity be held by the graver sort, to be a mere madness, or a frenzy at the least. What the casting out of Devils amongst other miracles in the scriptures can effect, that hath been long since wrought, through the expelling of them by Christ himself, and by his Apostles: and their miraculous working therein continueth still the like force for the confirmation of our faith, whilst the same is daily offered unto our consideration by the holy Ghost in the word of God. It is not here meant to discuss, what we ought to think touching the continuance of the power of casting out Devils: Howbeit for as much as M. Darrel's friends do so oft allege Tertullian, 
De sacramento ordinis. Cap. 2.  S. Cyprian, S. Ambrose, S. Austen. S. chrusostom, with Prosper, etc. it is not amiss to hear what Komnitius (writing against the Council of Trent) saith of this point. Exorcistas' etc. They have transformed their Exorcists into magical enchanters. In times past it was a peculiar gift to cast devils out of men's bodies by the voice of man, and power of God. And the same gift continued in the Church, in the times of S. Cyprian, S. Ambrose, S. Augustine, S. chrusostom, & of Prosper: Obsessi in templum adducebantur, & saepe communibus ecclesiae precibus liberabantur: The possessed were brought into the Church, and were oftentimes delivered by the common prayers of the Church: posteà illud donum. etc. But afterwards (saith he) that gift ceased. If M. Darrell have again obtained it, let him make much of it: & when he can bring us one, whom we may know to be in deed possessed, both he and his friends may have herein a fuller resolution.   

CHAP. FOUR How M. Darrell is made a fit instrument to cast out Devils, than many other.  
IT is commonly said, that no excellent work is performed but by excellent men. The dispossessing therefore of W. Somers, being a matter so admirable, M. Darrell must of necessity be some rare person. In which respect, as before they have told us, of glory, of lights, of lamps, & shining beams (resembling belike the supposed dispossession of Somers, to the glory that appeared in the transfiguration of Christ, thereby to justify that lewd action) so are they as lavish, in extolling and commending of him: ascribing unto him many extraordinary virtues, to cover (if it might be) his counterfeiting and cozenage. And herein they follow the beaten tract of such like devil casters: For every man is not fit for that mystery. The exorcizing Rabbins amongst the Papists do tell us, that in Christ's time, there were some being infidels, that cast out devils, having no authority given them by Christ so to do: our Saviour granting that power then (they say) to Christian's only. Now of Christians, some were Apostles and Disciples, and some were Lay people, as they termed them. Both which sorts were made fit persons to cast out devils: the one by virtue of their calling, being ecclesiastical: and the other in respect of their holy conversation. The laity had this power (they say) but a while, except it were upon some extraordinary occasions. And therein they give the chief place to women, naming S. Brigit, S. Katherine of Seen, S. Genouefa, and S. Anatolia: that sex (as it seemeth) having a general disposition, to like well of Exorcisms. After the Apostles time (they say) that the power of casting out devils, which the Apostles and Disciples had, was made an ecclesiastical office, to be bestowed by the Bishops, upon such as were termed Exorcists: whom in our language we may call Coniurors. But it is to be observed, that for this assertion, Thyraeus the jesuite (an especial Author of M. Darrel's, 
De Daemoniacis. Thyreus part 3. Cap. 37.  and his favourers) hath no scripture for his warrant, neither doth he pretend any. Touching these Exorcists, as amongst the Apostles there was a judas, the rest of them having purity of life, annexed to their gift of casting out Devils: so (they say) it happeneth now that some Exorcists, although they be of wicked conversation, may notwithstanding, (albeit more rarely) cast out devils by virtue of their office, given them by their Bishops: whereas generally those who are fit to undertake that work, must be also of an Apostolical conversation: whereupon it cometh that the jesuits, and popish Antizans do tell us in good sooth, that their Exorcists must be men of very humble spirits, void of all levity: such as are greatly inflamed with the love of God: persons endued with hope and assurance, to cast out such spirits as they meddle with: (of which hope and assurance the Apostles being sometimes destitute, as they say, did attempt in vain to cast out one devil:) men also, whose consciences are not burdened with any mortal sin, but for piety and innocency of life, are persons of especial note. And one reason alleged for this purpose, is very Logical: Contraria Contrariis pelluntur: they ought to be as good, as the devil is bad, that can cast him out of his possession: marry men thus qualified, no marvel though they tell us, that Satan cannot endure them: that the spirits themselves have complained, how they have been tormented, Sanctorun praesentia, with the presence of such Saints: that the devils sometimes have been glad to leave their possession, not daring to abide their coming unto them: that the devils that have presumed sometimes to abide their presence, have been so dressed, as they durst never afterwards return to those places again, where they met with them: and that therefore it is not to be wondered, that when men, who are troubled themselves with Satan, or have their children, friends, or servants so vexed, do seek after such holy persons, to be delivered by them.  
Indeed our experience doth make it no wonderment, as the jesuite sayeth. And herein M. Darrell hath had great luck: For when he was not passed two or three & twenty years old, he was supposed to be such a man, as could do somewhat in that art. When Katherine Wright was first troubled, she was by one M. Beresfordes advice sent to M. Darrell at Mansfield, and to one M. Beckingham, to be comforted, or cured of her infirmity: because (as he sayeth) he had heard M. Beckingham to be a man of note, and M. Darrell a man of hope, for the relieving of those that were distressed in that sort. Thomas Darling being troubled (forsooth), some of his friends sent to Witches. A cunning man was also procured to come unto him, who took upon him within a week to cure him. Afterwards Alice Goodridge the supposed Witch, told them that the boy would not mend, except they sought for help, saying, they might have help enough. But at those words, the Book sayeth, that the devil stopped her throat, or else peradventure, (the author meaneth) she would have told them, what kind of help they should seek for: this is but a conjecture. The certainty hereof is, that M. Walkeden (the boy's grandfather) hearing how M. Darrell had helped Katherine Wright, procured him to come to Burton, to help Darling: and the report was before he came, that one should come from Ashbie, that would give the boy such directions, as without doing him any hurt, should relieve him. When the seven in Lancashire were troubled, M. Starkie going to M. Dee for his counsel, was advised by him, to call for some honest and godly preachers, with whom he should consult. And behold how it happened. M. Dees Butler telling them, what one M. Darrell of Ashbie had done at Burton, M. Starkie and M. Dee resolved upon him, and writ their several letters unto him, for his repair into Lancashire: howbeit in this their course, there was a great imperfection. For Edward Hartley the Witch, did afterwards tell M. Starkey, that no one man could do his children and the rest there any good, it was too great a work: but there must be two or three at the least, with fervent and hearty prayer. And here you may observe a little kind of Wonder. For M. Darrell not knowing (for aught that appeareth) what the said Witch had affirmed, did of his own accord, (after he was sent for by M. Dee and M. Starkie,) acquaint one M. Moor with the matter, and obtaining him to be his companion in that action, fulfilled and devils words, that two at the least must undertake that work. By the time that Somers had his fits, M. Darrell was of some name: and besides having a sister in law in Nottingham, one Mistress Wallys, she was not tongue-tied, what a man her Brother was: and thereupon being urged by certain women, she writ to M. Darrell the letter, importing (sayeth Mrs. Grace) that the Lady Zouch, she herself, and divers other Gentlewomen, requested him to come over to see the said Somers.  
Hitherto it may appear, how M. Darrell hath been sought unto, which argueth that he was thought by some to be such a man, as if he met with the devil, he was able to curb him. But whether his gifts, and conditions be like the better sort of Exorcists, as they have been described out of Thyraeus, that remaineth to be declared. For he doth not challenge any power to cast out devils by virtue of his ministry, and therefore it must be his Holiness, or nothing, that must support him. Upon M. Darrel's calling into question, for his dealing with Somers, and the rest, there hath been great endeavour used to colour the same by an extraordinary commendation of his carriage, & conversation. A man would think that Thyraeus had been perused, he is made so suitable unto his Exorcists. One Serson an Attorney with one Serson a Preacher, M. Walleis and M. Small went publicly from house to house in Nottingham, to procure hands (as Small confesseth) unto a certificate, or testimonial, concerning his the said Darrel's unspotted behaviour. The like endeavour was also used, for the procuring of such an other testimonial from Ashbie. Others in like manner of his friends have published in writing: that he abhorreth all kind of counterfeiting and dissembling: that he is not given to any desire of vain glory: that if he had plotted any such matter as is laid to his charge, he is not of disposition to have concealed it, etc. An other sayeth, that he is so far from cozenage or deceit, as that he hath himself been deceived: that having begun the study of the law, he perceived therein such great corruption, as he gave himself to the study of Divinity, that so he might serve God, and keep a good conscience: that being a Minister, he preached for the trial of his gifts, having no ecclesiastical living: that such was his integrity, as it hath not been beard of, that ever he did labour for any Church living: that he might have had once a parsonage, if he would but have said, I could be content to accept such a thing, if it were offered me, which he durst not do for displeasing of God: that he is a man so far from covetousness and ambition, as if he would have given a little underhand, he might have had a Benefice or two, worth five or six hundredth pounds yearly: that he is so far from pride and vain glory, as he hath not been known to disdain the company of any honest man, though never so base: that he is indeed earnest and bold, but it is when he hath a good cause, as the servants of God, Peter and john, with most of the faithful Martyrs of Christ have been: and that his adversaries having sifted him, through the whole course of his life, can find nothing against him. What is reported of M. Darrell, shall not now be confuted, his honesty, he may be sure will never hurt him: You may only be advertised, that his said friend forgetteth himself in affirming, that M. Darrel's life hath been so searched into. For true it is, that diligent care was had, and commandment given accordingly, that touching his conversation, otherwise then appertained directly to his pretended course of casting out devils, there should not any one point be inquired into: neither was there, as by the acts in record it may appear, and as it is supposed, M. Darrell will himself confess.  
But to come more directly to the point in hand. Although these M. Darrel's said pretended virtues, do make him answerable to the popish Exorcists: yet that forsooth is not sufficient, but Thyraeus the jesuite, must in effect tell us so. For M. Darrel's said friend, setting down certain reasons, why God hath made him the said Darrell, rather than many, (otherwise more wise, and learned than he) an especial instrument in these days, for the casting out of devils, maketh this one, uz. in that he is such a man, as is qualified according to Thyraeus the jesuits said rules, set down by him in his Book, the Daemoniack, Cap. 38.39. Out of which Chapters, that which Thyraeus requireth in his Exorcists, this man allegeth to be manifest in M. Darrell, saving that amongst some other things, he omitteth, whether M. Darrel's conscience be burdened with any mortal sin. Otherwise for many of the rest, naming them, uz. that he is a man of good report: one that despiseth the world: not covetous: of an humble spirit: not ambitious: not proud: zealous of God's glory: much given to prayer and to the service of God: and of an especial confidence in the Lord: these graces (he sayeth) God hath bestowed upon M. Darrell: and therefore by Thyraeus rules, were there nothing else to the contrary, he might be thought to be a well furnished, and very complete Exorciste. But one thing is reported of M. Darrel, which passeth the rest, & maketh it probable, (you may not doubt) that God hath given him an especial Grace above all other Exorcists, now a days to expel devils. For they say, that after a sort, he hath forsaken house, lands, and all for Christ's sake: which being an Apostolical resolution, 
A written treatise.  why should he not have that Apostolical gift granted unto him? Indeed one is as true as the other. For will you know, how he hath forsaken all to follow Christ? Having two or three houses, and a little land in Mansfielde and else where, left him by his Father, he sold the same, by his own confession, as dearly as he could, and since hath lived upon the money, being (as one of his friends sayeth) five or six hundredth pounds. How the devil in regard of this M. Darrel's Holiness, could not abide his presence, will appear in the next Chapter. In the mean while, it may well be said without offence, that if to sell land, and live upon the money, be to leave all and follow Christ, and a fit note of one that can cast out Devils: we shall not want men of that trade: many Usurers in England will prove good Exorcists. But touching his honesty, judge thereof, when you have perused this whole Treatise. Now his skill to cast out Devils, resteth to be a little looked into, together with his doctrine, whereupon he doth ground it.   

CHAP. V How M. Darrell knew William Somers, and the rest to be possessed.  
He that will take upon him to cast Devils out of men, must first know whether they have any in them, or else he may peradventure lose his labour. Forasmuch therefore as M. Darrell and M. More, are the persons of note amongst us, that have entered into this course: it is a point of good justice, that they be heard with some assistance of their friends, to speak for themselves. M. More sayeth, 
Page 82.  That in the Apostles times, those that had the gift of casting out Devils, had also an other precedent gift: first to discern the spirits, which gift was called, Discretio Spirituum. But M. Darrell is of an other opinion, and that an absurd one. For he affirmeth that Christ did not ordain any means, 
Page 67.  to know who was possessed in the Apostles time: but left that to be discerned by the manner of their fits. And so framing his judgement accordingly, he sayeth, that the only means, whereby now men are discerned to be possessed, are the signs which are mentioned in the Scriptures. But M. More is bold again herein to dissent from him. For although he conceiveth, that the said gift named Discretio Spirituum, is taken away, and that now it is to be known in some sort, who are possessed, by the signs mentioned in the Scriptures: yet he will not have those signs, the only means, 
Page 82.  but addeth Prayer unto them: saying, that the said signs, and prayer are now the means ordained by God, to succeed, and continue in place of the other: And he ascribeth so much to prayer in this work, as without it, he accounteth the other part, to be very uncertain. By prayer (sayeth he) men that are acquainted with the said signs, may ordinarily obtain such measure of God's holy spirit, as that they may be able truly to discern, whether the party, in whom the said signs do appear, be indeed possessed or not. A pretty matter, the gift of discerning of spirits is left, and a measure of God's spirit is brought us for it. It would be known what that gift was: If not a measure of God's spirit, to discern betwixt counterfeities, and such as were indeed possessed. But let that go.  
It being objected, that forasmuch as very many worthy, and godly men, notwithstanding their knowledge of the signs of possession mentioned in the scriptures, and their earnest and fervent prayers, have been very greatly deceived by sundry counterfeits, it seemeth probable, that he & M. Darrel might be also deceived in judging the seven. in Lancashire, and W. Somers to be dispossessed: one by way of prevention answereth, that M. Fox, and others, might easily be deceived therein by Satan, as not having read (as he supposeth,) Bodinus, Wierus, Mingus, and Thyraeus, that writ of devils, as he himself, M. Darrell, and the rest of that Crew have done. But M. More answereth after an other fashion: saying, that it might be they used the said means indirectly, whereas he and M. Darrell used them directly: that they were assured, that God gave them power, so to use them: that such their assurance grew from their full persuasion, that the said parties were possessed: and that it pleased God to endue them with that full persuasion, because they had used the said means so directly. In which his circular folly, every point is more uncertain than other, even that of their full persuasion: because it is supposed, that they dealt like a couple of cozening hypocrites, (at the least one of them) making show of that which was not. But what will M. Darrell say to these points, thus confidently set down by his fellow M. More? They tend so much to his greater worship, as ten to one he will wind himself one way or other within the compass of them, that so he may therein part stakes with him. And yet it will be hard for him so to do: For he holding (as it will appear hereafter) that the wicked, and such as are not reconciled to God, by a true justifying faith, may in these days (the power of doing miracles being ceased) cast out devils: either he must say, that they have no means left them to discern who are possessed (which were absurd): or confess, that the prayers of the wicked may prevail as much to that effect (as M. More affirmed theirs did): or else leaving M. Moor to his prayers, he is driven to his own hold, that the only means whereby the possessed may be discerned, are the signs of possession mentioned in the scriptures. Amongst which signs (he insisting so much upon them, & keeping so many Audits of them) it is much marveled, why he still omitteth the breaking of fetters and chains mentioned by S. Luke. If it had appeared without all juggling, that no iron chains or fetters could have held either Somers, or any of the rest, (they having been fastened with them, as the keeper of Newgate could have used them) he had said something.  
But to proceed with M. Darrel's only means, being the signs mentioned in the scriptures: Of them he telleth us there are eighteen, but in his Apology he nameth but six of them: crying, gnashing of teeth, wallowing, foaming, extraordinary and supernatural strength, and supernatural knowledge. To the which the rest may be added after his understanding: casting into the fire, casting into the water, tearing, pining, falling to the ground, nakedness, the party striking of himself, abiding in no house but about graves, mountains, and in the wilderness; dumbnes, deafness, fierceness, bruising the body of the party when his fit endeth. It may be marveled why M. Darrell and his friends, talking in their late pamphlets so much of the signs of possession, they still omit those two, or at the least speak not of them directly, which served his turn in place of juggling sticks, and were the principal grounds, whereupon his legerdemain did consist. The one is, that whosoever is possessed, is in his fits altogether senseless, and deprived for the time, both of his understanding, and memory: the other, that albeit such as are possessed do in their fits many things, as if they were not possessed, and also make very reasonable answers to such questions as are propounded unto them, yet it is not they, but the Devil in them, that doth both answer and do them. But it may be they are now ashamed of these points: for it will be hard to find any author amongst the grossest sort of the popish Exorcists, or else where, that ever maintained these assertions. The lunatic in the scriptures, was in his fits dumb: but it can not be showed that he wanted the rest of his senses. In some others also it is plain, that Satan did speak at some times, as when the wicked spirits desired our Saviour, that they might go into the heard of swine: but it cannot be thereof inferred, that the party possessed with those spirits, did never in his fits, speak or do any thing of himself. Besides, it is a general position, that Satan possessing once body, hath not to do either with his understanding or memory, otherwise then by troubling his fancy.  
But let it be supposed, that these two were in the number of M. Darrel's eighteen only signs of possession, mentioned in the scriptures: yet some of his own friends will therein also oppose themselves against him. For if the signs mentioned in the Scriptures, be the only means to discern who are possessed: what must become of many other signs, that Master Darrell and his friends do so much ground themselves upon, as the running in Summer's flesh, of a lump as big as a Mouse, etc. which must either uphold their reputations, or else they are in danger to fall to the ground? For the preventing therefore of this inconvenience, and for the enlarging of their bounds to work in, the author of the Brief Narration, not contenting himself with Master moors prayers, nor allowing of Master Darrelles judgement in this point, hath learned of the said jesuite a new shift. Seeing (saith he) that men in this matter are grown more incredulous than heretofore, it hath pleased God, (besides the signs of possession mentioned in the Scriptures) to give other signs also more free from cavil, to make his glorious works most apparent and certain. And hereof he bringeth for an example one of Summer's pretended fits in these words: all the signs mentioned in the Scriptures, might more easily be deluded by this conceit of counterfeiting, than this movable swelling. If men were here disposed to take exceptions, it might be demanded, when God was pleased to give these new demonstrative signs of possession, and unto whom, and how he signified the same: or whether this conceit doth not proceed from some of the popish unwritten verities? In deed he relieth in this devise upon Thyraeus the jesuite, and quoteth for it his book De Daemoniacis. Howbeit, if he follow him too far, as he hath already brought him from the Scriptures, so will he quite dash both him and Master Darrell concerning their old and new devised signs of possession: leaving them no assurance at all, how they may discern who is possessed. For the jesuite is flat, that neither the confession of the party, 
Thyraeus part. 2. cap. 22.23.24.25.  nor his wicked life, nor his fierce conversation, nor his barbarous and beastly outcries, nor his terrible countenance, nor the privation almost of all his vital functions, nor his continual diseases, and inward torments, incurable by the Physicians, nor the having of the Devil oft in ones mouth, nor for a man to consecrate himself to Satan: nor the suffering of more grievous torments, than those do endure that are in deed possessed: nor for one to seek to kill himself: nor for a man, giving himself to the Devil to be presently snatched away by him: nor the revealing of secret matters: nor the knowledge of strange languages, never learned by the party: nor extraordinary strength: nor all the signs, that appeared in such as were possessed in the Evangelists, are sufficient & undoubted signs (saith he) that the party in whom they appear is possessed.  
If therefore M. Darrell will be a right Exorcist, after the current fashion amongst the jesuits, he must learn other signs of possession: and Thyraeus (a man so oft alleged by his friends) will not be dainty to teach him. For (saith he) these are the signs indeed, whereof there is no doubt, uz. when the parties that seem to be possessed, refuse to call upon God, or to pray to saints, or to pronounce the word jesus: or to receive some prayer or Psalm: or when they tremble, are afraid, grow impatient, or blaspheme at the applying unto them of the relic of any Saint, or of a picture made in wax, called an Agnus Dei, or at the making of a cross upon their foreheads, or at the bringing unto them the sacrament of the Altar, or when they can not abide the Priests, that do exorcize them, or at the least do endure them very hardly. His & similibus signis Daemones prodi dubium nullum est: there is no doubt (saith he) but that by these and such like signs the Devils are disclosed: to be, it may be added in these that practise them, either as possessing them, or at the least seducing them. For what a ridiculous illusion is this, to reject upon simple pretences, so many strange signs of possession? some of them carrying with them impossibilities by the course of nature: and to bring such unto us, as may so easily be counterfeited, by every youth or girl within an hours instruction.  
Here M. Darrel's friends will peradventure say in anger, that both he and they are as far from these fooleries, as any that have disliked of their proceed. Howbeit, by their leaves, they may in some sort therein be checked. For there is pretence made to the like effect, that the Devils that M. Darrell and M. Moor met with, could neither abide them, nor the word of God: which are two of Thyraeus infallible signs of possession. When the parties that are pretended to have been possessed at M. starkie's house in Lancashire, did hear that they two would come unto them, they are made to have said thus to their particular spirits: uz. Thou naughty lad, thou makest us sick, for thou knowest the preachers will come shortly, meaning (saith M. Moor) himself and M. Darrell. Likewise, when they were come to the said M. starkie's house, and that three of the said parties being all of them quiet in the kitchen, & sent for severally to come to them into the hall, they appeared no sooner before them (as the history reporteth) but having made low courtesies unto them, they fell down by course into their fits. And the third of them, coming in with both her hands closed to her face (not being able (as it seemeth) to endure the brightness of the godly men's countenances) uttered these words: I am come to council before I am called. At Nottingham also M. Darrell so used the matter with Somers, as the boy being in a fit, when M. Darrell one night left him, & crying, now he is gone: now he is gone: 
Rob Cooper. pag. 98.  now black coat is gone: all that were present (saith Robert Cooper) thought M. Darrell to be so godly a man, as that the Devil was glad, and rejoiced when he was departed. This conceit had of him, may also further appear by the Ballet maker, concerning Summer's description in his fits, of the sins that reigned in Nottingham, whereof hereafter, who rymeth thus: But when that M. Darrell came, the Devil was vexed with the same: His limbs he racked, he rend & tore, far worse than he did before. And touching the other pretended sign, it was an ordinary course held by the keepers of the boy of Burton, that when any strangers came in, that desired to see him in his fits (as men desire to see monsters and strange beasts play their tricks): then they would read some parts of the Gospel by S. john: and strait way (forsooth) the Devil must show himself, by casting the boy into some fit. This reading, they termed, the offering of battle or combat to Satan. When one Phippes, a servant of M. Brinsleyes', supposed himself to be possessed, and that the Devil entered into him, as he thought in the likeness of a Nitte: Master Darrell persuaded him, that he was not possessed: because (saith he) you received comfort, 
Brinsly. pa. 130.  when you hear the word of God read, or any prayers, or godly exhortations: whereas William Somers, and others being possessed, were at such times greatly troubled and tormented. Again, M. Darrell and M. More, beginning to exhort some of those in Lancashire, two of them presently cried out mightily with outrageous roaring and bellowing: & the note upon that place saith thus, 
History. fol. 14.  though the Devil had dissembled & hid himself in both these (for they had been quiet sundry days) yet now the word of God findeth him out: he can dissemble no longer, but must needs show himself.  
By these two sleights borrowed from the popish Exorcists they did greatly inveigle & seduce their beholders: the first tending to the setting out of themselves, & to be had in admiration, whilst they were supposed to be such devout men, as Satan could not endure: & the other, under pretence of magnifying the scriptures (which seek no falsehood to win them commendation) they used a colour to overshadow their lewdness, when at their pleasures, they might thereby without less suspicion, begin and practise their fits or pageants. Assuredly it may well be supposed, that if this their course had not been met with in time, we should have had many other pretended signs of possession: one Devil would have been mad at the name of the Presbyter: an other at the sight of a minister that will not subscribe: an other to have seen men sit or stand at the Communion: and so as it had pleased our good Masters the Exorcists. And that this conjecture may not be thought to be a vain collection, you shall see how stinted (as they term them) and read prayers, are notably foiled. M. Moor telleth us: that when a prayer was read out of prayer book, in the hearing of those that were possessed in Lancashire, they, that is the Devils in them, were little moved with it: but afterwards when M. Darrell, 
M. Moor ad art. 9 pag. 232.  & he, with one M. Dicons, did severally use such prayers, as for the present occasion they conceived: then (saith he) the parties, that is, the wicked spirits, were much more troubled, that is, troubled the parties much. See, the Devil was tricte with their conceived prayers, and could not abide them, therefore such must needs be excellent prayers. As for read prayers, he careth not for them, they have no force to trouble him, and therefore who should respect them? But you are detained too long in this matter. When M. Darrell, with his fellows, and all other Exorcists, or Devil drivers are agreed, & (this one position of theirs granted unto them, that the Devil may torment a man as much being without him, as within him) can make it apparent unto us without their gross and palpable forgeries: that they are able to discern who is possessed: then let them tell us, that they have dispossessed them.   

CHAP. VI Of M. Darrel's knowledge, who sent the Devil into Somers, and the rest.  
IT seemeth to be a matter very pertinent to the dignity of an Exorcist, that he be able to declare who sent the Devil into his patient. For men of that trade do affirm, that sometimes it is God, sometimes holy men, and sometimes witches, that do send them. To omit their assertions touching God and godly men (although they contain very strange points, and interpretations, as they are propounded, and handled by the Doctors of Devil driving) that of witches is now most pertinent. For all the Devils that M. Darrell hath hitherto encountered, were sent by them (as it seemeth) into his patients. Whether witches can send Devils into men or women (as many do pretend) is a question amongst those that writ of such matters; & the learneder and sounder sort do hold the negative. Against whom Thyraeus opposeth himself, & with Thyraerus M. Darrell, & that not without very pregnant reasons, if he may be credited. For he is able to specify or describe the particular parties that sent their spirits into his patientes, together with their several names, 
Dar. add artic 24. pa. 42.  and in what manner the witches did send them. Middlecub the Familiar spirit of one Margaret Roper of Eckling in Darbishire, did by her commandment possess Katherine Wright, 
The Book of Darling.  Alice Goodridge of Staphen-hill in Darbyshire, having a spirit called Minny, in the likeness of a dog, part coloured red, and white, did send the same to torment Thomas Darling, having first taught her said spirit, by straining her own body, and vomiting, how he should handle and vex his. 
The story.  The seven in Lancashire were, (as it seemeth) possessed by the means of one Edward Hartley, who breathed wicked spirits into them, (as it was supposed) by kissing them. 
Dar. ad art. 6. Pa, 228.  An old woman meeting William Somers upon Blackewell-more heath, did procure her spirit to enter into him, or by his accepting at her hands a piece of bread and butter, and eating it. Touching this old woman last mentioned, M. Darrell for a time was peremptory to the effect specified, but since (there falling out a matter contrary to his expectation, whereof hereafter he now affirmeth, 
Darrel's lust  and one of his fellows hath printed it, that an old woman in Worcestershire, did that stratagem, by sending into Somers a Familiar of hers, called Lucy. 
Marry Couper.  And for Marie Couper (M. Darrel's last patient) it was one Alice Freeman of Nottingham, that directed the devil to possess her: she poor woman, suspecting she had been with child, till M. Darrell told her it was a wicked spirit within her, that caused her so to swell, would any man desire to have a question more directly resolved? The only doubt is to those that be simple men, how M. Darrell came to the knowledge of these things. And it would be well cleared. The jesuitical and popish Exorcists, that hold for this work of Witchery, have but two ways, (as it seemeth) whereby they know when the spirits are sent by Witches, and the one is the Confession of the devil, that is cast out, and the other the Confession of the Witches, who threw him in. And thus far M. Darrell is fully provided to answer for his skill. For it was Middlecub the spirit (he sayeth) that told him, that Margaret Roper, did send him into Katherine Wright: And touching Thomas Darling, Alice Goodridge confessed, that she sent her Minnie into him, mistaking him for one Sherrartes boy.  
The Book also of the seven in Lancashire, doth after a sort insinuate, that Edward Hartley confessed his sending of seven devils into them: But how he will shift concerning Alice Freeman, and the foresaid old woman of Darbishire, and Worcestershire, he hath nothing as yet for aught that is known, but William Somers, and Marie Coupers reports, which his M. Thyraeus sayeth, are not sufficient, although the parties for the justifying of them, should offer themselves, ad plagas & virgas. But to help him herein, if men may be bold a little with the jesuite: why should not either Mary Couper, or Wlliam Somers, be aswell believed, in saying that Alice Freeman, and the said old women bewitched them, and by that means sent their wicked spirits into them, as Middlecub, who told M. Darrell, that Mary Roper sent him into Katherine Wright? For when either Thyraeus, or M. Darrell tell us, that the spirits have confessed, who sent them: what do they say in effect, but that the parties themselves told them so? Neither of them both dare say, that the devils, after they were cast out, did, or do use to tell any such matter: but the truth is, that when by their knavery, they have induced the parties supposed to be possessed, to say that such or such a woman bewitched them: then they tell those that are present, that it is not the said parties, but the wicked spirits that so confess who sent them. And touching the confession of the Witches themselves, that may be left well enough to such learned men, as have written sufficiently of it. In the mean while, let M. Darrel's foolish conceits be further considered of.   

CHAP. VII. Of the Causes pretended, why men are possessed.  
AS there are pretended divers means, whereby Satan is sent into men, and women, to possess them: so are there sundry causes devised, why they are sent. For example, sometimes they say, they are sent without any respect of the parties offences, into whom they are sent, and sometimes, in regard of their offences. Now of sins or offences they make two sorts: the one Mortal, and the other Venial; the Mortal are thus recited. Infidelity, 
Thyraeus de Demoniacis, part. 2. cap. 30.  abusing of the Eucharist, blasphemy, pride, luxuriousness, envy, covetousness, persecution of godly men, disobedience to parents, slandering speeches, contempt of religion, for one to curse himself to the devil, to be at league with Satan, and the contempt of the Sacrament of confirmation. The Venial, you must think are in number many: these following are reckoned to be of that kind: Idle words, jesting speeches, sporting lies, immoderate laughing, and such like: For the remission whereof, 
Gabriel Bicl.  Non requiritur poenitentia proprié accepta, neque actualis, neque habitualis, neque sacramentalis, repentance being properly taken is not necessary, neither actual, habitual, nor sacramental. The Bishop's blessing knocking on the breast, and a little holy water, will rid a man of them.  
That the Devil is sent into men for mortal sins, they hold it clear: but whether for Venial sins or not, that is made a great question, and Thyraeus resolveth it. It is most certain (sayeth he) that Venial sins have given Satan occasion to possess men, and they are accordingly delivered corporally unto him, pro levissimis quibusque, delictis, for the least offence that can be committed: A very hard cause, that men should be in such a plight for no greater a matter, than a little holy water will wash away. Now, forasmuch as the spirits that possess men, have interest more or less in them, (as some hold), according to the quality of the causes, for the which they were sent into them: and will not therefore be so easily expelled, when they enter for mortal sins, as for Venial, as it is an especial part of the Exorcists duty (as their rules declare), when they endeavour to cast out the Devil, to travel by all the means they can devise, that they may learn the cause of his entrance. And lest any man should think, that therein they lose their labours: and for the better justifying of Thyraeus resolution for Venial sins: both he and M. Darrell (together with his friends) do tell us very pretty tales. The jesuite sayeth, that the Devil entered into one maid, because she was in great love with a young man, and into an other, for that she endeavoured herself to have a resemblance of Venus' picture: and into an other, propter impatientiam, & durius prolatum verbum, for uttering a sharp word: and into an other, because with some greediness, she did eat the leaf of a Lettuce, (the devil cleaving unknown to her, to the neither part of the leaf,) forgetting to bless it with the sign of the Cross. But hereof there need no more examples: the doctrine being so plainly set down, that Satan entereth into men, for the least Venial sin: Howbeit if any man desire more, he may be assured, that their Legends will afford him store of them: and for a new supply, M. Darrell, and his friends in the mean while, will not herein be silent. 
Dar. ad art. 24,  Katherine Wright (forsooth) denying something to Mary Roper, the devil by the said Mary's direction did possess her. Afterwards also, Satan coming to the said Katherine Wright in the likeness of a handsome man, 
john Wig. fol. 7.  that making suit unto her in the way of marriage, gave her a piece of bread, she in taking the same at the devils hands, and eating it, became to be repossessed. Wil Somers had the devil sent into him, either by the old woman of Darbishire, because he denied at the first to give her a penny, or by the old woman of Worcestershire, for that he refused to give her a hatband, which she much desired. Why Mary Couper became to be possessed, the cause indeed is not expressed, except it were for dwelling in one house with W. Somers: it being Satan's practice (as M. Darrell said) not to content himself with one in a Family. 
Marry Couper. pa. 203.  But Thomas darlings Venial sin exceeded the rest. For he meeting Alice Goodridge in a Coppice, did let an escape (as the book termeth it,) which she taking to be done in her contempt, used these words: Gip with a mischief, and fart with a bell, I will go to Heaven, and thou shalt go to Hell. And thereupon her Minnie entered into him. True it is, that M. Darrell (when Somers pretended himself to be in his fits greatly tormented) did affirm, that he was not so much troubled for his own sins, as for the sins that reigned in Nottingham. And yet then he ascribed some part of his grief, to his singing of wanton and filthy songs: he being a physician. For of likelihood, he hath some other devise: as that the Devil may enter into a man for small Venial sins: but being in him, may torment him in many respects. A bird in a lime bush, the more she striveth, the faster she is. When a man is out of his way, the further he goeth, the more he erreth. One absurdity granted doth bring forth many. And such is M. Darrel's case in his grounds, he hath laid to work upon, which hath brought him into a maze, that he cannot get out.   

CHAP. VIII. Of the means alleged by M. Darrell, and others, whereby men are dispossessed.  
IT belongeth to those that challenge the skill to cast out devils, to know the means how it ought to be done. He were a mad Physician, that would undertake to cure a man of the palsy, or of any other disease, that never had learned any medicine for it. As good Physicians therefore have fit remedies for their patients to help them: so you must think of our cunning Exorcists, that they want no medicines for their possessed to ease them.  
The ordinary means ordained to continue in the Church, for the casting out of Devils, M. Darrell maketh to be very ancient. 
M. Darr. pag. 65. etc.  For he sayeth that it hath been in the Church, since the fall of Adam. Howbeit herein he hath no great certainty. For he confesseth that there is no mention in the old Testament of the institution of that means. And so of likelihood; if other of his positions be true, men were possessed from time to time during the space almost of 4000 years, God himself having ordained no way to cure them. But in saying that the same means do continue now in the Church, that were in use before the coming of Christ: that, his masters the popish Exorcists, will condemn as an error in him. For one of them sayeth: that the ways of casting out devils, 
Thyraeus par. 3. cap. 4.1.  in the old Testament, iam vetustate, si non alia de causa antiquatae sunt & abolitae, as being grown in dotage, are now abolished for their age. If you will know, what these ways were, Thyraeus telleth you, one was nomen Tetragrammaton: an other the smell of a certain root, revealed for that purpose to king Solomon: the third, the smoke of the heart and liver of a certain fish being laid on the fire: and the fourth, the playing of an harp or cittern, as though Saul had been possessed, (which the said Thyraeus dare not resolutely affirm,) and David's music had dispossessed him.  
But M. Darrell doth herein differ from the jesuite, and sayeth: that the means in the old Testament to cast out Satan, was fasting and prayer, even the same that yet continueth: therein also differing from his fellow M. More. For whereas M. More sayeth, that Christ did plainly ordain fasting, and prayer, to be part of the ordinary means to continue in the Church, in these words. This kind goeth not forth, but by prayer and fasting, thereby showing the beginning of the said means. M. Darrel affirmeth, that Christ finding that means to be good and godly, did in those words but approve it, and so maketh it a secret ordinance of Christ to have his continuance by way of consequence: As Christ approving it to be good, did thereby command it. Furthermore, whereas M. Darrell holdeth, that in the Apostles time, there were two sorts or kinds of casting out devils, the one ordinary, which was in the Church before the coming of Christ, uz. fasting and prayer, and the other extraordinary, uz. commanding of Satan, to departed in the name of Christ: M. More sayeth, that although he believeth that Christ did ordain fasting and prayer in the said place of Saint Matthew, to be part of the ordinary means for casting out devils: 
M. More pa. 80.81.  yet the same was not a mean to cast out devils in the Apostles time, there being then an other extraordinary means given unto them: and that Christ's meaning was, that fasting and prayer, should not be the ordinary means, till after the time that the extraordinary should cease. To hold with M. Darrell, that there was an ordinary means to cast out Devils in Christ's time, doth derogate much from the honour of his miracles in casting out Satan: For the Infidels might have surmised, that Christ had done it by the ordinary means, having used the same secretly without their knowledge. Moreover, it may argue the extraordinary means to be superfluous: there being then an ordinary means, and that of such facility, as will after appear. There is great commendation given by M. Darrel, in his Apology of certain men, (who it seemeth do favour him,) that they are learned and reverend, and of great wisdom and godliness: and indeed, he sayeth truly of some of them: howbeit it is thought, that ere it be long, he will be angry with two of the best of them. For one of them holdeth, (and of the other hereafter,) that by the said words of Christ: Prayer and Fasting are as effectual to cure a man, 
I. B. page. 7.  that is sick of an ague, as to cast out a Devil: His words are these. I am not of their opinion, that think the words of Christ. Mark. 9 uz. This kind can by no means come forth, but by prayer and fasting, do import that Christ did ordain fasting and prayer, as a particular means to cast out Devils, more than to procure men's deliverance from other afflictions.  
It hath been touched before, that M. Moor accounteth prayer & fasting, but a part of the means that Christ hath ordained for expelling of Devils: for that he addeth in the first place, Faith, as it is mere he should do: although therein he descent from M. Darrell, as he the said Moor understandeth Faith. For M. More by faith, 
M. Moor. pag. 79.  understandeth the faith that justifieth, in these words: A justifying faith, having annexed unto it fasting and prayer, is the ordinance of Christ for the casting out of Devils, for ever to continue in the Church. But M. Darrell, confessing the necessity of Faith, in the said ordinary means, saith: 
M. Darr. pag. 66.  that neither the faith of doing miracles, nor the justifying faith is therein necessary: but that the temporary or historical Faith may suffice. It being here objected, that an historical faith sufficing, (as is before expressed) and that the prayer and fasting in such as have but that faith, can not please God: it will follow, that the ordinary means which Christ hath left in his Church, for casting out of Devils as necessary, is such a means as is not acceptable to almighty God: M. Darrell answereth, that the consequence is not good. And so that point lieth: but an other may not be left a sleep. He saith, that in the said place of Mat. 17.20. that the Faith there mentioned, is to be understood to be the faith of doing miracles: that the Apostles were reproved for their weakness in that faith: and that if the same had been strong enough, they might have cast out the wicked spirit mentioned in that Chapter, ver. 21. without prayer or fasting: whereby it followeth (for aught that dull men can easily discern) that M. Darrell holding (as is before mentioned) that place of scripture to be a secret ordinance, for the continuance of fasting & prayer, as the means to cast out Devils, and that therein by faith is understood the faith of doing miracles: (which if it had been strong enough in the Apostles, prayer and fasting had been superfluous): it will follow it is thought, that the historical faith will not serve his turn, but that it must be the faith of doing miracles: which must be understood for the faith that is required of necessity, when there is need to cast out Devils. So as if he want that, he may (by his own doctrine) cast his cap at them.  
I omit here, that some of good account for their learning, do interpret the prayer and fasting mentioned in the places of S. Matthew, and S. Mark, to be required in those that are possessed with wicked spirits: and that the forbearing of both, was not any want in the Apostles. Master Darrell himself doth confess, that the party possessed aught to fast and pray, if he be able. Wherein if Satan hinder him, yet he saith, Almighty God accepteth of his will, and purpose so to do in steed of the deed. Furthermore, the popish sort do generally require the said prayer and fasting, as a preparation, in the Exorcists, and not as a means: although Thyraeus confesseth, that prayer is something. For speaking of the means, how the Devil is to be cast out, after he hath named many, he is content to give some little room to prayer, saying: Oratio quae adhibetur damnari non debet: Prayer, which is used in the casting out of Devils, must not be condemned. You see how hardly prayer cometh into the rank of the said means. And it is likewise manifest, what little account they make of the said place in Saint Matthew, to ground themselves upon, for their casting out of Devils: (albeit they are as earnest to make a trade and merchandise of it, as Master Darrell) in that they do not once mention it for that purpose: saving that they retain the commanding of Satan to departed in the name of Christ: which was the means that those used (saith M. Darrell) which had the faith of doing miracles.  
Marry besides that, they have a great number of ways, whereby they vex and torment Satan wonderfully in their expelling of him: whereof the scriptures are as silent, as they are lavish. For example, the sacrament of the Altar, the merits of Saints, the relics of Saints, the praying to Saints, by saying their litany: the sprinkling of holy water, the sign of the cross: the imposition of the priests hands, the stole which the priest useth, being laid on the party: the whipping of the possessed with holy whips, and the putting of the priests finger into their mouths. Every one of these will cast out the Devil in a mischief, (as Thyraeus by sundry pleasant tales, but in good sadness doth report:) their legends being in deed full of them. Not long before, you heard that these fooleries were reckoned for the signs of possession: and here you see they are (very wisely) made the means to dispossess men. As if the Physicians should appoint the signs of diseases for the medicines to cure them. But suffer the said grave Author to proceed: for he hath many other things of singular virtues, to terrify Satan with, in this great work: as Vestes sacrae (for their priests usually come to the parties in all their massing garments and attire) Coerei ardentes, hallowed candles burning, etc. And to have the matter done in a Church, that is a point of good importance: For some devils, that would in no wise be cast out in private houses, being brought to the Church, were strait ways expelled. But Master Darrell very providently did prevent this superstitious and erroneous conceit. For upon some talk and conference at Nottingham, where his fast should be held for the dispossessing of William Somers, and some deeming Saint mary's Church there for the best and meetest place, he would in no respect yield thereunto, saying: That if it should be kept there, there would be much attributed to the holiness of the place: 
M. Shute fol. 19 M. halam fol. 7. Anne port. fol. 3.  and wishing rather, that the place of his dispossession might be in the field, that so all people might behold it. But upon better advise, it fell out to be in a narrow low room.  
What effect the said popish means have to cast out Devils: how easily they expel them, and how they torment them: will have a time to be imparted. In the mean while it is pertinent to the purpose, to consider, how mightily (forsooth) the fasting and prayers appointed by M. Darrell, 
M. Darrell.  wrought in his patients. He and his wife, with two or three more, fasting and praying from morning till noon, out went the Devil from Katherine Wright: he could no longer endure it. At the pretended dispossession of Darling, by means of the fasting of half a score, from morning till night, and by reading certain prayers out of the book, entitled: The enemy of security, (wherein they were oft interrupted, by reason of the boy's fits) and by M. Darrel's assistance though absent: it is to be marveled (by such as delight in wonders) how the Devil was afflicted: as appeareth by his words (forsooth) but delivered by the boy, uz. Radulphus, Belzebub can do no good, his head is stricken off with a word. Again, we can not prevail, let us go out of him, and enter into some of those here. Again, we can not prevail, their Church increaseth. Again, we can not prevail, for they will not be helped by witches. Brother Radulphus, we cannot prevail: let us go to our mistress & torment her: I have had a draft of her blood to day. Again, there is a woman earnest at prayer, get her away: Nay quoth john Alsop (a man that was present) with a loud voice: we can not spare her. Thus the boy graced Mistress Wightman his Aunt. And again: Brother Glassop, we can not prevail, his faith is so strong, and they fast and pray, and a preacher prayeth as fast as they. By which preacher Master Darrell confesseth, that he thinketh the Devil meant him. The same also is at large entreated of, in the book of the seven possessed in Lancashire. Master Dicons the author of the history saith: that whilst he was in his sermon, at the time of the pretended fast for their deliverance, Margaret Hardman used these words, I must be gone, I must be gone: which must be understood to be spoken by the Devil, who was so pinched, that he could stay no longer. And again the said Margaret, (whilst Master Moor was preaching) I can not tarry, I can not tarry: I am too hot, I am too hot: let me go, let me go. Of likelihood Master Moor had coursed him. The story also saith, that Satan was so haunted by fasting & prayer, and by the word of God so zealously and powerfully applied, as if fire had been put into his hole to burn him out. The Devil also said to Elinor Hardman: You are too holy now, and have God's word amongst you. Margaret Hardman likewise being greatly affrighted, in came Master Darrell & Master Moor, where she was standing by the fire, who having comforted her with many godly exhortations, out goeth Satan, saying: that it was too holy a place for him. It should seem, that when Somers was dispossessed, as men being greatly astonished, are therewith strooken into a silence, so the devil was shrewdly dressed. He was forsooth, so extremely tormented by the fasting, prayers, & preaching of Master Darrell, and the rest, as he had no leisure to say what he must do, or what he would do: but rudely without taking any leave of them, departed.  
The means that Master Darrell and his friends do pretend in casting out Devils, are as you have heard, fasting, prayer, and faith: an historical faith (saith Master Darrell,) a justifying faith (saith Master Moor). But if you mark well what they say, and what they did, you shall find, that their preaching bare away the bell, in the dispossessing of those in Lancashire, and William Somers. For whilst Somers was in hand, Master Darrell, and an other occupied the day with two sermons, and so likewise with the other: Master Darrel's and Master Moors, and the said Master Dicons exhortations spent the most of that time. Now it is to be supposed, that the rest who were present, did attend to the preachers, and continued not their own private prayers. Besides, you hear indirect terms out of the said history of those in Lancashire, that their powerful preaching is annexed for a means to prayer and fasting. Whereunto may be added the word of God (as the story saith): Which the Devils (forsooth) could not endure to hear, but would be gone. And so you see them fall into the said popish follies, making the signs of possession the means and causes of dispossession. As it is also most apparent by M. Moor's conceit, who thinketh prayer more necessary, than the signs of possession mentioned in the scriptures, for the true discerning of those who are possessed. And who knoweth whether in time, the naming of the Presbytery would not have had the virtue of a popish relic, as well to cast out a Devil, as to disclose him: and the presence of M. Darrell, M. More, and such like; as great force therein, as the popish priests, thrusting their fingers into the party's mouths. Surely, that smelleth hereof, that when M. Darrell and M. Moor came into the place where Margaret Hardman was greatly troubled, the Devil departed, and stayed no longer. But the point is, we see these fellows as ridiculous in their conceits, touching the means how they should cast out Satan, as they have appeared in the premises, and their judgements are as well settled in that which followeth.   

CHAP. 9 Of the signs whereby M. Darrell and others do discern (as they say) when Satan is expelled.  
THe assurance that the exorcizing impostors have in these days, of the devils departure, is answerable to the rest of their uncertainties. M. Darrel's ignorance maketh him (as it seemeth) in this point confident. He is peremptory, that because it is said, in the scriptures: that the spirit of the lunatic, when he was cast out of him, 
M. Darrell ad art. 30. pag. 18. & ad art. 31. pag. 20. M. Darrell ad. art. 17. pag. 144.  did cry and rend him sore, and that he lay as one dead: that therefore these three are infallible signs appointed by God to know when one is dispossessed. Nay rather than fail, he will be content with one of them, as in his dealing with Thomas Darling hereafter will appear. It may be marveled, why the author of the brief Narration, seeing how easily some lewd knave might counterfeit these signs: that he hath not devised some other of greater certainty (because men are so dull now a days (forsooth) to believe such matters) as he hath done touching the signs of possession. Master Darell confessing, that in the Apostles times, some spirits were cast out more easily than others, might in reason have thought, that those that went out so easily, did not so grievously torment the parties at their casting out, as the rest did.  
And somewhat it is, that although there are divers mentioned in the scriptures, to have been dispossessed by our Saviour Christ and by his Apostles: yet it is said of none but of the Lunatic, Mark 9 that when Satan departed, the spirit either cried, or rend him sore, or that they lay for dead. To make therefore such particularities in one, a general rule for all, argueth greatly the weakness of his judgements.  
True it is, that he blundereth out sometimes, some other signs for his assurance when Satan departeth: and it may not be omitted, of whom he hath learned them. The popish Exorcists, 
Thyraeus part 4. Cap. 52.  finding no assurance in the scriptures (as it may be thought,) touching that point, have devised many more signs: as when the patie can abide holy relics, and the presence of the Exorcists, etc. When he saith, that he is delivered from Satan: when the Devil himself telleth the Exorcist, that he will be gone: and when according to the Exorcists commandment, he either putteth out some candle, or breaketh some such quarrel in the glass window, as he was directed to break at his going: Also, the departing from the said parties, of certain living creatures: as of flies, spiders, ants, and such like: the ceasing of their former deformity, which Satan procured: vomiting, Cum quo spiritus egressi leguntur non rarò, spirits are often times vomited out: faetor gravis: the Devils leaving behind him a great stinch: a great swelling in the part that Satan departeth at: the casting of them to the ground: And lastly, Magni tumultus, & cum tumultibus damna, great noise, and therewith danger: as when the Devil going out, carrieth a piece of the house with him.  
And now let Master Darrell be heard. When William Somers had lain a while, as though he had been dead, & after came again to himself, Master Darrell said thereupon, that he was dispossessed. His persuasion also that Darling is dispossessed, is confirmed (as he saith) by the boy's continuance so long well. The chief assurance, 
M. Darrell ad art. 17. pag. 144.  that M. Darrell and M. More had, that Satan had left jane Ashton, was her own words, uz. when rising from her fit, she said, he is gone, he is gone, I am well I thank God. And having wept in the said fit, she also said, that then Satan departed from her. So as here we have a new sign of Satan's going out of one, uz. the weeping of the party. Concerning Satan's own word, that he would be gone, there are divers testimonies (forsooth) mentioned in the 8. Chapter. The book of the boy of Burton sayeth, that towards the end of the fast for his pretended dispossession, he began to heave & lift vehemently at his stomach, and getting up some phlegm and choler, said (pointing with his finger, and following with his eyes) look, look, see you not the mouse that is gone out of my mouth? and so pointed after it, unto the farthest part of the parlour. And M. Darrell affirmeth, that when he did so vomit, and used those words, that then spirit left him. But because he will affirm nothing without good reason, he sayeth he is confirmed in that opinion by his own experience, in that it hath fallen out so with others, at the instant of their dispossession, as they have reported. Behold his demonstration, uz. as they reported, and who were these reporters, and what did they report?  
Margaret Byrom said, that at her reverting, 
The history of the seven. in Lancashire-  after she had lain as dead half an hour, she felt the spirit come up from her belly towards her breast, thence to her throat, when it left her throat, it gave her a sore lug, and all that while a dark mist dazzled her eyes: then she felt it go out of her mouth in the likeness of a crows head, and sat in the corner of the parlour, with darkness about it for a while. Then went it with such a flash of fire out of the window, that all the parlour seemed to her to be on fire. It left behind it a sorethroate, and a filthy smell, that a week after her meat was unsavoury. Here we have the jesuits stinch. And beside, the most infallible note amongst M. Darrel's three signs of dispossession, uz. lying for dead, is here confuted. For this party was revived again before Satan was gone. Moreover, if his position be true, that every one that is possessed, is senseless in his fit, then either it must be confessed, that the said Margaret was in no fit when Satan was going out of her, in that she felt him: or else that she lied when she so reported. But to go forward with the rest.  
john Starkie said, that the devil went out from him like a man, with a great bunch on his back, as big as a man. Anne Starkie, that he left her like a foul ugly man with a white beard, and a great bunch on his breast as big as a man's head. Margaret Hardman, that he departed from her like an ugly man, with a great bunch on his back. Elinor Hardman, that he went out of her like an urchen, and went through a very little hole out of the parlour. Ellen Holland, that her spirit was like Anne Starkies: and jane Ashton, that the devil went out of her like a great breath, ugly like a toad, and round like a ball. Now upon the credit of these testimonies, M Darrell is grown to be a man of great experience: and knew well, what the meaning was of darlings mouse. But why should knowledge be mentioned in the practices of these jugglers? M. Darrel (I trow) will not take upon him to have greater skill in this point, than all the great jesuitical & popish Rabbins, who have written much, and have used great traffic in the trade of casting forth devils. Thyraeus confesseth plainly, 
Thyraeus part 4. cap. 52.  that all the said signs before mentioned, are not infallible arguments of Satan's dispossession: for sayeth he: sicuti pro voluntate sua spiritus haec post se signa relinquunt: ita eadem possunt dare, & nihilominus in hominibus, quos aliquandiu obsederunt, sedes suas retinere: as wicked spirits may at their pleasure omit these signs, so they may show them, and yet notwithstanding keep their possession. Et de hoc nullum apud doctos dubium est. Besides, he is also resolute, that there is no necessity, why wicked spirits when they are cast out, should show any signs at all of their departure, non raró fit, ut discedant nullis sui discessus post se datis signis. It is not seldom seen, that Satan departeth, leaving no signs of his going: whereof he bringeth sundry examples. When therefore these cozening merchants, do tell men now a days, that they have cast devils out of any their children, servants or friends: it is hereby manifest, what credit their words do deserve.   

CHAP. X. Of M. Darrell, and M. Moor's conceit: that Satan being cast out of one, doth presently after seek to repossess him.  
WHen men have escaped any great danger: it is commonly the advise of their friends, that they should take heed of the like. And in many cases there are appointed sovereign preservatives. M. Darrell like a kind friend, had never to deal with the dispossessing of any: but for his care therein, he may be thought to have deserved great commendation. For his persuasions to such still have been, that they should use all diligence and circumspection, that Satan did not again re-enter into them. This his persuasion hath ever been drawn from a position, which he stiffly holdeth, uz. that Satan being expelled out of a man, doth seek presently after to re-enter into him again: and that it is commonly a very hard matter to withstand him, by reason of his subtleties, in alluring them by promises, & terrifying of them by threatenings. He had no sooner cast the devil out of Katherine Wright, 
M. Darrell ad art. 11. pa. 40.  but the evil spirit seeking to re-enter into her, was for one time, by his assistance resisted (as he himself confesseth). And concerning Darling, he sayeth thus: The monday after his dispossessing, I told him apart, that the devil would seek to repossess him: and therefore counseled him to watch over himself, 
Tho. Darling. pa. 72.  and resist him: adding these words, (as Darling reporteth,) that peradventure he would appear in the likeness of a friend, and use all the means he could to persuade him to some evil. Touching William Somers also: presently after his pretence, that the boy was dispossessed, he affirmed that for a certainty, Satan would seek to repossess him: making that a ground for a new work, as afterwards is declared.  
For his said opinion of Satan's seeking to re-enter, he relieth upon a metaphorical place in the scriptures: 
Mat. 12.  but for his said addition of Satan's promises, and similitudes, that will not so easily be coloured. When M. Darrell & M. More were in hand with the seven in Lancashire, and had (if you will believe them,) dispossessed six M. More told them, that Satan would surely assault every one of them, and that both diverse times, and by diverse and sundry means. He will (sayeth he) appear unto you in some likeness or other: and he will entreat you, that he may enter in again, and promise you many goodly things, as gold and silver, &c: And if he cannot so prevail, than he will threaten you to break your necks, to cast you into pits, etc. If it be here demanded how M. More knew, that Satan would appear unto them in some likeness, his answer is, uz. for that he had been told, that the Devil seeking to repossess the boy of Burton, did appear unto him in sundry likenesses. And concerning his knowledge, that Satan would make such promises unto them: he relieth upon this, uz. because the nature of man is subject to be seduced by such offers.  
If these childish answers remained not in record under his own hand, would any man believe them? doth it not give us just occasion to think, that he told them such tales of a lewd purpose, thereby to draw them to pretend the like? Otherwise would a man fearing God, being in such a conflict with Satan, (as he pretendeth) for their dispossession, have told them any such matters upon hearsay? Or doth it carry with it any such consequence, as to tell them that Satan would allure them by promises, and threatenings, because men's natures are subject to be seduced by such means?  
But what should we dispute the matter with him, or examine the force of his arguments: seeing every thing came to pass, as he had foretold? Remember the similitudes, that the devil departed from them, and even in the same (as the story sayeth) they sought again to re-enter into them. Besides, they attempted them also in other forms, as of a black Raven, of a black boy, 
The history  the head bigger than the body, of a black rough dog with a firebrand in his mouth, of fine white doves of a brave fellow like a Wooer, of two little whelps, that playing on the table, ran into a dish of butter; of an Ape, of a Bear with fire in his mouth, and of an haystack, promising them bags of gold and silver; and threatening them when they so could not prevail, to break their necks, to drown them in pits, to hang them, to break their backs, to throw them out of the windows: etc. even in such sort in effect, as M. More, of likelihood inspired with one of them, had before declared. What the story reporteth of M. Moor, may also be applied to M. Darrell: who made great use of these ridiculous conceits, in his practices with Somers.  
Out of all question, if these absurd mates had gone on, they would have proved as gross deluders, as any of the popish or jesuitical Exorcists, if not more gross: For the popish sort, having hammered this point of Satan's seeking to re-enter into the same party, out of whom he was cast, are so far from M. Darrell, and M. Moor's opinion, as some of them hold, that those spirits, which are once cast out of men, secundo eosdem ingredi, & vexare non possunt. And those that rely upon the place of S. Matthew, Cap. 12. do only infer, that sometimes Satan doth so seek to re-enter, but not always. Besides, the Captain or Marshal of Devils, (who taketh upon him to write most exactly of them in this point,) reduceth all the places, whether the wicked spirits go at such times, into the number of six, as out of one man into another: out of men into beasts out of men, into fair and great houses (whereof it cometh, that some houses are haunted with spirits,) out of men into desert places, and out of men into hell: pretermitting as a place more extraordinary, the returning of Satan, into the party, that he had lately possessed.  
But M. Darrell and his friends, will peradventure be better provided in this point hereafter. And it were convenient also, that they furnished themselves with some better proofs, for their tales of Mice, of Bears, and Bugs, threatening and promising such great matters. It may be they have some conceit, that the devils tempting of Christ, will serve their turn: but assuredly for shame they dare never publish it.   

CHAP. XI. How those that took upon them to cast out Devils, do get themselves work, and of their devices to cover their lewdness.  
THey that make it so ordinary a matter in these days to cast out devils, do not say, that it is an ordinary thing amongst Christians, for men or women to be possessed: whereupon it cometh to pass, that the tradesmen in that skill, have devised many ways to keep themselves in work. It is not pertinent in this place, to show how the Papists have entitled their exorcizing priests, to the conjuring of young infants, immediately before their baptism: because although they hold, that thereby the devil is driven from them: yet they dare not resolve, that every infant when it is born, is possessed. In their exorcizing of infants, they may pretend that they work great matters, but except you will take their credit for payment, nothing appeareth, but blowing upon the infants, (thereby pretending that they blow away Satan:) thrusting of salt into their mouths, wetting their noses and ears with spittle, and their anointing of them with their hallowed oil; mere toys, whereby their estimation is not much increased. For the beholders, seeing nothing in those actions to be marveled at, are not so much moved with them. It should seem that these kinds of devils (that are thus exercised) are but dolts, and therefore cannot serve these jugglers turns, as being peradventure but newly hatched, when infants are borne, and therefore ignorant, how to apply themselves to their contentment. They cannot cry out, or rage by their praying to Saints, by their casting of holy water upon them, by their bringing unto them of the Sacrament of the Altar, or their Agnus Dei, by their application of holy relics, nor by their own approaching near unto them, being holy catholic priests. And therefore they are devils of greater understanding, and better experience, that the Exorcists hunt after: such as are acquinted with the divine virtue of their so catholic jugglings, and practices. It is disputed amongst them, whether all infants be possessed or not, it seeming an absurdity to command the Devil to come forth of them, if he were not in them. For the deciding of which doubt, it may be marveled, if those kinds of devils be of any standing, when they use not their infallible means, to know the truth therein: which are (as heretofore hath been expressed,) their application of relics, and so forth. For if they be so terrible to Satan, (as they pretend,) why should he not be compelled by the force of them to show himself, or his presence, aswell in infants, as either in boys or wenches, or any other? But as these deluders must have (it seemeth) more skilful devils, so must they also have some elder persons, that are more fit to be seduced by them. Otherwise their reputation, in that behalf would soon decay, and their holy water, with the rest of their trumpery, want that testimony, that is drawn from the devils disliking of them: which may not be endured, but prosecuted and defended with all their might and skill. Neither is this cunning appropriated only to the Papists, but extendeth itself further, there being men also amongst ourselves, who want not their Relics and devices, which these elder devils must fear, and tremble at.  
There is a profound question amongst the romanists, Whether all Protestants, whom they account heretics, be not possessed with wicked spirits. If it had fallen out, that they had so been, their Exorcists would in such sort have been set on work, as they should not have been driven to have sought far for it. But it is otherwise overruled: that (forsooth) although heretics have great fellowship and intercourse with Devils: Obsessi tamen omnes, nec possunt, nec debent dici: yet all of them neither may, nor should he thought to be possessed: propterea quod, etc. because the signs of possession do not appear in them. And they that take upon them to cast out Devils amongst ourselves: notwithstanding, it seemeth, that stinted prayers are very offensive to them, & that they are not resolved of the difference betwixt a priest & a Bishop, yet they will not say, that they who hold against them are possessed: albeit men of that humour both have, and still do deprave them, malign them, and slander them upon any occasion at their pleasures. So as these Exorcists of both kinds, for want of work are driven to their shifts: and like Tinkers walk up and down from place to place, seeking to be employed. It is a matter of some difficulty to discover their shifts, and sleights to that purpose, they have so many; and by their experience do manage them so craftily. divers of them are here set down, and the rest may be supplied peradventure by some hereafter.  
Sometimes they make choice of some such boys or wenches, as they think are fit for their purpose, whom they procure by many promises and allurements, to keep their counsel, and to be (as they term it) advised by them. And these are commonly of the poorer sort, either the children, or servants of such persons, as the Exorcists do well know, to be of their own stamp, and well affected towards them. It falleth out now and then, that they have some scholars of their own, whom they mean, to prefer: the popish sort to some Seminaries, and others as they may. And there are none to these, they are so apt to work upon: howbeit, they can soon frame the other to their bent, by their cunning. When they have any of these in hand, they do instruct them so perfectly, as when they come to exorcize them, they are in a manner secure: their scholars knowing as well what to do, as their false masters themselves. These are not dealt with, but there must be a great assembly gathered together, in one corner or other: all of them such persons, as they know to be their friends, or at the least such as their said friends do bring with them, and are thought fit to be perverted. The company met, the Exorcists do tell them, what a work of God they have in hand, and after a long discourse, how Satan doth afflict the parties, and what strange things they shall see: the said parties are brought forth, as it were a Bear to the stake, and being either bound in a chair, or otherwise held fast, they fall to their fits, and play their pranks point by point exactly, according as they have been instructed. As if they be of the new cut: they cry, they wallow, they foam, and show the signs of possession, mentioned in the Scriptures, with some others. But if they be of the old instructions: then there are notable Tragedies. Out cometh the Priest in his massing attire: the hallowed candles are lightened: their relics, with their Agnus Dei are brought forth: the holy water flieth about the chamber: their hallowed frankincense perfumeth the place, and so forth. Whereupon all that are present, (having worshipped the said holy mysteries) no sooner cast their eyes towards the parties pretended to be possessed, but there is starting, struggling, and striving: they scriche, they rail, they spit, they cry, they rage and far, as not being able in any wise without danger of present death, to endure the presence of the catholic Priests, and of their holy compliments.  
But when these Exorcists can not work this way (as wanting such fit scholars to dissemble and collude with them) then by casting about, they (especially the popish jugglers) have in readiness some other, as need shall require. At their coming to the places where they know they are welcome, but cannot practise as before, if they find any youth, boy or girl, that is not well at ease, and whose disease is not apparent, (as either an Ague, the small pocks, or such like, where of every man is able to judge) they will seem to take great care of them: as being desirous to know the cause of their grief, and the means to help them. In this case it is sufficient for them, if the party be troubled, either in his stomach with choler or phlegm, or in his belly with gripings or colic, or in his head or joints with aches or numbness: they can work upon it. In their said pretended care for such a party (which maketh them the better welcome) they will procure some ordinary things to be given unto him, and then after a while, their manner is, to admire the disease: saying, that for a certainty, it is very strange: that by the rules of learning, there can be no reason given of it: and so after much ado, they come by degrees to suspect forsooth, and then after a while, plainly to affirm, that out of all question the party is possessed. And herein our reformed Exorcists do in some sort agree with them: but that which next ensueth, doth properly (for aught that appeareth) appertain to the others.  
If at their coming to any such places, (the houses of popish Recusants, their most assured friends,) they find all the household well, and yet think it convenient to show their skill there: then observing such youths as are in the house of either kind, and marking which of them is fittest for their purpose, they practise this devise. Their manner is, when they come into any such place, to use every one very kindly, but especially the younger sort, whom they will take upon them to instruct. In which respect they grow shortly to be familiar with them: and then in their private talk together, they will cunningly fish from them, whether at any time tofore they have been sick, or troubled, and the manner how. Here if the parties tell them, that they have had but so much, as a pain once in their sides, or any particular grief in some other part of their bodies: they have caught the gudgeon, that is, the whole matter that they fished for. Then they use the parties much more kindly than before, and do seem to have a more especial care of their good estate. Marry, at the length (as men very careful, lest the said parties should not do well) they will begin to suspect, and give out words accordingly, that the said parties are not in so good case, as they look for. They insinuate, as though they knew by their learning, that the parties were inclining to such, or such a disease: naming that, whereof before cunningly they had gotten notice. Herein they proceed with such craft, as they easily draw from the parents, or masters of such parties, how at such or such a time, or about so long since, they were indeed troubled with such a kind of disease. By this means their credit is somewhat increased, being deemed for men of especial knowledge, in that they are able to discern of such matters. When they have gotten this hold, than they begin to deal privately with the parties, and to say unto them, that they greatly fear their state of health to be in great danger: insomuch as with little trouble (such is their cunning that way) they make them in deed to suspect themselves. Then they tell them many strange tales, of bugs and spirits: how Satan seeketh to molest those children that God loveth, by vexing them in these and those parts, and how afterwards he will lie hidden in them, and suffer them to be well for divers months, and sometimes for a year together. And here they add, (but with very good terms) that they are afraid by the signs they see in them, that their ancient grief did proceed from Satan's malice towards them: and that they verily suppose, he doth still lurk in them: and that notwithstanding, in respect of their good will and liking towards them, they will do their best to make them sound, if they will be ruled by them: not doubting but in very short time, fully to deliver them from that their ghostly enemy, and restore them to perfect health. When they have thus framed the children to their minds, then ordinarily they deal with the parents, or masters, to the same effect, who finding their children or servants somewhat drooping, are easily drawn (through the good opinion they have of the Exorcists) to yield to any course, which they shall think meet to be undertaken in that behalf.  
A man would wonder, how all this should sort with their intents. For if there should be no further appearance of Satan's possessing the said parties, their friends might suspect they were never possessed: and they in pretending to dispossess them, would be deprived (in all likelihood) of the glory and fruit that thereby they gaped after. It is therefore further to be observed, that when they have prepared all parties (as is before mentioned) than they appoint a time, when (as they say) if the parties be possessed, they will compel the Devil that lurketh in them (will he nill he) to discover and show himself. In the mean while, with great devotion forsooth, they tell many tales of the virtue of holy relics, and other such trumpery as are before specified: how wicked spirits have been constrained by them in such cases, to disclose their lurking: how they have tormented the parties, and how in the end they have been cast out. By these means, if the parties pretended to be possessed, be not over dull, they may learn somewhat: and for the most part they do so. But howsoever, as the Exorcists do use the matter, it much forceth not: their friends, and those that hear them, are thereby prepared (they know) to admire those tricks, which afterwards they shall see. At the time appointed, many are not then called to be present, because the Exorcists will first see how their gear worketh: and afterwards they do frame their company accordingly. In the morning when their mass is ended, the Exorcists keeping still upon them their massing attire, and all things being prepared (as in the other case before hath been specified) the party that must be dealt with, (having been at the mass, and either perfectly well in deed, or troubled with some little ache, saving that the said jugglers have skarred him) is in the presence of that assembly, set and bound fast with towels in a chair. Then the Exorcists set their holy engines a working, they cross, they kneel, they pray, and come with such solemnity and show of devotion unto the poor youth, that is so bound, as no marvel if they should fright him out of his wits. His colour cometh and goeth: his fear is great what will become of him and therewith beginneth sometime to tremble, and to be in a cold sweat: wherewith, Ah (say the Exorcists) see you not how Satan beginneth to show himself? This is he that worketh these effects: but you shall see more anon. Then they give to the party their holy potion, (as they term it) which they tell those that are present, hath a marvelous power to plague and vex the Devil. Sure it is, that the operation of it is great. It is almost half a pint of holy Oil, mingled with almost as much hallowed Sack, having in them both a quantity of the juice of hallowed Rue. This drink (which an honest man would scarce give to an horse) these juggling knaves do constrain the youth (being bound) to take at their pleasure: wherewith he is in a short time so troubled and intoxicated, as his head groweth giddy: he heaveth & vomitteth, and if all this work not, (as they would have it) than they burn hallowed brimstone under his nose, holding his head by force so over the smoke, as they may be sure to stuff him with it. By the time that this hath wrought together with the potion, the youth groweth in effect to be beside himself: He raveth, he struggleth, and showeth great signs of pains and grief. In which his fit, you must think, that the Exorcists are not idle. They bring unto him peradventure the Sacrament of the Altar, and apply their relics, and other trinkettes, still ascribing every thing that the party either doth or saith, to the Devil: who by that means is compelled (as they say) to show himself. As the operation of the said potion and brimstone diminisheth, so the Exorcists do use their charms: commanding the Devil to cease from troubling the party, and to lodge himself for that time, for example, either in his foot, or his toe, and sometimes in his toe nail.  
And this is their first pageant, whereby they make it apparent (forsooth) that the parties, whom they undertake, are possessed. When all things do fall out herein to their desire, the people present greatly wondering at the matter (as little suspecting the lewdness of their ghostly fathers) than they appoint some other time for a greater concourse, to see this wonderful work of God, by his holy catholic priests. The parties, whom they have before instructed, are not then much troubled with the said potion, or brimstone: because they can show their tricks sufficiently, as compelled thereunto by virtue of the priests words: & in short time also the other, hearing what effects they ascribe to that drink and smoke, do frame themselves, for the avoiding of them both, to practise all they hear without them: which is a means to procure them great ease. For you must not think, that when they have such a matter on foot, they give it over suddenly. True it is, that sometimes they will keep the poor youth in their hands, in spite of his head, to work wonders with, sometimes half a year, even as long as they list themselves.  
Again, there is another way, whereby these fellows do get themselves more work. It falleth out sometimes, that divers children, having heard how such & such have been thus and thus troubled, they of themselves will begin to feign themselves sick: if they be boys, peradventure because they would remain from the school: if wenches, for that they would be idle, & both of them, that thereby they might be much made of, and dandled. Now, there being no apparent cause of such their dissembled sickness, they are driven to counterfeit, and to fall to those tricks which they have heard of in others: Wherein, if either their parents or masters begin to pity them, than they run on in their knaveries above measure: but especially if they begin to wonder at them, and to devise some remedies for them. If any of our Exorcists do hear of such an opportunity, they will not let it escape, but by one means or other they will have occasion, to go to that place: where being well entertained, and of credit, the said parties are pretended by them forthwith to be possessed. And here by the way, you shall observe a little wonder. It will hardly be showed, that any of this sort have been found, but either in the houses of Recusantes, or of such as have on the other side pretended some zeal, for they know not what reformation. Where railing is ordinary, and every sleight tale (which is countenanced by a Minister or Priest of those sects,) is made a great matter, and urged as an argument for some purpose or other. Besides, it falleth out amongst us: that they who have taken upon them, to have cast out devils, have still been men of that humour, as being forsooth more pure than the rest of their brethren.  
But to proceed, when these fellows (as is aforesaid) have bred a conceit, that the parties mentioned are possessed: then they tell their friends in their hearing, especially when they are in their pretended fits, what great experience they have in such matters. And amongst many things, they beat into their heads, these false grounds, uz. that those who are possessed, are in their fits altogether senseless, and that whatsoever they do or say, it is not they, but the devil in them that speaketh, and doth it: though it seem never so apparently otherwise. There hath not been of ancient time any certain doctrine in these points: but now they are grown into practice with the Exorcists of both sorts, as being the best means to work their fears by, that hitherto hath been devised amongst such kind of counterfeits. They are comparable to the aforesaid holy potion and brimstone. For the children or youths, (as such must be betwixt the years of xiiii. and xviii. or there abouts,) hearing what these seducers do report, are very apt and ready to make their advantage of such their speeches: although they know very well, that they lie in so saying. These grounds thus laid, than the companions go on in setting out their skill. They repeat the signs of possession, and how they have seen these, and those things done, by such as were in the like case, not doubting (as they commonly add,) but that the devil in the parties, whom they have in hand, will show and do the like in them. Which things and reports the parties hearing, they fall, aswell as they can, to the practice of them: as having thereby liberty, to do and say what they list, and in a sort to work wonders. It is also the custom of the Exorcists, when they have gotten such youths to use them very gently: whereby the said youths, are the rather induced, so to apply themselves, as they may please them. For after a short time, they easily perceive by the Exorcists speeches, what they would have them to act or speak: and the rather because they find themselves, not only to be admired, and very much made of: but that likewise, the whole course of their former dissimulation, is by their means altogether covered. When the people that are present at these and the former jugglings, with such like, (suspecting no fraud,) do behold how every thing cometh still to pass, as the Exorcists do foretell, and what a dexterity & boldness they have, in hunting and coursing of wicked spirits, commanding them, conjuring and cursing them at their pleasure: it is not much to be marveled, that they are cast thereby into a wonderful astonishment.  
If any do surmise these practices to be improbable, as being much subject to danger, in that the said parties, that are so cunningly drawn on in those courses, may upon many occasions detect them: they must know that these fellows are well enough furnished in that behalf. For first amongst the Papists, it were sufficient to bring a man into suspicion of Heresy, that should but doubt that one were not possessed, if their Priests affirmed the contrary. And we see amongst ourselves, how hardly it is endured, that our pretended Exorcists are called into question, But be it, that the worst should fall out: yet have they such rules, as if you will allow them, they are safe enough. For if any do once fall into their hands, or yield themselves unto their practices, they can never be rid from them by any means, so long as they are pleased to work upon them. Some of their said rules, 
Thyraeus.  are as followeth: vix aliquem deprehendas, etc. you shall scarcely find any amongst those that are possessed, which hath not many wicked spirits in him. The use of which rule is very ample, and extendeth far. For if any of their patientes, after their pretence of their dispossession, shall in remorse of conscience confess, the knaveries and lewd dealings of the Exorcists with them: then they say that thereby it appeareth, they had many devils in them, whereof some remaining uncast out, they continue in as evil case almost as they were before. If the said confession be made shortly after their pretended dispossession, than the said rule is accounted more probable. But if the parties continuing well for a longer time, as for a year or more, without making show of any trouble, or vexation of Satan, (whereby it may well be thought they have no devils in them,) and then detect those holy men; by an other rule, they avoid that also: which is, that Satan for fear of being cast out, will lie lurking in those that are possessed, showing no signs thereof for a great time, and that the slandering of them, (being holy Exorcists) is an apparent argument of Satan's continuance in them. It falleth out also oftentimes, that such as have been in these Exorcists hands, as they do detect their false practices with them, so do they also confess their own dissimulation, acknowledging the truth in every thing, and that they were not at all possessed. To meet therefore with this inconvenience, 
Flagellum Daemon.  they have this rule: Egressi solent persuadere etc. When the devils are cast out of a man, they endeavour by all the means they can, to persuade, that he was never in them: that so the party being unthankful to God for his deliverance, they might the better re-enter into him. And therefore there is an other rule to be observed (they say) by the Exorcists: Vt liberatum moveant quantum possint, ad credendum se liberatum: that they admonish the dispossessed as effectually as they are able, to believe, that being possessed, he is delivered, and dispossessed: and the pretence is fair, that thereby he may be thankful to God. If any man, suspecting the parties that are pretended to be possessed, to dissemble in their fits, shall offer to make some trial of it: that it is a point almost of infidelity, and amongst the popish Exorcists, is very dangerous, and is not well taken by ours. Howbeit, sometimes it falleth out: that men are more bold therein then welcome, and that they find by many direct circumstances, that the parties do counterfeit. But there are rules also to meet with this mischief: as, that Satan doth sometimes permit the parties to dissemble, and to act some lose tricks, thereby to make the beholders believe, that all the rest that they do, is likewise dissembled, thereby to hinder the glory of God in their dispossession: and likewise to conceal his own presence. Which latter point dependeth upon an other rule: that forsooth the Devil laboureth by all the means he can, that he might not be known to be in those he possesseth, that so he might avoid the power of the Exorcists, and continue still his said possession. If a man shall reason the matter with these Exorcists, or their upholders, and besides the said confessions of the parties shall allege, that many who saw them in their fits, were of opinion, that they did counterfeit: oh, (say they by an other rule) that is the practice of Satan to stir up great discord and dissension, in making some to deny, that the parties were possessed: and hereof we have experience in domibus & familiis, 
Fuga Daemonum.  in houses and families: Dummodo plures sint in eadem domo: if there be above two or three in the house: yea, but (say some unto them) it is well known, that the Devil is skilful in all languages, that he is able to reveal many secrets, and if he were present in any man to show the same at his going out, extinguendo luminaria magna, & alia similia, by blowing out great lights, etc. And therefore how cometh it to pass, that they whom you term to be possessed, can speak neither Latin, Greek, nor Hebrew, etc. but their own natural language only, nor reveal hidden matters, nor show their departure by such notable signs? For answer whereunto, they have sundry shifts, or rules: some of them being general, & others more particular, as the qualities of the said objections do require. First (say they,) all devils are not endued with the like knowledge. Then that the devils by their fall, although they lost not their knowledge, yet they lost possibilitatem illa utendi, so as they cannot use the same, nor do any thing of themselves, but when God will permit them. These general rules thus laid, they come unto their particular answers, saying, Quod Daemones non loquuntur Latin, Grece, etc. that the devils do not speak Latin, Greek, and other strange tongues in the possessed, because God sometimes doth not permit them so to do. And why doth God abridge them? Vt confundatur humana curiositas, that humane curiosity (sayeth Mengus) might be confounded, which is delighted rather to hear the Devil speaking curiously in the possessed, than the words of God, uttered by their Exorcists. But the said Mengus, hath else where two or three other shifts, to meet with this objection: as that the Devils, do very rarely use strange languages, ne credantur ibi adesse, lest they should be thought to be in the parties: and that the Devils using the tongues of such as he possesseth, doth not easily speak in an unknown language: for example, to make an Italian to speak French, but doth use his own language: quia lingua ad unum modum loquendi habituata, est illi obedientior, & ad motus illi placentes dispositior: because the tongue that hath an habit to speak but one language, is therein more obedient unto him, and more apt to be disposed of, as it pleased the Devil. And touching the revealing of secrets, (as the sins of the parties possessed,) and speaking of high mysteries, they say: that if God do give them leave, they know, and are able to speak, and reveal great and hid matters, but do it not, although they be known to be in the said parties, lest, in showing their sins, they should be brought to repentance. If sometimes (sayeth Mengus) they speak of the great mysteries of Divinity, ut iam audivi, as I have heard them: nunquam vel raro intersunt isti euriosi, ut eorum curiositas confundatur: yet such curious men as make these objections are never present, that their curiosity may be confounded.  
Thirdly, concerning the showing of some great sign, when the Devil departeth, that they hold it not much to be respected, because it is no argument of the devils presence in the possessed: in that the wandering devils in the air at the request of those that are in men's bodies, possunt facere illamet signa, can blow out great lights, and work such signs.  
And to an other objection, which is made, how it cometh to pass, that for the most part such as are pretended to be possessed, are either men of the simpler sort, or women, who may be strangely afflicted, being subject humoribus matricalibus, though they be not possessed:, they say that the devils do easier possess men and women of light brain, than those that be wise, ne deprehendantur ibi adesse, that they may not be thought to be in them, and that they vex women & maids, rather than men, for these two causes, uz. that they seek to hide themselves, sub nomine humerum matricalium, and because women are more subject to terrors, which open the passage for the devils entrance into them.  
Unto these and such like rules, answers, and grounds, 
Fustis Daemonum. Cap. 6.  may be added an other, whereupon all the rest are in a sort built, which is, that the art or exercise of casting out devils, is most odious to Satan, and that therefore he endeavoureth by all means possible, to slander and discredit the Exorcists, being the men that he most abhorreth. By this rule these Impostors have such a privilege, as nothing can either be said or done unto them by any: but they are presently reputed for the devils instruments. If they be called into question for their falsehood and juggling, 
Fuga Daemon. ca 3.  or brought before the Magistrates, or imprisoned, or proceeded against: all is done (they say) by the Devil, or his ministers: daemons superiores movent, the devils move the magistrates: illos faciunt incarcerari: the devils cause them to be imprisoned: and all is done by the devil (forsooth) that is attempted for the finding out of their lewdness. Their own words, when their juggling is detected, must serve for their justification: because they are men so loathsome to the devil. If they say, that any is possessed, it must be so. The party's confession touching his own dissimulation is nothing, if they will testify for him, that he did not dissemble. It appeareth by one of the Counsels of Carthage, that it hath been a practice long since, amongst some lewd persons, to counterfeit themselves to be possessed. And Lyra writing upon these words: The Babylonians worshipped the Dragon, 
Daniel 14.  sayeth: that therein they were deceived by the Priests that worshipped him, propter quaestum temporalem quem inde reportabant, for their temporal profit which they reaped thereby. And even so (sayeth he,) aliquando sit in ecclesia maxima deceptio populi in miraculis fictis a sacerdotibus, vel eis adhaerentibus, propter lucrum temporale: sometimes in the Church the people are greatly deceived through false miracles feigned by the Priests, or by their adherents, for temporal profit. Howbeit, Mengus (an old seducer, having been an Exorcist, as he sayeth, almost forty years,) writing diverse books of the casting out of devils, as Flagellum Daemonum, a whip for devils: Fuga Daemonum, the chase away of devils: Fustis Daemonum, a club to beat them down: and likewise Thyraeus, with many others, having written upon the same argument, amongst them all, it will be hard to find, that they ever make mention of any whom they dealt with, that did falsely pretend themselves to be possessed. As though they would make men to believe, that there neither were or could be any such matter: whereas like cozening companions, they do very well know it, to be an ordinary thing amongst them, especially in Italy, for women to make an occupation, of pretending themselves to be possessed. Whereof it cometh to pass, that in their ordinary stations, and solemn feasts in Rome, they never want some of those counterfeities, who pretending themselves to be possessed, must forsoooth, by putting their heads under some Altars, or by touching some relics, with stoles about their necks, and some other trinkets, feign themselves to be dispossessed. By reason of which false miracles, with divers others: as the Babylonians were induced to worship the Dragon, so are the bewitched Romanists, to worship those false relics, and to embrace divers other points of Popery.  
But for the conclusion of this point, that shall serve, which a public person in authority once said to Mengus: 
Fuga. Daemon. ca 11.  Volo ut scias quod ex numero quinquaginta exorcistarum, quadraginta novem trises existunt: I would have you to know (saith the said Magistrate) that of fifty Exorcists, nine and forty of them are counterfeits. To whom Mengus answered: If I were not present, you would so judge of me. And in deed he the said Mengus might as well have made up the fifty, as any of that kind then living.  
The end of the First Book.    

The Second Book.  
This second Book entreateth of M. Darrel's particular courses held with William Somers: how he instructed him at Ashbie de la Zouch, to practise such tricks, as he might be thought thereby to be possessed: how afterwards he dealt privately with him at Nottingham, supplying his defects in that behalf, upon every occasion with new instructions, of such his extraordinary cunning, as in deed deceive the people, & was sufficient to have drawn Somers on throughout the whole course of his dissimulation, though he had never dealt with him before at Ashbie, nor privately at Nottingham.  

CHAP. I. Of M. Darrel's intercourse with Somers by starts at Ashbie, from about the year 1592. until 1597. for his instruction, how to dissemble himself to be possessed.  
Master Darrell, having affirmed that William Somers was possessed: that he with others had dispossessed him: & that he was repossessed: was accused before her majesties Commissioners, for causes ecclesiastical, Anno 1598. for a counterfeiting hypocrite, as having by many sleights and false pretences compassed such a conceit amongst his favourers, to the dishonour of God, and great abuse and cozenage of sundry her majesties loving subjects. And for some proof of this general imputation, he was charged with these particulars: uz. that he became acquainted with William Somers, at Ashbie de la-Zouch, about five or six years past: that he imparted unto him the manner of Katherine wright's fits: that he gave them unto him in writing, and moved him to learn the practice of them: that he promised him, in so doing he should not want: that he willed him, when he did practise the said fits before any company, he should make mention of his name: that afterwards Somers having put them in practice, and telling him the said Darrell, that M. Brakenburie had put him away thereupon for a counterfeit, he the said Darrell told him, that he had not acted his fits artificially, and did himself in Ashbie park teach him to do them better: that within a while after he willed Somers for his better instruction, to go and see the boy of Burton, how he used himself in his fits: that an other time he moved Somers, that when he should find a fit opportunity, and had learned to do the said fits cunningly, he should put them in practice at Nottingham, and that he promised Somers to come thither unto him, and not only assist him, but likewise said, he would procure his Master Thomas Porter to release him of his years, which he knew by the boys own report, to be the thing that he chief desired.  
Touching every one of these particulars, M. Darrell hath been examined, and upon his oath hath denied them all, so far forth as they do any way concern himself: but Somers, of the age of one and twenty years, being deposed, doth justify them point by point, as it may appear by his words following, with this alteration only: that his examination running in the third person (as the manner is) now he speaketh in his own: for the avoiding of many needless repetitions (as this examinate saith, etc.) which otherwise of necessity must have been used: which order is likewise used in reciting the depositions, which are produced in this cause.  

Somers.  About a quarter of a year before my departure (saith he) from M. Thomas Gray's, (with whom I then dwelled at Langley Abbey in Leicestershire) I was sent one day, to Ashbie de la Zouch (being four or five miles distant) upon some occasion of business. At what time I with other boys, going into an Alehouse, found there M. Darrell, whom I little regarding, but playing the wag, and shrewd boy with my companions, M. Darrell departed out of the house, and stayed at the door until I came forth. And then he took me apart, asked me my name, where I was borne, with whom I dwelled, and how I was brought up. To whom I answering, as the truth was in every point: alas (quoth M. Darrel) thou art a pretty boy, and my countryman: I knew thy father, and am sorry to see thee in so mean a case: for I was simply appareled, even as meanly almost as could be. He also then asked me, what I had to do in the town, and how long it would be before I had dispatched my business: whereunto I answering truly, & that I would return that way very shortly, he promised to bring me out of the town, & to tell me some things, wherein if I would be ruled by him, I should not be driven to go so barely as I did, but be able to maintain myself as long as I lived.  
When I had dispatched my business, I returned homeward, & found M. Darrell not far from the place where I left him, talking with two or three strangers, about one Katherine Wright, whom he said he had dispossessed of an unclean spirit. After he had ended his communication with them, he went with me along the street in my way homewards: & as we were going together, I having overheard some of his speeches with the said strangers, asked him what they meant: he answered me with a long speech concerning the possession of Katherine Wright, and told me the manner of her fits, in such sort how the Devil troubled her, and how he had delivered her, as I was greatly afraid jest M. Darrell had been a conjuror, and would have done me some hurt: which he perceiving (as I think) bade me be of good cheer, and told me there was no cause why I should fear. For (saith he) if thou wilt swear unto me to keep my counsel, I will teach thee to do all those tricks which Katherine Wright did, and many others that are more strange. Besides (quoth he) if thou wilt so do, thou shalt never want whilst thou livest. Hereunto when I had agreed, he told me more particularly what the said Katherine Wright did at several times, in her fits: as that she foamed at the mouth, gnashed with her teeth: cried and scritched, catched & snatched at those that stood by her, (especially at him the said M. Darrell): laughed out of measure: fell into great shows of sadness: wallowed and tumbled: cast herself into the fire, and sometimes into the water: would lie as though she had been senseless: and many other things M. Darrell then told me: saying, that I might learn to do them very easily. And the better to teach me, he did thereupon himself, act divers of them. For gnashing with his teeth, he knocked his own teeth together divers times. For foaming, he rolled his tongue in his mouth, & then put out some little spittle betwixt his lips: but said, that I might soon learn to do it better, by rolling a stone in my mouth, but especially if I could get a little soap to use at such times. Likewise he showed with his hands half open, the manner of her snatching & catching, & for some other of her doings he showed some other gestures. Also he then told me, that for my better remembrance, he would give me in writing, all the said fits & gestures before mentioned. And thereupon sitting down upon a bank, he did write them, & delivered them unto me, saying: when thou hast learned them, so as thou canst do them perfectly, thou mayest put them in practice. He likewise then told me, that when I could put the said fits so in practice, as that I should be judged thereby to be possessed: I must name him, & then (quoth he) it is very likely, that I shall be sent for: Which if it fall so out, then (said he) thou must at my coming unto thee, do all the former things that I have told thee, Katherine Wright did. Upon that occasion, I will take upon me to dispossess thee: and afterwards, if thou wilt still be advised by me, I will take thee myself, and maintain thee. In the end he gave me xii. pence, and so we departed.  
Summer's being here demanded, where the said writing was that Master Darrell delivered unto him, of Katherine wright's fits: answereth, that after he had learned them by heart, he did tear the paper in pieces, as M. Darrell had straightly charged him. But further saith, that he writ them in one of his books, called Sententiae pueriles: which book, together with three others, one Mary Holding, than servant with M. Grace, but since married to one William Arnold, kept from him (as he was informed by some of M. Gray's men) in lieu of eight pence, which he did owe unto her. Also the said Somers affirmeth, that after his former acquaintance begun with M. Darrell, & whilst he still remained with M. Grace, he met M. Darrel three or four times in Ashbie: & once he affirmeth, that M. Darrell called him unto him, and asked him, if as yet he had practised any of those things, which he had showed unto him. To whom Somers answering, that he had not, because the time had not served him thereunto: Well (quoth M. Darrell) do them oft to thyself privately, until thou shalt be perfect in them, & then thou mayest practise them the better publicly. At other times also the said M. Darrel did kindly salute him. But let him proceed in his own person.  
Within twelve or thirteen weeks (as I think) after my first acquaintance with M. Darrel: M. Grace placed me with one M. Anthony Brakenburie, to keep certain silver haired Coneys: with whom after I had remained about six or seven weeks, (as far as I remember) I began to put in practice sundry of those instructions that M. Darrell had given me. I feigned myself to be sick: I foamed at the mouth: I did sometimes lie speechless as though I had been dumb: & so by the space almost of a month I did counterfeit as well as I could, such fits as Master Darrell had told me, that Katherine Wright did practise. Howbeit, I was not (as it seemeth) at that time my craftsmaster. For M. Brakenburie, & M. Randall Barton his brother, being verily persuaded that I was but a counterfeit, & that I had dissembled all that I had done, I was turned out of service, & went home to Nottingham to my mother: with whom after I had remained about a month, I was bound a prentice for seven years, to one Thomas Porter, a musician in that town. Summer's being here demanded, why he did not call for M. Darrell, whilst he was in his fits at M. Brakenbury's, according to the plot agreed upon betwixt him & M. Darrel, answereth: that if he had perceived that he had been thought to have been possessed, he would so have done: but seeing his dissimulation took not that effect, he made no mention of him. The said Somers, after he was bound prentice as is aforesaid, ran twice from his master: the first time, in regard of his masters hard usage, when he had served him not above a year: & the second time, for the like cause, & for that his master was not able to teach him, about a year & a half before he fell to his practices at Nottingham. Touching his first vagary, he saith thus. Being gone from my master, I went to Ashby, & inquiring for M. Darrel, found him in a house by the school near the Churchyard. Having met with him, he walked with me a long the way into the fields, & after some other speeches, he asked me, whether I had put in practise any of K. wright's fits, that he had told me of. Whereupon I declared unto him, what I had done at M. Brakenbury's, and of the evil success I had there, as before it is expressed: and then M. Darrell said, that I had not done those things which he taught me, so perfectly as I should. Then upon some other further questions moved by M. Darrell, I told him how I had been bound prentice to a Musician: how & why I was gone from him, and how I meant to go into Worcestershire, to see if I could place myself there. This my determination Master Darrell did seem to dislike, wishing me rather to see if I could get a Master about Burton, or about Market Bosworth, or about Tamworth, because (saith he) I would be glad to have thee in some such place near unto me, so as I might have occasion more conveniently now & then to see thee. Nay (quoth I) I may not place myself so near to Nottingham, lest my master do hear of me, & so get me again home unto him. Well then said M. Darrel, do therein as thou wilt: but remember to put the former points (that I have taught thee) in practice, as thou canst conveniently: and then thou shalt be sure to hear of me. And so he giving me xii. pence, we departed.  
It may be here omitted, how Somers further bestowed himself, whilst he was from his master, and how he returned to him again, in hope to have his years bought out: saving that (as he saith) he did practise M. Darrel's instructions oftentimes privately, but had no fit opportunity to make any apparent show of them, because in all that time he could not settle himself in any place. Now upon his second running from his master, and after he had remained in Essex a good part of a year, till he was weary: he returning homewards again towards Nottingham, with better hope than before, to buy out his years, thought it convenient in his journey homewards, to take Ashby in his way, of purpose to see M. Darrel, whom he found there as he saith, & had dealing with him, as followeth.  
Upon my coming at that time to M. Darrel, he asked me where I had been: whither I was going, & whether I had attempted to practise any of his instructions. To whom I answered according to his questions: and that I had had no convenient time, otherwise, then when I was alone, to do any of those things. Then he told me many things of the boy of Burton. Whereupon, I showing myself to have a desire to go and see him: M. Darrell said, I should do well in so doing, because that seeing of him in his fits, I might the better learn to do them myself afterwards. Being thus encouraged, I went to Burton, where I saw Thomas Darling: but perceiving that a great number of people came likewise to see him, and fearing that some of them might know me, I returned to Ashbye, not staying to see Darling in any of his fits. At my coming back again to M. Darrell, he demanded of me, whether I had seen the boy in any of his fits: and I answered, that I had not, for the reason last mentioned: which M. Darrell not well approving, said, that I might well enough have stayed to have seen some of them, because it was not likely, that any there could have known me. Then upon some further occasion of speeches betwixt us, M. Darrell delivered unto me in writing, the particular fits, which he said Thomas Darling lately had, and did act the most of them himself before me, we two being in the park together alone, by Ashbye. At that time also, M. Darrell delivered unto me in writing, certain signs and gestures, which were to be used, he said, to signify sundry kinds of sins: which gestures he did likewise act himself in the place before mentioned. Which things thus declared and acted by M. Darrell, he would needs see how I could do them, and the other also, which before he had taught me. And so under a bush in the said Park, I did act sundry fits, uz. these to my remembrance: falling upon the ground: moving of my belly: foaming at my mouth: gnashing of my teeth: thrusting out of my tongue, and doubling of the same: drawing of my mouth awry: staring with mine eyes: turning my face backwardly: the making of two bunches, the one after the other in my face: lying as though I had been senseless, with some others. Then M. Darrell after I had showed these fits, did read out of his paper, the gestures before mentioned, to signify diverse sorts of sins: which he himself acting as he read them: I lying upon the ground, did also by his direction imitate the same, wherein if I miss, M. Darrell did teach me to do them better, and said that with a little practice by myself, according to that which he had done, & according to his directions given me in writing, I would quickly learn to do them perfectly. But he straightly charged me, that for my life, I should keep these things secret, saying, that if ever I bewrayed them, it might bring us both in danger of hanging. These things thus finished, I told M. Darrell, that I meant to return to Nottingham, to see if I could get myself released from my Master, and he approving my purpose therein, said, that when the time served, I might well put all the former things in practice there with good effect: and that in so doing he doubted not, to procure me a release from my master. He also told me, that he having a sister in law in Nottingham, one Mrs. Wallys, I could no sooner name him, when I should be thought to be possessed, but that presently, and the rather by his sister's means, he should be sent for to come unto me. And so we departed. And thus far Somers for the proof of all the former particulars, wherewith M. Darrell is charged.  
Against this deposition of Somers, there are made sundry exceptions. His friends, and likewise he himself, are greatly offended, that M. Darrell being a Minister, his oath may not be credited before the oath of a boy. But M. Darrel's oath is greatly impeached by his denying of sundry things, wherewith Somers chargeth him in some others of his bad dealings with him, about his pretended dispossession: the same being deposed by diverse very sufficient witnesses. M. Darrell in his Apology (published since he was condemned for a counterfeit) doth pretend that this was all which was laid to his charge, concerning his dealing with William Somers at Ashbye, uz. Somers dwelled with Mr. Grace, when I dwelled at Ashbye: therefore we two met together in the Park, and I did instruct him. And there is nothing (sayeth he) but this, besides Summer's bare oath, to strengthen his accusation. It were to be wished, that for his calling sake, he could not otherwise have been charged herein: nay rather that he might not have been so charged at all: for in such a secret compact, the confession of Somers is of great moment, especially the same being not so bare, (as M. Darrell pretendeth,) but is strengthened with many such circumstances, as do argue the same in all likelihood, to be true. It is confessed by M. Grace, and Mrs. Grace, & by M. Darrell himself, that Somers dwelled with M. Grace at Langlye, within 4. or 5. miles of Ashby de la zouch: & did run on errands, as Mary Holden the wife now of one Arnold saith.  
M. Darrell at one of his examinations, propounding certain questions to W. Somers, touching the situation of Ashbye, the standing of the Church, the school and such like, did well perceive by his answers unto them, that he had been at Ashbie. So as there is no impediment in that respect, why he might not meet M. Darrell there, as he hath deposed.  
It is also confessed to be true, that Somers going to dwell with Master Brakenbury, left certain books at Master Gray's, as it may appear by the depositions following. William Somers told me before the time of his pretended dispossession at Nottingham, 
T. Porter, pa. 114. Mrs. Grace pa. 161,  that he had left certain schoole-bookes at Master Gray's. And Mrs. Grace, when Somers went from me, he left with one Mary Holden my cook, a couple of books in pawn for eight pence. All that Somers deposeth to this point in effect, appeareth to be true, saving that, of his writing into one of the books the particular fits, which he sayeth M. Darrell had delivered unto him. And that point was not looked into, because it was found that M. Grace, and Mrs. Grace, were so addicted to M. Darrell in this matter, as there was little hope to try out the truth thereof amongst their children and servants: it being uncertain, who were fit to be examined therein: & Marie Holden affirming, that she had not the books, although she said that Somers owed her two pence.  
That Somers practised at M. Brakenbury's some such fits, as he had afterwards at Nottingham, and that M. Brakenbury accounting him thereupon a dissembler, did discharge him from his service, (as he the said Somers hath affirmed,) is thus deposed.  
I heard it reported by some of my neighbours in Nottingham, 
T. Porter, fol. 113.  that William Somers did play the lewd and counterfeiting boy, whilst he was at M. Brakenbury's, and that M. Brakenburie did so account of him, and thereupon did put him out of service.  

Edm. Garland. pa. 117,  And an other: I have heard that William Somers did practise certain fits at Master Brakenbury's, and that M. Brakenburie finding of him as he thought, a counterfeit, did put him away.  
Likewise a third: my brother Brakenbury told me, that he thought Somers did dissemble in his fits, 
Mrs. Grace pa. 161  whilst he was with him, and that he would keep him no longer.  

M. Darrell ad. art. 9 pag. 35.  And M. Darrell himself confesseth some thing to this purpose: but observe how he would cover that knavery. I have heard that whilst Somers dwelled with M. Brakenbury, he was handled after a strange manner.  
Likewise that Somers was bound a prentice with Thomas Porter some month or five weeks, after he came from M. Brakenburyes', and that he ran twice from him, (as he hath deposed,) is acknowledged to be true, by M. Darrell himself. And so the said Somers had sufficient opportunity to go to Ashbie, and to talk with M. Darrell at such times, as upon his oath he hath declared.  
Furthermore, that Somers in his fits at Nottingham, & before M. Darrel's coming thither, did name him the said Darrel diverse times (according as he sayeth M. Darrell had instructed him) is deposed by Edmond Garland. 
Ed. Garland pag. 117.  Before M. Darrell was sent for, I have been present twice or thrice at several times, when William Somers hath in his pretended fits used these words: Darrel, Darrell, Darrell.  
It savoureth also of some thing, 
R. Cooper,  that Robert Cooper deposeth: how M. Darrell within eight or nine days after his coming to Nottingham told him, that if he would carefully look to Somers, he should not lose a penny by him: which sorteth with that deposed by Somers: how if he would be ruled by M. Darrell, he should not want. And the savour is increased by that which M. Darrell himself confesseth, uz. that he was a means with some others, to have a collection made for the relief of the said Cooper: but indeed there were two. Again, according to Summer's words, touching M. Darrel's promise, that if he would put his instructions in practice at Nottingham, he would come thither and release him of his apprenticeship, (the same being his chief desire), 
M, Darrell ad art, 38, pa, 20,  he the said M. Darrell confesseth thus: I gave my word to Somers his master, that he should have thirteen shillings four pence to release him of his apprenticeship, which afterwards I did perform.  
There was such kindness betwixt M. Darrell and Somers at Nottingham, as being (it may be thought) old friends: he and some other of his adherentes entertained him with good cheer: and when afterwards he was accused to have bewitched one, M. Darrell dealt with the Mayor of Nottingham, that he might be bailed. Touching the first: 
George Richardson fol. 20.  I well remember (sayeth a Deponent) that the boy was one night at supper with M. Darrell, M. Brinsley, and two Ministers more at the sign of the Castle. And for the second, (although M. Darrell deny it,) yet M. Aldridge sayeth, that the occasion of Somers bailing, 
M Aldridge pa. 91.  was partly in respect of M. Darrel's and his earnestness with the Mayor to that effect.  
Moreover it toucheth M. Darrell somewhat near, and doth generally argue such a compact to have been betwixt him and Somers, in that whilst he was at Nottingham, 
Marry Cooper. fol. 1  he had secret conference with him diverse times. This M. Darrel denieth, but it is thus proved. I saw M. Darrell often times talk with my brother alone in my father's house.  

Eli. Thomlinson. fol. 1  I well remember, that William Somers did oft come to M. Bonner's house, whilst M. Darrell lay there, to inquire for M. Darrell, and went to him to his chamber.  

Anne Chrichley. fol. 1. M. Shute. fol. 19  I saw the boy William Somers come one morning to M. Darrel's chamber, and (as I remember) no body with him.  
I came one afternoon to M. Darrel's lodging, and there I found M. john Beresforde, and the boy with M. Darrell. And I have heard by good report, that the boy did much frequent to go to M. Darrell at many and several times.  
Again, when Somers was fallen at jar with M. Darrell, he the said Somers did both write unto him in a threatening sort, and use to others, such kind of words, as did argue, that there was some pack betwixt them, the opening whereof might much concern M. Darrell.  
In his said letter, he did write thus, as M. Darrell confesseth. All things that I did were counterfeit, and I pray you let it pass, for the more you meddle in it, the more discredit it will be for you. 
Nich. Shep. fol, 2,  And for his words to others, Nicholas Shepherd sayeth: I being desirous to know of Somers, what he meant to write so boldly to M. Darrell, he answered, that M. Darrell had best to let him alone, or else it would turn to both their discredits. And to the same effect, john Cooper: 
Io. Cooper, pag. 202  Many times Somers did speak very hardly of M. Darrell, wishing that he had never known him.  
Besides, in that M. Darrel hath turned his copy, as touching the Witch, pretended by him, to have sent her spirit into Somers, it sitteth very near unto him, whilst he was in Nott. little suspecting (as it seemeth) that Somers would have disclosed their packing at Ashby, or having not so thoroughly foreseen what might fall out in that behalf, he was confident (as he pretended) upon a tale told by Somers in one of his fits, of a certain old woman, that she the said woman had bewitched him, and been the cause of all his trouble. The tale was, that the Lent before his pretended fits at Nott. he met an old woman on Blackwel more-heath: that she spoke unto him: that she told him she knew Katherine Wright, & that how they two would come to Nott. unto him, that she asked him a penny, that he saying he had none, she affirmed he had three pence, & how except he would give her a penny, she would break his neck, and throw him into a coal-pit, (that was near at hand): that he gave her thereupon a penny: that she gave unto him a piece of bread and butter, which was the sweetest that ever he did eat of in his life: and that he saw a black cat at that time come unto her. Thus far the tale devised by Somers, as he confesseth as a trick of knavery in one of his fits. Howbeit M. Darrel hearing the same (in sort as is before expressed,) confesseth that he affirmed for a certainty, 
M. Darrell ad art, 6, pa, 228.  or as he verily thought, that the said woman was a Witch, & that it was she that had bewitched the boy, & had been the cause of all his former troubles. Whereupon there was a general rumour saith M. Pare, that it was she that had bewitched Somers, & none other. 
M. Pair, 264  Howbeit all this notwithstanding, M Darrel now finding, as it may be thought, that he laid the cause of Summer's pretended possession to short (in that he the said Somers had confessed their packing together at Ashbie,) doth now ascribe the cause of all the boy's troubles, unto a woman of Worcestershire, that thereby he might make it somewhat probable, that Summer's counterfeiting at M. Brakenbury's, did not proceed from his instructions, (as the boy deposeth:) but from the said woman that had bewitched him. And thereupon, 
M. Darrell, history, the brief narration  now both he and his friends do give it out in print and otherwise, that William Somers became to be possessed by the means of a Witch in Worcester, who had sent a wicked spirit into him, called Lucy: and that rumour runneth thereby strongly amongst such as do favour him. The tale and occasion of it was thus.  
William Somers, being playing his pranks before M. Darrell came to Nottingham, in such sort as it began to be reported that he was possessed, he was urged (as he sayeth) at one time by some that were present, to tell how he thought, he first grew to be troubled. Whereupon he devised this story (as he confesseth of mere knavery, and to maintain and set forward the opinion already conceived, that he was possessed,) uz. that whilst he dwelled with M. Brakenburie, he was bewitched as he thought by an old woman, who accompanied him as he was going to Bramsgrove: that he denying to give her a hatband, which he had found in the way, she threatened him: that thereupon the night following, he was frighted, and so began at M. Brakenbury's to have such like fits, as than he had at Nottingham: and that in one of his said fits, he heard something say unto him, that upon such a day he would leave him, & not come to him again, till about 4. years after. which time (quoth Somers) being now expired, I began to be again troubled, as now you may perceive: but all these devices and knaveries of the boy, will not serve M. Darrel's turn: it being the common practice of such jugglers, to teach the parties with whom they deal, to attribute their trouble to witches, thereby to make it more probable to the simpler sort, that they are possessed. And Somers hath else where confessed, M. Darrel's course held with him to that effect: and how at their first acquaintance, he told him, that Katherine Wright was first molested by the means of a witch. Moreover, he had heard and read some part of a very ridiculous book, concerning one M. throgmorton's children, (supposed to have been bewitched by a woman of Warbois) whereby he saith, that he learned some points, and was not ignorant, as fit occasion served, to ascribe what he list to witches.  
But all these probabilities and circumstances M. Darrel would avoid, by enforcing divers supposed contradictions, and impossibilities in Summer's deposition.  
Somers affirmeth (saith he) that when he repaired to me to be taught, 
M. Darrell Apolog.  he came from one M. Gray's of Langly (with whom he saith he then dwelled) to Ashbie, where I than dwelled, as he affirmeth: and in a park there we met. In which words there are four untruths. First, Somers doth not say, that ever he repaired unto him to be taught, but that being with him, he was taught by him. Secondly, the times of Somers repairing to M. Darrel, were not whilst he dwelled with M. Grace: but afterwards, when he was run from his master, Thomas Porter of Nottingham. For Somers only layeth to M. Darrel's charge, that on a time, when he dwelled with M. Grace, he met him the said Darrel by chance at Ashbie, and was then first instructed by him. Thirdly, Somers doth not affirm, that M. Darrell dwelled then at Ashbie, when he dwelled at M. Gray's, and met him (as is aforesaid) in Ashbie. They might meet there together, though M Darrell did not then dwell there. Fourthly, whereas M. Darrell saith, (if he mean plainly) that Somers affirmeth, their meeting in the park to have been whilst he dwelled at M. Gray's: he is therein greatly deceived. For their said meeting there was little above a year, before his pretended dispossession at Nottingham: at what time (having seen the boy of Burton by Master Darrel's direction) he returned again unto him at Ashbie.  
Furthermore, M. Darrell proceeding in the disproof of Summer's imputations laid to his charge, he saith thus. Now the truth is etc. that Somers was gone from M. Gray five years before our pretended meeting: For it is nine years or there abouts since he went from M. Gray, and but six years since I went to Ashbie. If M. Darrell mean their first meeting at Ashbie, it is a palpable untruth to say, that Somers was gone from M. Gray's five years before that time: if he understand their last meeting in the park, he was gone in deed from M. Gray above three years before that time, but not five. But where he saith it is nine years or there abouts, since Somers went from Master Gray's, and but six years since he went to Ashbie: if that were true he said somewhat. For the clearing therefore of these two particulars: 
M. Grace ad art. 1. pag. 153. M. Grace ad art. 1. pag. 161  First, M. Grace and Mistress Grace being interrogated 23. Octob. 1598. how long it was since Somers left their service: the one saith: more than six year past: and the other, about six years as they remember. But there is some better certainty to bolt out the truth herein. Somers was bound prentice (as M. Darrell confesseth) with Thomas Porter, about a month or five weeks after he was discharged of M. brakenbury's service: and Somers saith, that he remained little above a quarter of a year (if so long) with Master Brakenburie: and it will be confessed, that he went from M. Gray to dwell with Master Brakenbury. So as if we can find when Somers was bound prentice, it will appear how long it is since he dwelled at master Gray. Now the Indenture itself whereby he was bound, is to be seen amongst the rest of the examinations: and it beareth date the seventh of May, in the 35. year of her Majesty: whereby it is manifest, the premises being true, that it is not yet seven years since Somers dwelled with M. Grace, which jumpeth both with his, & his wives depositions, & controlleth M. Darrel's nine years.  
And touching that which M. Darrell affirmeth, uz. that it is but six years since he went to Ashbie: it is well he limiteth himself to six years. If he had said but four, he might have been put in mind by a certain token of the untruth therein. For in the year 1594. now 5. years passed in one of his sermons at Ashbie (as there is advertisement given in writing) upon the seventeenth day of November (the day of the beginning of her majesties most happy reign over this kingdom) falling then upon the Sunday: he inveighed mightily against the people there, for ringing the bells as they do throughout all the realm, in signification of their joy, and thanksgiving unto Almighty God, for the beginning and continuance of her highness most Christian and blessed government: and his zeal, or rather fury, was so servant therein, as he termed their said ringing, to be the profaning of the Sabbath, & said they were all in danger thereby of God's heavy displeasure, or to that effect. But to the point itself. Although it were true, that it is but six years, since he went to Ashbie, yet that is not greatly material: for he might come to dwell there a year or two after his first acquaintance with Somers, without any contradiction to that which Somers hath deposed. Howbeit (if the information since given be true) he doth therein forget himself: for it is reported, that he dwelled in one Perrins house in Ashbie about one year, then in one Io. Hollands about six years, and lastly in William Swinsons, about a year and a half: which being laid together, do amount to about eight years and a half. Whereunto, (if Master Darrell do not still continue his family there, but have dwelled since a year or two at Nottingham) that time also since he departed thence, may also be added. So that for aught that M. Darrell doth here allege for himself, there doth nothing appear, but that all may be true that Somers hath deposed, touching their several meetings together at Ashbie.  
The last circumstance observed here, for the justification of Summer's deposition in this matter, is this: that as soon as Somers was supposed by some in Nottingham to be possessed, Mistress Wallis, according to M. Darrel's former words (as Somers hath deposed) did presently send for Master Darrell to come unto him: which circumstance had in this place been omitted, but that it ministereth a fit occasion to proceed with Summer's confession, how he demeaned himself, after his last departure from M. Darrell at Ashbie.  
Having (saith he) thus left Master Darrel, I went towards Nottingham, and coming thither, procured my father in law to deal with M. Maior, to be a means to my master, that I might be delivered from mine apprenticeship. But my Master would not be entreated. Whereupon I was compelled to stay with him again, and so did, till by Master Darrel's means I was delivered from him. During this my continuance with my Master, I found myself to be as hardly used before, and my maintenance with him rather worse then better. Besides, I did better perceive, that my Master could teach me nothing, being himself brought up with a Weaver, and having no skill at all in music. Furthermore, I understood by his speeches oftentimes, that he meant to keep me as his apprentice, not only for the rest of the years that I was bound unto him, but for the time also that I had been absent from him. Whereby, observing that he meant to keep me as his servant about four years to come, I confess that to be released from him according as M. Darrell had promised me, I did begin the course that M. Darrell had wished me before to undertake. And first, I feigned myself to have a swelling in my belly, pretending thereby to have great pain: which my Master told me was nothing else but some cold, that did procure the colic, and gave me a drink, and some other things for it. Afterwards, when I pretended to have the said colic, I did make show at sundry times of many wild looks and gestures, and about a month or three weeks before S. Martin's day last (as I remember) I began to fall more roundly to my work, according to my former instructions. At one time, I making a motion in my belly, in the presence of one M. Evans Curate at S. Mary's in Nottingham: he, conjecturing thereby that some quick thing was in my belly began to make a doubt, as if I were possessed. This Euans dwelled next house to my master, and coming often unto me, brought with him john Sherrart the Clerk of Saister Maries, who divers times told me of M. throckmorton's children in Huntingtonshire how they were possessed: and having a printed book thereof, he declared to M Euans in my hearing, the manner of the fits that M. throgmorton's children had. Whereby I learned something more than I knew before, and did still proceed further and further in my dissimulatinn, as M. Darrel had taught me. By which occasion M. Euans and the said Clerk grew to be persuaded, that I was in deed possessed, & sent for M. Aldridge the preacher of S. Mary's, to come unto me: who refusing twice or thrice, came at the last: & being greatly afraid when he saw me in my fits, he gave it out for a certainty I was possessed. And then the bruit thereof grew to be very rise, and many both of the town and country came to see me. At whose coming I would be in my dissembled fits, and call oft for M. Darrel: sometimes railing against him, and sometimes willing him to be sent for, according to our former agreement. And at one time amongst the rest, whilst I was in my said fits, making mention of Master Darrell, Mistress Wallis his wives sister was present: who being persuaded with the rest that I was possessed, did affirm to sundry persons in my hearing, that her brother, M. Darrel had delivered nine, that had been possessed, and said that she would cause him to be sent for. And accordingly one Hugh Wilson was hired to go for him.   

CHAP. II. Of M. Darrel's private directions to Somers whilst he was at Nottingham with him, how he should from time to time behave himself in his counterfeiting.  
FOr the further strengthening of the general charge exhibited against M. Darrel before her majesties said commissioners, to prove his proceed with Somers to have been merely counterfeited: he is further accused: that he finding the said Somers at Nottinghan, playing & acting of certain tricks & signs (as they term them) of possession, did by his private instructions so lead him on, from one dissembling course to an other, as it was sufficient to teach him in that behalf what he had to do, although the matter had never been plotted, betwixt them before at Ashbie. It is manifest, that as Somers had counterfeited certain fits & toyish behaviour at M. Brakenbury's: so he was acting the like when M. Darrell came unto him at Nottinghan. But to omit who it was that taught him so to do, it is here to be considered with what craft & cunning he did proceed with him. The first night being the 5. of November that M. Darrel came to Nott. he could have no private speeches with the boy, by reason of the company that were then present. But the day following, he took his opportunity. Here of Somers deposeth thus.  
The next morning being Sunday, 
6. novem. 1597.  & the 6. of novemb. before Church time, M. Darrel came unto me, & told me wherein I had done well over night (for the night before he had played his feats very artificially) & wherein I had failed, wishing me to act my fits more boldly & more lively. He also then signified unto me, that the next day he meant to have a fast, and said, that then I must act the fits he had taught me as a he should make mention of them, promising that in his sermon he would name them with such leisure, as I might have time to act them one after an other in order. The second morning being the 7. of November, also M. Darrel came again unto me, before the fast began, and asked me if I remembered all that I was to do that day. To whom I answering, that I thought I should not forget to do them as he expected: M. Darrell said, thou must in deed show thyself this day, as it were once for all. And then also he told me this tale. The same morning saith he, that the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire were to be brought to the places where the fasts appointed, were held for their dispossessing, the Devil knowing himself to have but a short time of dwelling in them, did cast them into sundry fits, and did trouble them more, then at any time before. In so much as when some were sent to will their friends to make them ready, they brought word to him the said Master Darrell and others, in what case they found them. Whereupon (quoth Master Darrell) we were driven to send six or seven at every such time, to bring them by force to the said place: which six or seven were very much troubled in the carriage o them. And even so said M. Darrel, the like order shallbe taken with thee this morning. Anon one shall be sent to see if thou be ready: at what time thou shalt show thyself to be much troubled in thy fits. Upon signification whereof, six or seven shall come to bring thee upon their shoulders, whom thou mayest greatly trouble in their carriage of thee, by struggling with them, as others that were possessed did: and as though the Devil had compelled thee so to do, being very loath to come to so godly an exercise. Shortly after Master Darrel's departure, all things were done accordingly. One Langford was sent to see if I were ready: at whose coming I did make show of my greatest fits, in an unquiet manner. Thereupon the said Langforde returning to Master Darrell, by and by seven came to carry me, whom (as I think) I did very much trouble: and whereupon it was given out, that I was so heavy in my fits, as seven were scarce able to carry me.  
For the justification of these particulars thus set down by Somers, there are few depositions. Howbeit M. Darrel (notwithstanding his general denial before mentioned:) yet he confesseth somewhat, which tendeth to the confirmation of this his second conference with Somers: I sent (saith William Langford) that morning, 
M. Darrell ad. art. 29. pag. 18.  to take order for the present bringing of Somers to Smalles' house, & M. Langford brought me word back, that so soon as he spoke of the boys removing, 
M. Darrel's history.  he was presently cast into a sore fit. And again: The boy was brought by six or seven strong men, who had all of them enough to do, to bring him to the next convenient and seemly room, to the place of his abode: he meaneth to Smalles' house. The fast being ended, & Somers dispossessed (as it was pretended) M. Darrell gave unto Summer's instructions privately, how to behave himself in a new matter, that he was to take in hand concerning his behaviour, when pretence should be made, that the devil sought again to repossess him. To this effect Somers deposeth after this manner. The same night after my supposed deliverance, M. Darrell came unto me, and told me, that as yet my former practices must not be quite given over, saying, that the continuance of them would turn both to his and my great benefit. And then he further signified unto me, how after that Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire were dispossessed, the Devil did seek to enter into them again, and came for that purpose unto them in diverse similitudes, as of a Rat, a dog, a cat, an old man, an Ape, a toad, a mouse, etc. Whereupon said he, for a good while after, they were not perfectly well, but awaking out of their sleeps, and at other times starting, they would cry, away with that dog, keep away that cat, and so sometimes besides the former beasts specified, they would make mention of Lions, Dragons, Bulls, etc. And so quoth M. Darrell to me, thou mayest easily do. Whereunto I agreed, and did after put the same in practice, as occasion served accordingly.  
After that Somers had continued his new begun practices about a fortnight (in which time he had played many feats under a coverlette, 
22. or 23. November 1597.  as afterwards shall be showed,) then by M. Darrelles direction, he fell into a new course, which was of the detecting of certain persons for Witches. I did then (sayeth Somers) undertake an other matter concerning certain Witches, 
W. Somers pag. 22.  according to M. Darrel's former directions. For he had told me before, that the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire had detected certain Witches, and that I might do the like. Also he had said unto me, that when the Witches detected by them, were coming unto the said parties, whom the devils sought to repossess: they the said parties were wonderfully afflicted, until the said Witches came unto them, and then the Witches being come, and standing by them, the said parties lay still, and so continuing till they were departed, they grew again after the Witches were going away to be as sore troubled, as they were at their coming. And thus (quoth M. Darrell) thou mayest do as occasion shall serve. Hereupon I began about the xxv. of November (as I think) in my pretended fits, to make mention of Witches: and likewise when they were brought unto me, did pretend as though I had been greatly vexed, until they came to my bed's side: and then I lay still as though I had been a sleep, until they departed: When I did again dissemble myself to be troubled as before. In these my pretended fits, this was my manner, uz. Look where mother Higget stands, take her away, and so of diverse others to the number of six or seven: as Alice Freeman, Thomas Groves, William Bend, and his wife, widow Boot: my Aunt Else: Millicent Horseley and her sister. This report of my naming of the said parties for Witches, was presently spread abroad, as to have been done by me through the devils skill, in using my tongue: whereas I do constantly profess, that I only named them, because I had known them before to have been commonly suspected for Witches.  
About the 6. or 7. of December, Somers did grow weary of his new kind of dissimulation, having now continued as long in troubling himself about Witches, as he had done before in his tricks under the coverlet. And thereupon contrary to M. Darrel's persuasions gave them all over, and forbore any further practices, till about the xiiii. of january following. 
14. january 1597. Somers.  Hereof Somers in this sort. About the beginning of December, I did grow very weary of all my former practices, and thereupon did wholly leave them, contrary to M. Darrel's good liking: who endeavoured to persuade me still to continue in them. But when he could not prevail with me so far, although he alleged that it would be an hindrance both to him and me: and that this course begun, was not hitherto finished, as it ought to be: then M. Darrell gave it out, that the Devil would lie lurking about a man, without troubling of him, sometimes a month, sometimes a quarter of a year, and sometimes more. Whilst I thus continued without making any show of trouble, M. Darrell had private speeches with me, sometimes in his own lodging at M. Bonner's, and sometimes walking alone in S. Mary's Churchyard. And always his speeches tended to this effect: that I must not as yet desist from my former practices. But for any thing that he could say unto me, I gave that course over, for the space of about six weeks.  
After many persuasions used by M. Darrell, that Somers would undertake again his former courses: and upon some other occasions, (as afterwards it will appear) he the said Somers falling into his former fits, M. Darrell presently gave it out, that now he was repossessed, accordingly as he had foretold, both privately and in his sermons, that it would come to pass and then gave him further instructions, how in his old fits, he should behave himself after a new fashion. 
W. Somers.  When I had entered again into this course (saith Somers,) M. Darrell told me of certain words, that as he said the boy of Burton had used, uz. he fell and I caught him, & willed me to use some sentences, or dark sayings, that thereby such as should hear me, might wonder the more at me. And accordingly, in one of my next fits, when M. Darrell was present, (as he was very seldom absent at such times) I uttered amongst some other vain speeches, the words before mentioned: he fell and I caught him. Which words I had no sooner delivered, but M. Darrell taking hold of them, presently said. O good people I pray you mark this: for it is a matter of importance, the very same words the Devil uttered in the boy of Burton: whereby you may observe the occasion that the Devil did again repossess him. Furthermore according to M. Darrel's former advice, I invented and delivered in an other of my fits these words: the said stone is soft and the bolder, and flint is hard. Which words M. Darrell being present, did expound to this effect: uz. that by these stones were meant the magistrates of Nottingham, signifying, that some of them had soft hearts to believe the mighty works of God, and that some of them were so hard hearted as they would believe nothing, although God himself should come down from heaven amongst them, thereby condemning such as did affirm, that I was but a dissembler. At the same time also, I used these speeches: he that runs on the Ice, let him take heed lest he slip: and these also, he that stands on a hill, let him tumble down, and he will be the sooner at the bottom: which words M. Darrell did likewise expound: but I could not well hear him, by reason of the noise, which was at that time in the place where I lay, and therefore I cannot tell what sense he made of them.  
When Somers had continued his fits again, whereby he was deemed to be repossessed about three weeks or somewhat more, he was very weary of them, and would have given them over: but M. Darrell would not permit him so to do: but kept him in his former course by the space of about a week after, uz. until the xxiiii. of the said month of February, that the Mayor of Nottingham, did then upon good occasion seize him into his hands. Hereof thus Somers hath deposed. Having remained about four weeks in this course, I grew again very weary of it, and did refrain sometimes two or three days together from my former tricks, and walked abroad as I thought meet. Hereof I advertised M. Darrell privately in his chamber, saying, that I was determined to give that course over: But M. Darrell answered me, that I might not in any wise so do as yet: that in so doing I should bring them both into great danger, peradventure of their lives: and therefore willed me to persist, promising that if I would be advised by him, I should never want. But all his persuasions notwithstanding, I still affirmed, that I would no longer continue in my former dissimulation, and further said, that if I might not be suffered to be quiet & leave it with his good liking: I was fully minded to tell all that came unto me, from that time forward, that all I had done from my first pretended trouble was but dissembled. Well, (quoth M. Darrell) if thou wilt not follow my counsel, it will be worse for thee, and I will do well enough with thee. But I accordingly did keep my promise. For afterwards when some came to see me, I told them plainly in the hearing of M. Darrell, that I had dissembled all that I had done. Whereupon M. Darrell being offended, said to those that heard me, that they might not in any sort believe me, because it was not William Somers, but the Devil that so said, and willed them therefore to hold me. So as I was at my wits end what I should do: because M Darrell had got such credit, as whatsoever he said was believed to be true. After I had thus confessed myself to be a dissembler, I was restrained by M. Darrel's means from going abroad, except two or three, such as he liked, were in my company: which was the cause that I fell again, for the space of about a week unto my former dissimulation, until I had thereby gotten more liberty: and then meeting with one john Cooper of Nottingham, the keeper of the poor in S. john's, I did reveal my mind in part unto him, telling him, that I would gladly remain with him, whereby I might be quiet at the last.  
All that hitherto hath been said, for the proof of this second general accusation, laid to Darrel's charge, doth penned especially upon Somers own deposition. And in this case little more is to be expected. For it had been madness in M. Darrell, if he had not taken such a course in the instructing of him, as he might be sure none knew but Somers: and then he doubteth not (it seemeth) but that if the worst fell out, his credit would be sufficient to overweigh the boys. Howbeit therein he hath overshot himself. For although the circumstances before mentioned in the first Chapter, should be thought insufficient to convince M. Darrell of his practising with Somers at Ashby. Yet many of them together with the boy's oath are very pregnant proofs of this second accusation. For example, M. Darrel's undertaking that the boy's Father in law should not lose a penny by him, deposed by Robert Cooper. Likewise his procuring of a collection for Cooper: confessed by himself. Also his private conference so oft with Somers: which four likewise have deposed. Moreover his buying out of Summer's years: acknowledged by himself. Furthermore, his earnest dealing, for the bailing of Somers, when he was charged with felony: deposed by M. Aldridge. Again, his entertaining of Somers at an Inn or Tavern: as George Richardson doth affirm. Again, Somers threatening of M Darrell, when they were fallen out: as M. Darrell himself confesseth. And again, Somers his wishing, that he had never seen M. Darrell: as john Copper deposeth.   

CHAP. III. Of M Darrel's instructing of Somers by speaking to others in his hearing, those things which he meant that he should practise from the fift of November, when he came unto him, until the seventh of the same, being the day of his pretended dispossession  
FOr a third proof of the aforesaid general complaint, exhibited before her majesties said Commissioners: that M. Darrel did counterfeit with Somers concerning his pretended dispossession: he the said M. Darrell is charged to have dealt with the boy at Nottingham, so cunningly, as that albeit he had never seen him at Ashbie, nor dealt with him privately at Nottingham: (both which points have been proved in the two former Chapters): yet the course which he held with him there, and with those that came to see him in his fits, was so contrived, as it might easily inform Somers what he had to do, and did indeed blind & mislead many of the people. Which second point, uz. the seducing of the people, was as necessary for M. Darrell to compass as the former. For otherwise both he and the boy might have dissembled, till their hearts had ached, if no man had believed them. This accusation reacheth to such M. Darrel's last mentioned practices, from the time that he came first unto him at Nottingham, being the 5. day of November, 1597. until about the xxiiii. of February following. Howbeit, for the more perspicuity, and in respect of the variety of the matters, that fell out within the compass of that time, this Chapter comprehendeth, but his cunning and sleights to the purpose here expressed, from the said fift of November, until the seventh of the same, when it was pretended that Somers was dispossessed.  
It being agreed upon by all those, who in these latter times do take upon them the chiefest skill in casting out devils, that it is a matter of especial great difficulty to discern truly who is possessed, because there have been, daily is, and may be hereafter so great dissimulation and falsehood practised in that behalf, as partly it doth appear in the first book of this treatise: yet M. Darrel having never seen W. Somers (as he now pretendeth), did affirm, that he the said Somers was certainly possessed by a wicked spirit, upon the rude report of a simple man, one Hugh Wilson, and upon a letter received by Wilson from his sister in law, one Mistress Wallys.  
This M. Darrel confesseth in these words. Being certified in my sister's letter & by the messengers further speeches, 
ad art. 9 pa. 16,  of the manner of Summer's fits, I did send them word, that those things being true, the said Somers was possessed, and this I did before I saw Somers. And herein M. Darrell was so confident upon so light a report, as in his journey towards Nottingham, (the said fift of November), he took M. Iretons' house in his way, 
M, Darrell ad art. 1 pa. 57,  and told him (as he confesseth), uz. of the possession of William Somers, that he was sent for to come to him: that he was purposed to have a fast for his dispossession, and that he doubted not of good success, by that means to procure the boy's deliverance. 
jeronimus Mingus.  This M. Darrel's confident bragging, being directly against one of his masters rules, that he doubted not of good success, as it argueth his ignorance: so the same being joined to his rash credulity, doth make it probable, that either he had laid his plot with the boy before, or else that he knew very well, how by his counning to draw on the boy, for the serving of his turn, as he himself list. More might be collected hereof, but where other matters are so pregnant, it is needless to insist upon it.  
The chiefest means whereby M. Darrell did seduce the people, and cunningly instruct Somers, without suspicion in any that believed him, were these two false grounds, (whereof in the first book), uz. that those who are possessed, have in their fits no use of their senses or faculties of their minds, and that whatsoever they either do or say at such times, it is not they but Satan that doth both say and do it. Whereupon purposing to go to Nottingham, he first prepared his way, by laying (as he could) a groundeworke suitable to that which he meant to build upon: uz. that upon the foresaid bare relation of Hugh Wilson, and before he had then seen Somers, he sent word by him to Nottingham, that he the said Somers was in his fits senseless, and that all he then did or spoke was done by the Devil. Master Darrell being examined hereof, denieth it. But it is deposed by divers witnesses.  
Master Darrell, among many speeches had with me, told me, 
Hugh Wilson fol. 3.  that Somers in his fits was without reason, and did pronounce, that if the boy were so handled, as I had told him, then by the example of others, with whom (as he said) he had been, he neither hears (quoth he) sees, nor feels any thing.  
Hugh Wilson, upon his return from M. Darrell, 
Anne Porter. fol. 3.  came to my house, and did report, that M. Darrell said, that the boy was altogether senseless in his fits: that it was not he, but the evil spirit within him, that made him so unquiet.  
Hugh Wilson did report at his return, 
Th. Porter pag. 113.  that M. Darrell said, that Somers in his fits had no sense, and therefore willed that he should not be troubled at such times, and that when the said Somers did speak or do any thing in the said fits, it was not he the said Somers, but the Devil that so did, or spoke in him.  
Concerning these two grounds of M. Darrel's, 
Rob. Cooper. pa. 106.  it is not much impertinent that Robert Cooper deposeth in this sort, uz. The chief deceit which was used to blear all their eyes at Nottingham, was the persuasion beaten into them by M. Darrell, that the boy was senseless in all his fits, and that when he seemed to speak, it was not he, but the Devil that spoke in him.  
Besides, M. Darrell is further charged, that as he had sent word to Nottingham, that Somers was possessed, before he had seen him: so at his coming unto him thither, he said he was possessed before he had seen him in any fit: 
M. Darrel ad art. 1. pag. 215,  especially such a fit as might not easily be counterfeited. This M. Darrell denieth in these words. Coming to William Somers the 5. of November, I did not then affirm William Somers to be possessed, before I had seen him in any such fits, as can not be counterfeited. And being here demanded to set down what signs he saw him then act, that he thought could not be counterfeited, he answered: that he saw a certain extraordinary swelling in his body, beside certain signs mentioned in the scriptures. But he would not be drawn to name any of them. And it had been good for him that he had not mentioned the said swelling: but confessed the truth plainly: for that which he hath here denied is proved directly.  

Th. Wallis pag. 268  At M. Darrel's first coming to the town before he saw the boy, he said he was possessed.  
When M. Darrel did first see the boy at his coming to Nottingham, 
Th. Wallis ibid.  he said that he was possessed, notwithstanding that he was not in any fit.  

Ro. Cooper pag. 97. Io. Wiggen fol. 6  Upon M. Darrel's first coming to William Somers, he did presently affirm upon the sight of the boy, that he was possessed.  
At M. Darrel's first going to Somers, he heard him say, that out of doubt the boy was possessed.  

Tho. Porter pag. 114.  M. Darrell did then (uz. at his first coming, and before the boy had any fit) affirm to those that were present, that William Somers was possessed.  
Furthermore, it was objected against M. Darrell, that as he had sent word to Nottingham, before he had seen the boy, that those things which he seemed to speak in his fits, were not spoken by him but by the Devil: so upon his first coming unto him, notwithstanding that he the said Somers did answer him directly: yet he the said Darrell affirmed, that it was not Somers, but the devil. M. Darrell doth confess some part hereof: but the rest that he denieth is sufficiently proved.  

M, Darr. ad art. 2 p. 215  I thought (saith he) that certain words then spoken by Somers were not spoken by Satan. And I was moved so to think, because being persuaded that he was possessed, and having read in the scriptures, that the devil doth speak in those that are possessed. I did thereupon say, that I thought it was the devil that spoke in Somers.  
I asked of Somers the same night a question about some matter of faith and principle of religion: 
M. Darrel ad art. 3. pag. 215,  whereunto Somers made a fit answer, but with such gestures, as I supposed the said answer to proceed from Satan. What folly, boldness, and ignorance appeareth in these two depositions may easily be espied: & his falsehood also is as manifest by the depositions ensuing.  
M. Darrell then affirmed, 
Th. Porter pag. 114.  that when Somers in his fits spoke or did any thing, it was not he, but the devil, that so did, or spoke in him.  
M. Darrel asked Somers that night how he did, & he answered, well I thank God. Whereunto M. Darrel replied: 
Nich Shepard. fol. 2.  I doubt it is not W. Somers that speaks unto me. This M. Darrell denieth.  
M. Darrell demanded of Somers what was his name: who answering, that his name was William, & smiling therewith: 
Mistress Grace ad are, 8, pag, 163,  he the said M. Darrel looked very earnestly upon him, and then said to the standers by: I am afraid it is not William that speaketh: whereat the boy fell a laughing again. This also M. Darrell denieth.  
The boy then lay as if he were a sleep, & when he awaked, 
Marry Cooper, fo. 1.  M. Darrell asked him where he had been, and he said no where, but a sleep: and then M. Darrel said, I fear it is not William that speaketh unto me. This in like manner M. Darrell denieth, as he hath done the rest.  
Also M. Darrell was charged, that as he had said before he came to Nottingham, that Somers was in his fits senseless: so the first night of his coming to the boy, he affirmed the same again to many in the presence of the said boy: whereunto M. Darrel answered thus: 
M, Dar. ad art 2. pag 215.  I do not believe that I said that night, that Somers was in his fits senseless.  

Tho. Porter 114. & fo 3  Master Darrel affirmed, that night that William Somers had no sense in his fits, and said to the people: I dare assure you that the boy doth not know what he doth in his fits.  

Marry Cooper. fol. 1.  Master Darrell bade that night: let the boy alone: for he neither knows, nor sees any thing.  
The former three points first laid: uz. that Somers was possessed: that those things which he seemed to speak, were spoken by the Devil, and that he was in his fits senseless: For as much as he deemed it not sufficient, to persuade those that were present for him to affirm the same barely: he alleged his experience for them all in the boys presence: saying, that Somers was troubled in like manner and sort to Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, 
M, Darr. ad art. 15 p. 17 Io. Wiggen fol. 6  and the seven in Lancashire, who had all of them been possessed. This M. Darrel denieth: but it is deposed.  
Out of doubt the boy is possessed (quoth M. Darrel that night the boy being present) for my experience is such, that I know it, by the example of seven in Lancashire, the boy of Burton, & Katherine Wright, who had the like fits that this boy hath.  

Nich Shepard. fol. 2.  Summer's falling into a laughter that night, M. Darrel said, I know this was not the voice of William Somers. And then added: this boy is as the boy of Burton was.  

Marry Cooper, foe 1.  M. Darrel said that night (Somers being present) that the boy was possessed, and that he did as the boy of Burton did.  

Ro. Cooper pag. 97.  M. Darrel did that night affirm in the presence of the boy, that divers others that had been possessed (naming the boy of Burton, Katherine Wright, and the seven in Lancashire) had been troubled even as William Somers then was.  

E. Garland. ad art. 9 174.  M. Darrel affirmed the same night (the boy being present) that William Somers was possessed in the very like manner, that Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire were possessed.  
Master Darrel affirmed then to those that were present with the boy, that William Somers was possessed, 
Th', Porter pag. 114.  that in his fits he had no sense, and that when he spoke or did any thing in them, it was not he but the Devil, that so did and spoke in him. And this the said Darrell affirmed to be true, because in his experience, others being possessed, did show the like signs, who had no sense in their fits: and in whom the Devil spoke and did as is before expressed.  
Besides M. Darrell was charged, to have specified the same night in the presence of Somers, & divers others, the manner of such fits as the possessed had in the scriptures, and of those which were seen (as he said) in Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire: that in their fits they would cast themselves into the fire, and sometimes into the water: that they would tear themselves, gnash with their teeth, writhe their necks as though their faces had stood almost backwards: draw their mouths far awry: and lift up their bellies. 
M. Darrel ad art. 13. pag. 16.  Unto all these particulars M. Darrell answereth thus: I do believe they are true.  
Again, M. Darrell was charged, that after he had told the manner of the fits, (as last before he hath confessed) he then also said to the persons present in the hearing of Somers: that he the said Somers would do the like. 
M. Darr. ad art. 15. pag. 17.  This M. Darrell denieth: but it is deposed.  
M. Darrel having declared (the first night in the presence of the boy) what strange fits Katherine Wright, 
Io. Wiggen. fol. 6.  the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire had, he then said: uz. This boy will have the like.  
M. Darrell having named (the first night the boy being present) certain signs which the possessed use, he further said: 
Th. Porter fol. 3.  uz. If the boy be possessed you shall see such signs in him.  
She heard M. Darrell say at that time (uz. the first night) before Somers: If this boy be possessed, 
Marry Cooper fol. 1  he will foam and wallow and gnash, and many other such like: and by and by he did some of them.  

Summer's pag. 10.  When Master Darrel had showed them etc. he said that I would do them all, he was sure, and many more before it was long. Whereupon I knowing his meaning, began to put some of those sits in practice, whereby they that were confirmed in that which M. Darrell had told them of my possessing. And M. Darrel did with some earnestness confirm them therein, as having himself (as he said) good experience in such matters. After that Somers for a time had practised some of those fits, (whereof M. Darrel had made mention,) and said he would do the like, to the great admiration of those that were present, and his own no small reputation: (he but speaking the word, and all things falling out accordingly) than he was charged to have proceeded to some other points, and to tell them in Somers hearing, that he the said Somers was not so much troubled for his own sins, 
M. Darrel ad art. 16. pag. 17.  as for the sins of the people, or of the inhabitants in Nottingham. This M. Darrell denieth: but it is sufficiently proved.  

Rob. Cooper. pag. 97  At that time M. Darrel affirmed (in the hearing of Somers) that he the said Somers was not punished so much for his own sins, or for the sins of his parents, as for the sins that reigned in Nottingham. And so he affirmed of Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire.  

Th. Porter, pag. 114.  M. Darrel made a godly exhortation to those that were present, that every man should be careful to look to his own ways, because otherwise the like judgement of God might well enough happen unto them. For (saith he, in the hearing of the boy) this boy is not so much troubled for his own sins, as for the sins of the people.  

Marry Cooper. fol. 1  M. Darrel said the same night in Summer's presence, that the boy was very evil troubled, and out of doubt it was not for his own sins, but for your sins (meaning her, and her mother) and others.  
M. Darrel said, that out of question, 
W. Somers, pag. 12.  I was not possessed either for mine own sins, or for the sins of my father and mother only, but for the sins that reigned in Nottingham.  
When M. Darrel had laid down his conceit touching the cause of Summer's trouble: then he was charged to have affirmed in the presence of the boy, that Satan did use to show by gestures in those that were possessed, the particular sins that reigned in those places where they dwelled. 
M. Darr. ad art. 16. pag. 17. Summer's pag. 10.  This M. Darrell denieth: but it is deposed.  
M. Darrel told them that were present divers tales of the boy of Burton, of Katherine Wright, how in their fits they showed by gestures, the especial sins that reigned in those places where they dwelled.  
M. Darrell then and there delivered before Somers and the people present, 
M. Berefford. fol. 9  that the devil did use the parts and members of those that were possessed, so as by signs and gestures he doth often use to signify the particular sins reigning in those places, where the possessed be.  
M. Darrel said (that night in the presence of Somers) that it was a practice of the devil, 
Th. Porter pag. 114.  by signs and divers gestures to show the sins of other men.  
After that M. Darrel had thus showed his cunning concerning satans accustomed practise last mentioned than he was also further charged, to have affirmed in the hearing of Somers, and presence of many, that he verily thought the devil would do the like in Somers, and declare by signs and gestures the sins of Nottingham and of others. This M. Darrell denieth, but it is deposed. 
M. Darrell ad art, 17. pa. 17 Somers p. 12.   
When M. Darrell had mentioned these points, he told the parties present, that the devil no doubt would make me to put them in practice.  

Rob. Cooper. pag. 97  Master Darrel then said in the presence of the boy: that now those who would not believe the word of God, should be driven to acknowledge and confess their sins by the means of the Devil, who would in this boy preach unto them their sins, by showing the same by certain gestures of the boys. Whereupon the boy lying upon a bed, began to use many gestures: as of dancing, fight, robbing, drunkenness, whoredom, etc. as they are put put down since in a ballad.  

Th. Porter, fol. 3.  M. Darrel discoursed (that night in the presence of Somers) of the sins that reigned in the world, which the Devil would make show of.  
Summer's being an apt scholar for Master Darrell to practise upon, hearing by Master Darrel's speeches, what he was to do, and what was expected at his hands: did leap and skip upon a bed, and make many signs and gestures: 
Summer's pag. 12,  Wherewith (saith Somers) all that were present were much amazed: being deceived with that error, which Master Darrel had taught them, that I though I were present could hear none of those things, that be had then told them.  
Of these gestures though they were but very rude & gross: yet M. Darrell (as his manner is to make every thing strange that Somers did) giveth them this report. These things (saith he, 
M. Darrell Histor.  meaning the sins that Somers had gestured) were in such lively and orient colours painted out unto us, that were present, being to the number of some sixty, that I do verily think, that it is not in the skill and power of man to do the like. With these gestures Master Darrel it seemeth was so greatly delighted, as he could not choose but give some apparent show thereof. For he was in this place charged by her majesties said Commissioners, that whilst Somers was acting of them, he himself did expound them very learnedly, to signify this or that sin that reigned in Nottingham. 
M. Darrell ad art. 16. pa. 17. W. Somers, pag. 12.  This M. Darrell denieth. But it is deposed.  
As I did use any of the said gestures, oh would M. Darrell say, to the standers by: see you not how he doth thus, and thus? These things signify that such and such sins do reign in this town. They also that were present having heard M. Darrell, would as I tossed with my hands, and tumbled up and down upon my bed, presently collect and say: oh, he doth so for this sin, and so for that sin, whereby it came to pass, that I could do nothing in any of my fits, either that night or the day after, either stir my head, or any part of my body: look merrily, or sadly, sit or lie speak or be silent, open or shut mine eyes, but some would still make an interpretation of it: as to be done by the Devil in me, to declare such sins in Nottingham, as they themselves imagined.  
Amongst other collections, that M. Darrell made by sundry of my gestures: some he said the Devil did in me, to signify my own sins, as those of dancing, of Viols and instruments, I being an apprentice to a Musician. Likewise my turning the top of my tongue towards my throat. Master Darrell said, that it is signified how I had used it to sing filthy songs.  
When Somers began his gestures, 
Ro. Cooper pag. 97. 98.  M. Darrell affirmed that they were the signs, whereby the Devil showed the sins that reigned in Nottingham, and did himself interpret some of them, and by the course of his interpretation, many present seeing the gestures which were plain, did take upon them likewise to expound them, affirming this sign to note such a sin, and that sign some other sin. And in the end (quoth M. Darrell,) behold did I not tell you so? This is the Devil, By this course the people were very much amazed, as thinking the Devil to preach so unto them, and to note the sins that reigned in that town.  

T. Porter, pa. 205.  M. Darrell when the boy was in his fits, and acting certain gestures, did interpret the said gestures, to mean and declare the sins that reigned in Nottingham.  

john Sherrart, pa. 315  The first night that M. Darrell came, the boy acting certain gestures, he the said Darrell did interpret them, to signify the sins that reigned in Nottingham.  

M. Bernard pa. 254.  Somers did act his dumb fit, consisting of gestures, which Master Darrell did say, did signify the sins of the people, and when the boy laughed, (as he would laugh extremely at the end of some of his dumb gestures), than Master Darrell would say, that it was the devil that laughed, to show the joy that he had in regard that he had brought them to commit such sins, as those gestures signified.  

Mrs. Grace, pa. 103  The dumb shows which Somers did express in his fits that night, both Master Darrell and all the standers by did conceive and apprehend, that the sins reigning in Nottingham, and else where abroad, were represented unto them very lively: and so much (I think) was declared both by M. Darrell and others at that time.  

though, Porter pag. 115.  I remember that the Lady Zouch, and Mistress Grace, had the most talk, and did especially interpret some of the said signs: and that when sundry that were present would ask what such a thing meant that Somers did: they, the said Lady Zouch, and Mrs. Grace would tell the meaning of it, what sin it did signify.  
Likewise Master Darrell himself, although he disclameth for his part the expounding of any of the said gestures: yet he is pleased to tell us what sins were then set out by Somers, in such sort, as Roscius himself could not have done it better. 
M. Darrell historic.  This evening (sayeth he), he acted many sins by signs & gestures, most lively representing & shadowing, them out unto us: as namely brawling, quarrelling, fight, swearing, robbing by the high ways, picking, and cutting of purses, burglary, whoredom, pride in men and women, hypocrisy, sluggishness in hearing of the word, drunkenness, gluttony, also dancing with the toys thereunto belonging, the manner of Antic dancers, the games of dicing and carding, the abuse of the Viol, with other instruments. At the end of sundry of these, he laughed exceedingly, diverse times clapping his hands on his thighs for joy: percase to shadow out the delight, that both himself, and sinners take in their sins. And at the end of some of them, as killing and stealing, he showed how he brought them to the Gallows, making a sign thereof.  
It is not unlikely but that M. Darrell, hath made bold with his oath, in that he denieth to have made then any interpretation of Summer's gestures, seeing that he doth not refrain in these words last mentioned, after a sort to interpret some of them. Besides, it is not likely that the women's expositions would have carried such credit, except M. Darrell himself had been an Actor in them. For within a Sunday or two after, they were of that account, as they were thought worthy to be read publicly in the Church, as it is deposed by Mistress Grace, and Edmond Garland in these words.  
The next or the second sunday after, 
Mrs. Grey pa, 164 Edm. Garland p: 175.  M. Aldrige did repeat in the Church publicly the said signs acted by Somers, with their interpretations before made of them, affirming that forasmuch as they in Nottingham, notwithstanding the admonitions of many godly Preachers, did still continue in their sins: God had sent the Devil to reprove them, and to make them ashamed of their former obstinacy.  
Upon this authentical reading of the said (more than sottish) fooleries, out cometh a ballad, wherein is supplied some want in M. Darrel's history. He telleth us that Somers did notably set out by gestures this sin, and that sin: but doth not express the manner how. Herein therefore the Ballader hath showed his skill, as you may perceive by some of his rhymes. He played the antic there in scorns, and flouted men in making horns. And after that he did bewray, how men at Dyce and Cards do play. He showed the manner of our Farthingales, our Busks, and Periwigs, Masks, and Vales, and by clapping of his hands, he showed the starching of our bands. Much good matter may further be found in the said Ballad, very agreeable to the worthiness of that exploit. And thus we are come to the end of the first nights work, after M. Darrelles coming to Somers at Nottingham.  
The next day (being Sunday,) M. Darrell is charged, that coming to Somers towards that night for that sundry persons were then with Somers, which had not been with him the night before,) he used the like speeches then in their presence, and in Somers hearing, that he had done overnight: uz. that he the said Somers was in his fits senseless: that the Devil at such times did speak in him: that he was troubled in such manner and sort as the boy of Burton, Katherie Wright, and the seven in Lancashire were vexed, when they were possessed: that he then also told them, what kind of fits they had: what were the signs of possession mentioned in the scripture, and how Somers by gestures had showed the sins that reigned in Nottingham, 
M, Darrell ad art, 24, & 26, pa, 7  with much more to the effect specified. All these points Master Darrell denieth to have been mentioned by him that night: but the contrary is deposed.  

W. Somers p. 14. & 15  Upon the Sunday in the afternoon, many resorted to see me, upon the report of those things which had been done overnight. Unto whom Master Darrell repeated all that he had said the night before. In the beginning of whose speeches, I did lie as though I had been asleep, and thereupon, he telling them that I was possessed said also, that Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire, were in their fits altogether senseless, and neither heard nor saw any thing, more than if they had been either stocks or stones: and that he said was my case. He told them also what manner of fits the said parties had, and that I was possessed in the very same manner, that they were: also what gestures the devil had used in me, to show the sins that reigned in Nottingham: and in the end he added, that no doubt they should see the devil work them again, (meaning the fits which I had acted over night), before it were long. Whereupon, I (having lain still all this while, as though I had been a sleep,) began to use all those tricks, which I had done the night before, but with some more readiness. As I did counterfeit any of the said fits: even so said M. Darrell did such a one, and such a one: it is not the boy, but the devil that doth them in him These things made the people to wonder, seeing me do every thing almost in such manner and sort, as M. Darrell had told them before, that the devil would do them in me.  
M. Darrell affirmed the next day at night, 
Th. Porter pag. 115.  (being sunday) to those that were present, (diverse being then there, which were not there the saturday at night before,) to the same effect, that he had overnight, uz. that for a certainty. William Somers was possessed, that he knew it by the signs of possession mentioned in the scriptures, that he was senseless in his fits, that when he spoke or did any thing in his fits, it was not he but the devil that spoke and did them.  
M. Darrell did upon the sunday at night declare the signs of possession in William Somers. 
Mrs. Grace pag. 164. Anne Porter, fol. 3.   
On the sunday at night in the presence of many hearers M. Darrell did discourse at large, of the seven possessed in Lancashire, and of the boy of Burton, concerning the manner of their fits, and said that Somers had the like.  

Ro. Cooper fol. 7.  Upon the sunday at night, he heard M. Darrell discourse of the seven possessed in Lancashire, and of the boy of Burton, and said that this boy did, and would use the like tricks that they did in flearing and laughing, and such like.  
When M. Darrell had thus brought the people that were present, into a great admiration of his pretended knowledge and experience, of Satan's proceedings with the possessed, and some of them to incline that Somers was indeed possessed as he affirmed: it was moreover laid to his charge, that then appointing a fast to be held the next day for the boy's dispossession, and moving men to refrain from the company of their wives that night, for their better preparation against the said fast, he did take upon him to foretell many things that would happen that day: as that they should see very strange things: that Satan would wonderfully torment the boy, and that he doubted not, but that they should perceive by the signs of possession and dispossession, that the boy was possessed, and that then he should be delivered from Satan. M. Darrell denieth all the premises, 
M. Darrel ad art. 24. & 25 pag. 18, W. Somers pag. 14.  saving, his appointing of a fast, and moving of men to refrain from their wives. But the rest is deposed.  
M. Darrell told them that were present, what signs and tokens were showed at the dispossessing of certain in the scriptures. He also then said that the Devil would show strange fits in me, at the time of the fast, whereby they might certainly know that I was possessed, and that they should further perceive by sure and certain tokens that I should be dispossessed at that time, if it stood with God's glory to have it so. Which thing thus declared by M. Darrell, made the people very willing (as I perceived), to hear of the said fast.  

Th. Porter. pag. 116.  Master Darrell told them, that the next day there should be a fast: that then they should see, that God would work great wonders if it stood with his glory: that then they should perceive by the signs of possession, that William Somers was indeed possessed with a wicked spirit, and that if it stood with God's glory to have him dispossessed the next day, they should then perceive that he was dispossessed, by the signs likewise in the scriptures of dispossession.  
M. Darrell said before the fast, 
Io. Wiggen fol, 6,  that they should see the boy do strange things, and then named all the signs of the possessed in the scriptures.  
M. Mayor seeming to wonder at diverse strange fits, which Somers had on the sunday at night, M. Darrell said, 
Mrs, Grace pa. 164.  that he had seen others in the like fits, and that he made no doubt, but that if they might meet together, and join in prayer, they should see him dispossessed, except it were more for God's glory to have it otherwise. M. Darrell did then and there say thus: 
M Berefford fol. 9  you see strange things: but you shall see more strange things done by this boy hereafter before his dispossession, if it please God.  
I agreed to M. Darrel's motion, 
M Aldridge fol. 10  to be one of the Preachers the next day, upon the comfort of M. Darrell: who affirmed that without doubt they should see great good come of it.  
M. Darrell did tell me before the fast, 
M, Aldred. fol. 5.  that out of doubt I shall see the Devil deal strangely with the boy, and recited many particulars thereof, which I remember not. And further I making some doubt of the event, and success of the said exercise: the said Darrell told me, that he made no doubt, but that the said exercise would work to good effect, in helping of the said boy: and to that end he did persuade the hearers than present openly to believe the same.  
M. Darrell said (at that time) that out of doubt we should see the Devil strangely deal with the boy, 
Ro. Cooper fol. 17  that we should see before to morrow at night, (if it stood with God's glory) that the devil should be cast out.  
Master Darrell at the time did pronounce to all the people then presnt, 
Anne Porter. fol 3  that they should see the Boy do many strange things and named them. Amongst all which, I do only remember this, uz. That when the evil spirit went from him, he would rend and tear him, and leave him for dead.  

Garland ad art. 17 pa. 175,  M. Darrell affirmed, that the next day, they should see Satan wonderfully, torment the said Somers, and perceive in him the very true signs of possession, and that also if it stood with God's glory, the deliverance of the said Somers, should be made manifest by the true tokens of dispossession.  
When the day of the fast came, M. Darrel is charged to have affirmed in his Sermon, that they should evidently perceive by the signs of possession, that Somers was possessed, and by the signs of dispossession, that Somers should be dispossessed, if God would: and that afterwards coming to entreat of the particular signs of possession, and so of dispossession, he used such pauses, as that the boy had leisure to act them in order as he named them.  

W. Somers, pag. 16.  Whilst the first sermon was in preaching (for there were two,) I did lie still for the most part upon a bed, saving, that now and then, I did struggle a little, some being appointed to hold me. But when M. Darrell began, than I fell to prepare myself, according to my instructions. After he had proceeded a little way in his Sermon, he did signify unto his hearers, that they should see at that time strange fits wrought by the Devil in my person: whereby it would most plainly appear that I was possessed. Not long after, Master Darrell read or said out of Saint Mark: He teared sore, and then I pulled open my doublette, and snatched at the clothes with my hands. After he read or said, and he foameth, and then I (being readily prepared) did foam at the mouth. At Master Darrell named wallowing, I did tumble and wallow on the bed, diverse other kinds of fits M. Darrell at that time did make mention of which I then did act severally, as M. Darrel made mention of them. After a long time, which M. Darrel and I did spend in showing of these fits (to the great astonishment of those that were present): then he drew near to the time, wherein he pretended that I should be dispossessed. He told his hearers, that as they had seen me before troubled by the Devil with so many fits, and had perceived me thereby to be possessed: so now (if it stood with the glory of God) they should see me publicly delivered, by those signs which the possessed in the scriptures did show in the time of their deliverance. When he came to the mentioning of the said signs, I applied myself to imitate them accordingly. As he named the first sign, uz. the spirit cried: then I presently cried. As he named the second, uz. that the spirit would rend him sore: then I did as before is mentioned. And at his mentioning of the third, uz. he was as one dead: then I did presently lie a pretty while, as though I had been dead. Whereupon there was presently a great noise in the hall, by reason of the people voices, being greatly moved to see me so dispossessed, as they thought.  
It falleth out in this point, that M. Darrell himself doth not much disagree from Somers. 
M. Darrel ad art. 31. pag, 19,  Prosecuting my matter (saith he) as my text gave me occasion, I made mention of fourteen several signs of a man possessed, partly out of my text, and partly out of other places of scripture: which I did, thereby to persuade my auditory, that Somers was possessed. And as I named those signs, and did insist upon them, the word and work of God concurred together. So as Somers in his fits, or the devil in him, did then act sundry of those signs, even as I read and insisted upon them. As for example, I repeated out of my text (and he foameth) and then presently the boy foamed: & o of the rest. And likewise towards the end of my sermon, I noted and insisted upon the three signs of dispossession mentioned in the scriptures, and presently the boy first cried, without any appearance of life at all in him, and so continued almost one quarter of an hour.  

Dar. history  Thus far M. Darrell upon his oath, but in his history he is more free. There he saith, that he handled at that time fifteen signs of possession: (but Somers lieth there for dead only some half quarter of an hour) that he said thus to his auditory. Whensoever one having an evil spirit, shall be brought to jesus to be cured (which is when the means sanctified thereunto is used) and lying there before him, shallbe handled in that manner as Somers is here: that is, rend sore, cry and lie for dead, than a commandment is gone forth from Christ to the devil for his departure, and accordingly he is gone forth. When therefore you shall see these things come to pass, whereof we are told before hand, then let us know, and be certainly assured, that the devil is as truly gone out of this boy, as we are now assured that he is in him. This last clause is the truest part of his deposition. The one was as sure as the other: both of them being very cozening pranks.  
But let us hear how the people were affected. They broke forth (saith M. Darrell) confusedly, and all as one man, when they saw Somers lie for dead, into loud cries unto the Lord, in his behalf, 
Rob. Cooper. pa. 100  as men astonished. And Rob. Cooper saith thus: when the people that were present saw and heard these things, they cried out most vehemently in the doing of them: Lord have mercy upon us: 
M Darrel's history.  Lord have mercy upon us: & so did M. Darrell with his hands lift up as high as he could. The fear & astonishment than was exceeding great, there being none present (as I think) but that they quaked & trembled, & wept most bitterly. Two of the company (saith M. Darrel) there being present some 150. confessed their sins with tears before us all publicly. As it came to pass in the 19 of the Act. 19 ver. 17.18. & 20. even so it fell out with the inhabitants of Nottingham after this work. For many were stricken with fear, & some came unto me, confessing the same, and craving mine advice. And presently after I had publicly used some words of exhortation unto them (which was a week after the said work) they made choice of me for their preacher: and not only so, but flocked to the house of God, made haste, and were swift to hear the word. And so the word of God grew mightily in Nottingham, and prevailed.  
How such impostors have from time to time inveigled the people by such false sleights, it were not much to fill a whole volume. The popish crew of Monks, jesuits & Friars could never have gotten so much wealth & reputation, nor have possessed the people's minds with so great an opinion of them, nor have been able to have drawn them to so great superstition and palpable errors, but by these and such like counterfeit miracles & knaveries. And thus you have the worthy acts of M. Darrell, from the saturday at evening, until the Monday at night next following.   

CHAP. FOUR Of M. Darrel's cunning instructing of Somers, by speaking to others in his hearing of Satan's seeking to repossess him, & of the acting of certain tricks under a coverlet, from the seventh of November, until about the xxi. of the same.  
THe Scope of this Chapter is set down in the beginning of the former, & proceedeth with M. Darrel's course, from the time of his pretended dispossessing of Somers, until his supposed repossession, uz. for the space of above a month which was carried on so cunningly, as it was sufficient to instruct Somers what he had to do, although they had never been acquainted at Ashbie, nor M. Darrell privately instructed him at Nottingham.  
Whereas it is agreed upon, amongst the chiefest of those writers, (who take upon them great skill concerning the casting out of devils); that Satan doth seldom return to seek the repossession of those out of whom he is cast, as it further appeareth in the first book: yet M. Darrell is charged, that he had no sooner made an end of his sermon on the day of the fast, but that he laid an other ground for a new cozenage, by affirming to his Auditory, and in the hearing of Somers, that for a certainty, Satan would seek to repossess the said Somers, and prevail against him, except he were mightily withstood by faith. 
M, Darr. ad art. 32. p. 20  Master Darrell denieth that he used then any such words to his auditory, or to that effect. But it is deposed.  

W. Somers pag. 17.  At the end of the Sermon, M. Darrel said (as I remember) that very certainly the devil would come again, and enter into me, except very great care were taken to prevent him by prayer.  

Ed. Garland fol. 4.  At Smalles' house upon Monday, (where the fast was kept, and before M. Darrell and other preachers brought Somers back to his masters) M. Darrel said to the boy after the supposed dispossession, that the devil would be busier with him, then with any other: and that therefore it stood him upon, to be careful of himself.  

Tho. Porter fol. 3.  And when the boy was dispossessed, M. Darrel said: that now the boy was cleansed, the devil would return to him again, and be worse with him then before, except he did withstand him by faith.  

Mrs, Grace pag, 265,  After M. Darrell had done his sermon, he said in the hearing of the people, that Satan would assuredly seek to repossess him the (said Somers,) and that without great resistance by faith, and great care taken, he would again prevail against him.  

Ro. Cooper pag. 100  When the said Somers was dispossessed (as it was pretended) M. Darrell affirmed, that the devil would seek again to repossess him.  
Again, M. Darrell was charged, that afterwards he affirmed also the same night, in the hearing of Somers, and divers others: that Satan returned the same night he was dispossessed out of certain in Lancashire, and that so returning, he appeared unto them in certain similitudes, as of a Rat, a Cat, a Mouse, etc. and sought to re-enter at their mouths: that he verily thought that Satan would so deal with William Somers, except by faith he were prevented: and that according to his the said Darrel's cunning instruction, Somers afterwards affirmed unto him & others, that the devil sought the same night afer his pretended dispossession to re-enter at his mouth, 
M, Dar. ad art. 23. pag. 17.  in the likeness of a Rat. All this and every part of it, M. Darrell denieth to have been uttered by him that night. Howbeit in another place, being again examined, he saith thus. At one time Somers affirmed, that Satan did attempt to enter into him, the same night after he was dispossessed, 
M. Darrel ad art. 17 pag. 40.  in the likeness of a Rat. But that which he denieth is sufficiently proved.  
William Somers having set down at large as much as is here objected against M. Darrell (as spoken by M. Darrel unto him privately that night) saith: 
W. Somers. pag. 18.  The same things that M. Darrel told to me, he also told that night to some others that were in the house (as far as I remember). Upon these instructions the next morning after my pretended dispossession, I affirmed (but falsely) to M. Darrell in the presence of divers, that the devil sought to have re-entered into me as I lay in my bed, in the form of a Rat, which would have gone into my mouth, but that I stopped it with my hand. Then (quoth M. Darrel) to those that stood by, I knew that some such thing would happen: and further said unto them, that the devil would assault me many other ways hereafter.  

Ed. Garland pag. 175.  M. Darrell the Monday at night (as I remember) affirmed to divers in the presence of Somers, that sathan returned the same night that he was dispossessed out of certain in Lancashire unto them again.  

T. Porter, pa. 116.  M. Darrell affirmed that night (the fast being ended) or the next day, or within three days, in the presence of Somers and others: that Satan would out of doubt seek to repossess him: alleging a piece of Scripture to that purpose: that it was his custom so to do: that he himself had seen the experience of it in others, as in Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire: that he did use to appear in divers similitudes, as of a Rat, a Cat, or a mouse, and many other likenesses: that the Devil so appearing, was used to allure them by fair promises, that he might again re-enter: and even so he said, he verily thought the devil would deal with William Somers, & therefore willed him to stand steadfast in Christ, or otherwise the said wicked spirit would repossess him, and bring seven worse with him.  

Th. Porter fol. 3.  M. Darrell at his house after the dispossession, did pronounce to the boy and the people present, that after Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, & the seven in Lancashire, were dispossessed, the devil came unto them again at divers times, in divers likenesses, seeking to enter in again at their mouths, in the likeness of a Rat, a Mouse, a Dog etc.  

Ro. Cooper fol. 17.  M. Darrell said after the supposed dispossession, and in the presence of Somers, that after Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire were dispossessed, the devil came to them again the same night, and at divers other times, in diverse likenesses, seeking to enter in again at their mouths.  

M. halam fol. 7.  M. Darrell said, that the devil did come to some of the possessed the same night they were dispossessed, even as they were set at supper, offering to re-enter them again.  
Within a day or two after the pretended dispossession of William Somers, M. Darrell dealt with his master Thomas Porter, that he the said Somers might go home to his father in laws house, Robert Cooper, being a thing which he much desired. Hereunto his master did yield, 
W. Somers. pag. 18.  so as he went to his said father in laws (as he saith) about the xi. of November. And within a week after M. Darrell bought out his years, upon this pretence, for that he wished the boy to be of some other calling then a musician, because (quoth he) in that calling, he shall be driven to sing many filthy songs.  
Thus William Somers having changed the place of his abode, it seemed that M. Darrell thought it necessary to prepare that place as he had done the other. He was therefore charged by her majesties said Commissioners, that resorting to Somers, at Robert Cooper's house, he affirmed to the said Cooper and divers others in the hearing of the said Somers (making then no show of any trouble) to the effect in every point, as lastly he was charged: adding divers other things: as that when the devil had appeared to some that had been dispossessed in divers similitudes, they would sometimes start, and sometimes bid away with the Cat, that Rat, that Dog etc. that Satan for a certainty would deal with Somers as he had dealt with the rest: that he would allure him by promises, and sometimes draw him by threatenings: that if he were not well looked into, he would cast himself into the fire, or to seek to break his own neck, or by some other means to kill himself, and that when Somers had put all these things in practice, saving killing himself: then said M. Darrell to Cooper; did I not tell you that these things would come to pass?  
Touching these points of M. Darrel's foretelling that Satan would seek to re-enter into Somers, & what would happen in that behalf, he the said M. Darrell confesseth the substance of them: saving (that he finding what was collected by his foretelling in Somers hearing, what would come to pass) his memory would not serve him, to set down the particular times when he used such speeches.  

M. Darrell ad art. 36. pag. 20.  Sometimes (saith M. Darrel) I have told William Somers, that assuredly the devil would return, and seek to re-enter into him, except by faith and prayer he should prevent him.  

M. Darr. ad art. 16. pag. 37.  I have told William Somers, that Satan would seek again to repossess him, and it may be that I did also tell him, how the devil did seek to repossess Thomas Darling. And having had talk with some others, I have told them in what similitude the devil departed from some of the parties possessed, as they affirmed: as namely, that he went out of one in the likeness of an Urchin, and out of another in the likeness of an old man, with a crooked back: and I have had likewise communication with them, concerning the seeking of spirits to repossess them.  
What M. Darrel hath not here confessed touching that which is in this place laid to his charge, he denieth to be true. But it is proved very particularly.  

Rob. Cooper. pa. 101  William Somers being brought to my house, M. Darrell told me that for a certainty the devil would seek to re-enter into him: that the devil had so dealt with the boy of Burton, & with seven in Lancashire, & had repossessed Katherine Wright: that the devil for a certainty would appear to Somers in divers likenesses, would assault him with divers promises, and many great things, and not so prevailing with him, would threaten him with many hurts & dangers. These things M. Darrel told me in the hearing of W. Somers, being then present & well. He also at that time did further admonish me very earnestly, that I should not suffer Somers to be alone, and that he might be very carefully looked unto. For (saith he) he will otherwise cast himself into the fire, or seek to break his own neck, & by some means or other kill himself. And I was the rather encouraged to look well unto him, because Master Darrell told me, I should not lose a penny by him. Within three or four days after these speeches, Somers began to make show as though he had been troubled, (as M. Darrell had foretold): he made mention of a black dog that offered him gold and ginger. He said that the Devil would have stopped his breath: Look where a mouse comes: now she goes under me. He affirmed that the Devil offered him a pair of velvet breeches and a Satin doublet: that he saw a rough ugly beast: that the Devil appeared unto him with a crown on his head, and six more coming with him: also like a cocke-chicken, like a Crane, and like a Snake, like an Angel, like a Toad, like a Newte, like a set of viols, and Dancers, and that he stood before him with a fowre-forked cap on his head, etc. In all these new kinds of fits, M. Darrell was seldom absent, and in the beginning of them, he said unto me: See, did I not tell you, that all these things would happen? And these words of his foretelling of me of Summer's trouble, and the other also of the care I should have of him: he uttered unto me in the hearing of diverse. Whereupon some of them said, that I must be careful for him indeed, lest otherwise he might hang himself, as one Richardsons' wife did.  
Master Darrel said in the presence of William Somers, 
Marry Cooper. fol. 1.  that after Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire, were dispossessed, the Devil came unto them at diverse times, seeking to re-enter into them, in diverse likenesses, and that he entered into Katherine Wright, in the likeness of bread which she did eat, and was again repossessed. And that the possessed in Lancashire, the boy of Burton, and Katherine Wright, would oftentimes on the sudden say, take away that Cat, that Rat, that mouse, that dog, and that this boy (meaning Somers) would likewise do so.  
I have heard M. Darrell say in the presence of the boy, 
M. Pair, f. 4.  that Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, and the seven in Lancashire, would many times say on the sudden: take away that cat, that rat, that mouse, that dog, and after such his report of them concluded: so this boy shall do.  

W. Somers, pag 20.  And William Somers himself. After I came to my father's house, I began within a while to look as though I had been afraid: I did now and then start, and make mention of dogs, of cats, of bulls, of lions, and saying, when I started, & when I made mention of such things, that they seemed to come towards me. Afterwards, I began to counterfeit myself to be much more assaulted then before. I cried oftentimes in my fits, pretending that the devil sought again to re-enter into me, in the likeness of a man, a dog, a lion, a snake, a toad, a newt, etc. & that he promised so he might enter into me again, to make me the wisest man that ever was, and likewise to give me gold, and costly apparel, as velvet hose, and Satin doblettes. Also I affirmed, that the Devil threatened me diverse times to hang me, and to break my neck. And all these things I did, according to M. Darrel's instruction: and as he had told both me and others, that the boy of Burton, and the seven. in Lancashire had done before.  
After that William Somers was thus drawn on to the acting of his fits last mentioned, and that M. Darrell (as he sayeth) had renewed his two old grounds of his want of sense, and the devils working in him, and ceased not to procure every thing he did, to be wondered at: he the said Somers devised new tricks under a coverlet, upon this occasion. Lying upon his bed with a coverlet cast over him, he moved by chance he knew not how, some part of his body, when he was supposed to be in a fit, and therefore senseless. Whereupon he the said M. Darrell gave it out, that it was the devil, that made that motion under the coverlet: which was such an instruction to Somers, as he ceased not to feed that error: M. Darrell still most constantly affirming, to every one that came in: how it was the devil that so moved the clothes, showing himself under them, in the forms of Kitlinges or whelps.  
Likewise, (sayeth Somers) lying in my bed, I did sometimes knock and fillip with my fingers and toes, against the bed sides and feet: and this also was ascribed by M. Darrell, as to have been done by the Devil. Hereupon M. Darrell being interrogated, whether he had affirmed that Somers in such his fits was altogether senseless, and that whatsoever he did or spoke, it was not he but the devil that did both, considering that then the devil by his sayings, was not within Somers, but without him, he the said Master Darrell confesseth: that he affirmed him to be senseless in the said fits, and that it was a wicked spirit without him, 
M. Darrel ad art. 18. pag. 41. ad art. 5. pa 50. & ad are, 17 pa. 39.  that made those motions, and that the Devil appeared under the said coverlet in the similitudes of Kitlinges or whelps, he himself having seen, and felt them.  
Upon this his answer, it being objected unto him, that Somers being troubled, and in case whilst Satan was without him, as he had been in the time of his pretended possession, it should thereby seem, that he was as much possessed then as before, 
M, Darrell ad art. 17 pa. 39,  his refuge for answer was this: that those kind of troubles were not like any of the fits he had in the time that he was possessed, but were of an other kind, and different from the same. But it is otherwise deposed.  
Being oft at Summer's fathers house during the time of his pretended dispossession, I have found him doing the same fits, 
Ed. Garland pag. 201.  as wallowing, tumbling, staring, foaming, and the rest which I have seen him before to do, being at Porter's house, during the time of his supposed possession.  

M. Bernard pag. 254.  What time it was said, that Satan was seeking to re-enter into Somers, I found him at his father's house acting his fits, the same, and after the same manner, that I had seen him act them before at Porters, during the time of his pretended possession.  

james Alwood. pag 289.  A few days after that I had heard that Somers was dispossessed of a Devil, I went to see him at his father's house: where I found him doing all the same fits in a sort, and after the same manner altogether, that I had seen him do them before, when he was at his masters house, and said to be possessed: which persuaded me more strongly, that he was nothing but a counterfeit.  

Io. Sherrart, pag. 153  In the time, whilst the devil was said to seek to re-enter into Somers, he had the like fits in every respect (without any difference that I could discern,) that he had before he was dispossessed, saving, for the running in his flesh.  

Ro. Cooper pag. 292.  Summer's fits in the time of his pretended possession, and in the time whilst the devil sought to re-enter, were all one, saving, for his foaming and wallowing, insomuch as I told M. Darrell that I thought he was repossessed: but he answered me, that notwithstanding the fits were alike, yet the devil was not in him, but assailing of him.  
Concerning the vanity of the said motions under the coverlet, and M. Darrel's foolish conceit of the devils appearance in the likeness of Kitlinges or whelps: beside, that which Somers himself before hath confessed, there are sundry depositions, which are set down in a place hereafter more convenient.   

CHAP. V Of M. Darrel's cunning instructing of Somers, by speaking to others in his hearing such things, as he meant he should practise in the detecting of witches: from about the xxi. of November, until about the seven. of December.  
AFter that Somers had played his pranks by starting and railing, and making of motions under a coverlet, for the space of about a fortnight: then M. Darrell brought him on to an other matter concerning the detecting of Witches: affirming in the presence of Somers to diverse, that it was ordinary with those that were lately dispossessed to detect Witches, and that Somers would do the like. These things M. Darrell denieth, saying: 
M. Darrell ad art, 1. pa. 49  After William Somers began to detect some women for Witches, I have affirmed at some time or other, that Satan useth sometimes to discover by the parties possessed such lewd persons, as he had before stirred up, and made instruments for the possessing of them. But I deny that ever I said that Satan useth in seeking to repossess a man to detect any Witches.  
And here M. Darrell was very much plunged: for being demanded whether Satan in seeking to repossess Somers, did not by him detect certain Witches, 
M. Darrel ad art. 7, pag. 58.  he answereth, that for aught he could perceive, Satan did not seek again to repossess Somers, during those days, wherein he detected certain for Witches. This answer seeming strange, he was asked how he knew, that Satan did not for that time seek to repossess him. Whereunto he said, that he did so conjecture, for that William Somers did affirm no such matter: adding that he had no other knowledge at any time, that Satan did seek to repossess either him, or any of the other nine before mentioned: but their own reports, and some other outward troubles. If he had been here further pressed, he would no doubt have started from this answer: or otherwise he must build a months work upon this bare conjecture. But this is too far prosecuted: considering that the point here objected and denied by him, as is before expressed, is sufficiently proved by diverse witnesses. 
Mrs. Grace, ad art. 25. pag. 165   
I heard M. Darrel, affirm, that it was ordinary with those that were lately dispossessed to detect witches.  

M. Aldridge pag. 88  I thought that the boy by extraordinary means had knowledge, that they whom he named were Witches: and I was therein confirmed by M. Darrel's speeches of the detection of witches, by certain that he affirmed had been possessed in Lancashire.  

George Richardson pag. 270.  One Mrs. Wallys and others did talk in the room where Somers lay, of such persons as were suspected to be Witches, before he the said Somers did name them.  

M. Pair, f. 4  I have heard M. Darrell say in the presence of the boy, that the possessed in Lancashire, Katherine Wright, and the boy of Burton, would often use these words: See, See, where the witch standeth thus, and thus attired: see where he cometh, behold him. And after that report of them concluded, so this boy shall do.  

Rob. Cooper, pa. 102.  When M. Darrell understood that Somers had named certain persons to be Witches, he said unto me, that he thought he would come to this. And then he told me, that they who had been in other places so troubled, did ordinarily detect witches. So (saith he) it hath commonly happened in Scotland. And that one M. throckmorton's children, did the like not long since.  
As Somers named any to be witches, M. Darrell procured them to be sent for, for that they might be tried by Somers, whether they were witches, yea, or nay. Wherein M. Darrel is charged with a very notable cozenage. When he had sent for the first witch to be brought to Somers: he told in the mean time to those that were in the house, & in Summer's presence, that it was an ordinary thing, that when witches came nigh to those that were in Summer's case, than they (in such case) would screech and cry out, & be greatly troubled, and so at the Witches departure. And that they would lie quietly snoring, as if they were a sleep, when the witches stood by them: and so he said it would fall out with Somers: which coming to pass accordingly, as Somers hath set down more particularly in the second Chapter of this book. M. Darrell was greatly admired, and the parties so brought unto him, were thereupon reputed for witches, and by his persuasion, that Somers could not be quiet, till they were made fast, they were, as Somers detected them, committed to prison. M. Darrell denieth, that he either foretold any such matter, or that afterwards he ever affirmed the same to be an ordinary thing, 
M. Darrel ad art. 3 pag. 50.  with those that had been in Summer's case. And he yieldeth this reason for his said denial uz. for that (sayeth he) I had never seen any so troubled before, (at the coming and going of Witches) but in mine experience: and namely, in Katherine Wright, she was tormented and troubled only, during the time, that the Witch was present by her, and remained quiet both at her coming and departure. And the like I have heard of the seven in Lancashire. By which his deposition, it seemeth very improbable, that the points wherewith he is here charged should be true. For he had never seen any troubled as Somers was, and his experience is to the contrary. But the Fox was near driven when he took this muce, and he ferreted out of it by very pregnant depositions.  

Ro. Coorper pa. 103  M. Darrell having sent for some, who were named by Somers to be Witches, he did affirm in the hearing of this examinat & diverse others then present, that when the said Witches were coming, the boy would be greatly afflicted till they came before him, and then he would lie quietly till they were gone, and afterwards at their going away, would be greatly molested again. And accordingly all things happened, as M. Darrell did foretell. At their coming he was vehemently tormented (as it seemed) when they came to the bed's side to him, he would lie as quietly as though he had been asleep, and would sometimes snore: but when they were going away again, than he seemed to be tormented as before.  
M. Darrell affirmed in the presence of Somers, and diverse others, 
Edm. Garland p: 176.  that it was an ordinary thing, when Witches came nigh unto one in Summer's case: that then such the party possessed would screech and cry out: but when they stood close by him, that then he would lie quietly, snoring as if he were a sleep: and at their departure away, screech and cry out again: & afterwards he saw Somers so do in all respects, when diverse suspected to be Witches were brought unto them.  

Mrs. Grace, pa. 156  I have heard M. Darrell upon occasion of speech say, that when Witches stood by one possessed, the party possessed should be quiet: but at the coming in and going out of the Witches, the said possesssed party should be much disquieted.  

Mrs. Grey pa, 166  I have heard M. Darrell say, that it was ordinary with those that were in Summer's case, when the Witches have been brought unto them, to be greatly vexed at their coming, & at their departure, and to lie very quietly whilst the same Witches stood by them.  

M. halam. fol. 8  Somers discovered his witches after this manner. Being in a fit, he would amongst other speeches say, fetch me such a woman. Now or ever she came to him, he would seem to be strangely vexed, and more strangely when she approached near unto him. But when she was with him, he was in quiet as if he were a sleep: but if she turned her back, then was he troubled as before. And this was their custom (that were his friends about him) so soon as they had tried any woman detected, strait way she was sent to prison, and so they served six or seven. This trial was sufficient: Mother boot (and so of the rest) is a witch, and therefore with the rest must go to prison.  
As Somers did name any for witches, 
M. Aldridge pag. 88  M. Darrel procured them to be fetched out of their houses.  
Summer's naming some for witches, 
Rob. Cooper, pa. 102.  M. Darrel procured them to be sent for, and bringing them to the boy, did afterwards go himself to see them put in prison: saying, that the boy could not be in quiet till they were laid fast. And this course M. Darrell held upon the boy's words: so as in two days he procured to be imprisoned six to seven, under this pretence, that they were witches. Afterwards also upon the like occasion, he caused to be apprehended, and examined, on Millicent Horsley and her sister.  
Furthermore M. Darrel was charged, to have grown to such vanity at that time, through the admiration had of him, especially by his followers, and some other credulous persons, by reason of the said course which he and Somers held for the detecting of witches: as that he affirmed, he doubted not by Somers means to detect all the witches in England. 
M. Darrell ad art. 13. pag. 52.  M. Darrell confesseth part hereof in these words. I finding William Somers to have discovered thirteen witches at Nottingham, and afterwards: said in private to some friends of mine, that I thought Somers would be able to discover any witch, if he came where they were, or they came where he was: But he denieth the rest, which is deposed as followeth.  

M. halam. fol. 8  I heard M. Darrell say, that he doubted not by this means (vz by Somers detecting of witches) to discover all the witches in England.  
Besides, the folly of that, which M. Darrel himself doth here confess, might easily by himself have been discerned; but that through the conceit had of him, he grew to be very impudent. For those whom Somers had named for witches, no man could justly blame.  

Rob. Cooper. pa. 102  M. Darrell (saith Robert Cooper) desired the Mayor of Nottingham, to make inquiry through the town, if any person could charge any of the pretended witches. The Mayor did so accordingly: and nothing being laid to divers of their charges, they were all set at liberty upon bonds, saving two. But this devise of Darrel's concerning the detecting of witches, is almost laid asleep. Of all the parts of the tragical Comedy acted between him and Somers, there was no one Scene in it, wherein M. Darrell did with more courage & boldness act his part, then in this of the discovery of witches. He sendeth for them, procureth them to be examined, carrieth them before justices of peace, goeth to see them imprisoned, maketh no doubt but that they are witches, and so bestirreth himself therein, as many thereby were greatly seduced, 
The written treatise.  and had him in wonderful estimation. One of his friends maketh this discovery of witches, to be one of the worthy fruits of that admirable work of dispossessing of Somers: telling us, that witches are the lords chiefest enemies: that God would not have them suffered to live, and that the hiding & saving of these witches is justly thought to have been one of the first and principal causes of slandering this work of Somers dispossessing.  
But consider how now the tide is turned. The author of the brief Narration, making a catalogue of all the worthy acts, that fell out betwixt M. Darrell and Somers, skippeth over the detection of witches, being the fruits of a fortnight's work. M. Darrell himself in his Apology in this matter is altogether silent, being otherwise very plentiful in the rest. And this which followeth, is supposed to be the cause of such a change.  
M. Ireton, (being a man of very good parts, and yet somewhat overcarried in this cause, being unacquainted with the proceed in it, & suspecting no evil) is one of the men, of whom M. Darrell and his friends have greatly bragged. And it is true, that his credit wrought some inconvenience, through his faculty in believing those things which were told him: albeit his speeches still did rely upon this supposition, that if those things which he heard were true, then thus, and thus. Besides some indiscreet opposition in points of learning, did make him to say something, whereof more hold was taken, then peradventure he meant. 
M. Ireton ad ar. 3. pa.  This M. Ireton having been examined, and particularly concerning the point in hand of detecting of witches, saith thus: I think that Somers did counterfeit those fits, wherein he took upon him to disclose witches, and am persuaded, that he never had any skill by satans means, or otherwise so to do.  
By this deposition, that deceit of Darrel's is so dashed, as it is supposed we shall have no more of it: and the rather because it may be thought he was very weary of it, being divers ways greatly plunged in it.  
Somers telleth to this purpose one pretty tale. I cannot omit (saith he) how Master Darrell and I had like to have been foiled in this matter. Widow Boot suspected for a witch, 
Summer's pag. 23.  being to be brought unto me, and I having notice thereof before, did show myself to be greatly troubled, both at her coming in, and at her going away, as my manner was. But upon a cunning trick used by some that were there present, I was greatly deceived. For after the departure of the said widow, she was brought and carried back again into the chamber, and out, twice or thrice secretly under one of their cloaks, that had laid that plot as I afterwards perceived: so that neither Master Darrell nor I having understanding thereof, nor any suspicion of such kind of dealing, I could not put in practise my former tricks, but was quiet at every such her going in and coming out. Whereupon they that used this devise, did presently publish the same, and thereby affirmed, that out of all question I was but a dissembler.   

CHAP. VI Of M. Darrel's course, from about the seventh of December, until the 14. of januarie, whilst Somers refused to dissemble any longer.  
BY this time Somers began to be weary of counterfeiting, having spent a month from the time of his pretended dispossession, in starting & in playing his gamboiles under a coverlet, and in detecting of witches. And afterwards for aught that M. Darrell could do, he altogether refused to continue his dissembling course any longer: and so made no show of any of his pranks for the space of five weeks. Howbeit, in the mean time M. Darrel for his part was not idle. For a general opinion being then conceived, that Somers had counterfeited in all his former proceed, partly in respect of some more apparent arguments thereof, in his tricks under the coverlet, and in his pretended detecting of witches, M. Darrel being greatly nettled therewith, flew to the pulpit, and there rang out divers peals with great bitterness against that conceit. And for as much as the opinion of Summer's former dissimulation, was the rather confirmed by his continuing well, and refraining from such follies: he the said M. Darrell bent his chief force to persuade his auditory, that Satan would lurk sometimes about one (out of whom he had been cast) suffering the party to be well for a good space, but that he was verily persuaded, that Satan would not give him over, until in the end he had repossessed him. Also he took upon him to answer some such treatises, as had been set forth of particular persons, concerning their dissembling in such cases. With this argument of devils he so troubled his auditory, that they grew very weary of it, and some blamed him for it to his face. These particulars M. Darrell doth after a sort confess some to be true. But the depositions are full enough.  
I preached at Nottingham about that time six or seven sermons, 
M. Darrel ad art. 2 etc. pag. 35.  upon the 43.44.45. verses of the 12. of Matthew (concerning satans return to re-enter) and in one of them I said: that if any who were strangers did doubt whether Somers was a counterfeit or no, I would be glad to satisfy them. But for them of Nottingham (I said) that I scorned to confute them. which words being laid to his charge at that time of his examination, he did thus expound himself: I scorned to confute them: that is, let me (meaning myself) be had in scorn or disdain, if I do confute so palpable an error, In an other of my sermons, at such times as it was commonly given, out that Somers was a counterfeit: I did persuade my auditory to the contrary the best I could: affirming confidently, that he was no counterfeit. And both in my sermons, and at other times I have affirmed, that the devil would seek to repossess Somers. What he hath not here confessed of the premises, he saith is untrue. But consider of the proofs.  

Summer's pag. 19  It seemed that divers, who affirmed that I was a dissembler, were induced so to think, because they had heard of some, who having done such things as I did, afterwards confessed upon examination, that they had altogether dissembled. Some of them I heard myself make mention of a book that was set out of a certain maid in London, that had deceived many by avoiding at her mouth pings and needles, and by doing of other very strange things. Of this book M. Darrell made mention in one of his sermons, and did greatly blame those, that because some had dissembled, did therefore affirm, that I was but a dissembler. And in this point he was so earnest, that after many words, for the justifying of me and my doings, he said, that they should be condemned, who having seen the great works of God in me, did notwithstanding give it out, that I was but a dissembler. And in most of his sermons he did enter into divers discourses of the devils seeking to re-enter into those, out of whom he had been cast: and of bringing with him seven other wicked spirits worse than himself.  

M, Aldridg. fol. 89.  In five or six of his sermons concerning the spirits return, M. Darrell did greatly reprove those, that would not believe that Somers had been possessed: but gave it out that he had dissembled: and likewise against those, who did maintain that he the said Somers was not dispossessed. He said also, that for a certtaintie Satan would repossess Somers, except he did mightily withstand him. He dwelled so long upon that text, Matthew 12. concerning the spirits return, that this examinate was much moved with it, and told him he did not well therein: affirming, that the people were cloyed with his often repeating of one thing, and much offended, in that as they said, they could hear of nothing in his sermons, but of the Devil. But I was especially moved with his often repeating of these words: even so shall it be with this wicked generation, applying them still to the people of Nottingham, where I have been a preacher these twenty years: the people there being but as other such congregations are, & as willing to hear the word of God preached, as any other in mine opinion.  
This M. Aldridge was then a great companion of M. Darrel's, but not of his cozenage. Howbeit, when he thought his freehold touched, he was moved with it. But what will he say when he readeth the brief Narration, wherein the Author writeth thus. Upon Summer's dispossession M. Darrell was retained preacher in Nottingham, that populous town, having had no settled preacher there before this time, since the beginning of her majesties reign. Either M. Aldridge or this companion are in danger of an hard imputation: except it may be thus helped: M. Aldridge is Vicar of Saint Maries in Nottingham: whereas this fellow peradventure accounteth neither Parsons, nor vicars, nor any that bear such popish names, for preachers: the Doctor to be chosen by the parish, as M. Darrell was, is the preacher (forsooth) that must bear the bell.   

CHAP. VII. How Somers about the xiv. of januarie fell again to the acting of certain fits, wherein he continued at times, till about the xxiv. of February, and how M. Darrell pretended that he was repossessed.  
AFter that M. Darrell had spent about a month or five weeks in preaching, & reviling of those that held Somers for a counterfeit, & in dealing privately with him, (as he saith) to undertake again his former dissembled course: he the said Somers began to stagger, not knowing what was best for him to do. For (saith he) by M. Darrel's doctrine I well perceived, that many did expect the devils assailing me again, and so looked for my further trouble: whereby, together M. Darrel's former perswasitions, I was the rather induced to bethink me of my former dissimulation, as perceiving the same to tend to the justifying of all my other actions: With this inducement some others also did concur. Whereas my father in law (he saith) had received at two collections, made by M. Darrel's means, the sum of twenty nobles, or thereabouts, in respect of his trouble and charge, when I was in my former pretended fits: and likewise of such as came to see me at those times, divers gifts in money: For as much as now by my desisting so long from my former practices, I felt some want of my former relief, & perceived that my father grew very weary of me, using my mother very hardly, & threatening to drive both me & her, & my sisters out of his doors, I thought with myself, that it would be best for me to enter again into my accustomed dissimulation: that so my father receiving more relief, I & my mother might be better used, and furthermore, in respect of M. Darrel's former persuasions, that if I would so do, I should never want.  
Now whilst I was thus debating with myself, what I should do: there happened a very strange matter, which made me to resolve with myself, to fall again to my old tricks. One Sterland of Swenton near Nottingham, having been one day in the market at Nottingham, upon his coming home fell sick of a bastard pleurisy, as the physicians reported. Of this sickness he died, but before in his raving he said (as his wife and others affirmed) that I had trodden upon his heel, when he was last at the said market, and that I had certainly bewitched him. Hereupon his said wife charging me with felony, before the Mayor of Nottingham, I was committed to prison, where I remained about an hour or two, until I was bailed by my father in law, and by my uncle, one Randolph Milner. When I was in prison, than not knowing what issue the said false accusation might have, and in the respects before specified, I thought it the safest way for myself that I could take, to return to my old by as again of dissimulation. Whereupon, whilst I was in prison, I affirmed that the devil came unto me in the likeness of a mouse. And so about the fourteenth of januarie, I began to pretend, as though I had been again vexed, being come home (after I was dismissed) to my father in laws house.  
Upon this William Somers relapse before mentioned, M. Darrell was charged before her maisties' said Commissioners, that although it be accounted (amongst those who take upon them the chiefest skill in casting out devils) to be a matter of especial difficulty to discern when one is repossessed: yet he upon the sight of Somers in his first new fit, did confidently affirm, and afterwards preach, that for a certainty he was repossessed, and that the former spirit had brought seven more with him worse than himself: blaming those with great bitterness, who had before affirmed, that the boy was a couterfeyt.  

M. Darrel ad art. 39 pag 20, & ad art, 3 & 5. pa. 34.  M. Darrell hereof confesseth thus much. I have said at diverse times that Somers was again repossessed, and that the same spirit that was cast out of him before, was returned again into him, & had brought seven more with him worse than himself. And so likewise I have preached.  

W. Somers pag. 25.  When these things thus fell out, (sayeth Somers) his falling again to his new fits, M. Darrell did grow to be more and more in credit, it being commonly believed, that I was indeed repossessed, as he in his sermons had foretold, that it was like to come to pass: which opinion M. Darrell did nourish as much as he could, and was very bitter upon every occasion against those, who had said before that I was but a dissembler.  
Whilst Somers was imprisoned, he said that a mouse began to follow him: 
M Aldridge pa. 91  and coming home to his father in laws house, he cast himself upon a truckle bed, and so fell presently into a fit. Upon the sight whereof M. Darrell told me, that for a certainty he was repossessed. And afterwards also, so affirmed in some of his sermons in S. Mary's publicly, blaming greatly, and also condemning those in Nottingham, who had before affirmed, that Somers was a counterfeit. And this he did with very great earnestness and vehemency.  
In this place it is to observed: how some of M. Darrel's chief friends have left him after a sort in two of the chiefest points of this whole action. One of them having given his opinion, that Somers did not dissemble those fits which he acted before the Commissioners, deputed from the L. Archbishop of York: but that it was the Devil in him, that played those pranks in his body, could (it seemeth) be content to acknowledge, that he was possessed: but at the time of his examination, he wouls not affirm, that he the said Somers had been at any time dispossessed, although (sayeth he) I have heard by depositions and other reports, 
I. B. pa. 137.  that might induce me probably to think that he was dispossessed. The other being a very rash and headstrong youngman, one M. Brinsley a Minister: 
I. Brinsley pa. 129,  he at the time of his examination, doubteth as much of Summer's repossession, as the former did of his dispossession. I am fully persuaded (sayeth he) that William Somers was possessed with an evil spirit, and that he was dispossessed: but concerning his repossession, I am not therein so fully persuaded: although I have many reasons to induce me so to think.  
Upon M. Darrel's report and preaching that W. Somers was repossessed, there was then greater resort unto him then before, M. Darrell still persuading every one that came (as Somers sayeth) that he the said Somers was repossessed: and that he remained in all his fits utterly senseless.  
It might greatly be marveled (by such as have not experience, how easy a matter it is, with fair pretence to seduce the simpler sort): what estimation and credit M. Darrell got by this new forgery of Summer's pretended repossession. Howbeit many of the wiser sort, that were not possessed with the giddy humour of novelties, (covered forsooth with zeal and sighings), did laugh this to scorn, as they did the rest: & the rather, because the boy's fits after his pretended repossession, when he was supposed to have eight devils in him, were not so grievous or strange in show, as when he had but one: which argued sufficiently M. Darrel's untruth, in saying he was repossessed. That they were not then so grievous and strange, M. Darrell denieth it: but it is deposed.  
The most of those things that Somers did at Garlands, 
M Aldridge pag. 242.  (uz. after his supposed repossession), were mere fooleries  

M. Bernard. fo. 13  Somers latter fits (having as he thought gained sufficient credit in his former), were more lose and not so cunningly handled as the first were.  

Ed. Garland pa. 197.  The fits which Somers had at my house, were not so strange as those were which he had at Porter's house, but were more suspicious and likely to be dissembled, than other were, either at Porter's house, or at Cooper's house, after his dispossession.  

R. Cooper pa. 292  Summer's fits in the time of his repossession were less grievous than the other in every respect. And I think if M. Darrell had not put the boy in mind of his foaming and gnashing in the said time of his repossession, he would not have showed those signs.  
How Somers grew weary of this his said relapse, after he continued therein about six weeks, and of his words to john Cooper, that he should be quiet if he might get out of M. Darrel's fingers, and be at S. john's: he himself in the former Chapter hath made mention. So as now we are come to the xxiiii. day of February, mentioned in the beginning of the third Chapter: because things being made so clear, that M. Darrell was a mere dissembler, and a packer and contriver in all the premises: there was no great care taken to look into his practices: during the time of the said six weeks, whilst he was pretended to be repossessed.  
The end of the Second Book.    

The third Book.  
This Book containeth William Somers public confession, that aswell his pretended possession, as his dispossession & repossession & all he had done or, pretended, touching the same, was counterfeited and dissembled, together with the opposition and devices of M. Darrel and his friends, to discredit & impeach the same, from the time that he first came to S. john's, by the Mayor of nottingham's direction, until his departure thence. uz. from about the xxiiii. of February, until Assizes at Nottingham, that Lent.  

CHAP. I. How Somers confessed his dissimulation at S. john's in Nottingham, as soon as he was out of M. Darrel's disposition.  
COncerning the occasion of William Somers removing from his father in laws house, to S. john's in Nottingham, (a place where the poor are set to work,) john Cooper the keeper there, deposeth thus. Being oftentimes with William Somers, in his fits, and diligently beholding the course of his carriage in them: I grew very suspicious that he did but dissemble, and thereupon was well content, to have the tuition of him, to make trial of the matter: the rather, for that the boy's keepers & friends that were about him, were willing to please him in all his humours. This Cooper, after he had signified to some former presumptions. For cats coming to him, he never saw any such thing in his life, nor any other vain supposed apparition. For showing the several manner of offences: he heard M. Darrell and others speak of them, and of his own fantasy, he devised to show them by demonstration. Falling into the fire, he did voluntarily, being assured, that always some body was near him to catch him up again, before he could receive any hurt.  

Nich. Shepard, pa. 247.  After that William Somers had made this confession, before the Aldermen the same night (saith Nicholas Shepherd) he & I being to lie together: at our going to bed, he showed unto me at my request some of his tricks, in the presence of john Cooper, uz. the knocking with his toes, his motions under a coverlet, the writhing of his mouth, and how he thrust his tongue backwards into his throat, with some others. About three or four days after, 
Frances Wyrom. Henry Scot Tho. Donnycliffe. Rob Spencer. john Cooper.  Nicholas Shepheard, acquainting one Frances Wyron with Summer's dissembled course: and he the said France's being thereupon very desirous to see his tricks, the time was appointed. Somers prepared himself: Four or five persons meet together: a coverlet was laid upon the ground for the purpose, and so the boy goeth to his work.  

Nich. Shepard. 228.  And first (saith Shepherd) he fell down as though he had been in a swoon: then having lain so a little while, he wallowed and tumbled, he foamed at the mouth, he gnashed with his teeth, he thrust his tongue backwards towards his throat, and gaping, those that were present looked into his mouth. These tricks thus performed, he rose up, but still pretending to be in his fit, he leapt and danced, as he did the first night that. M. Darrell came to him, and showed the same gestures, which he then also had used, and were interpreted to signify the sins of Nottingham. Then the company desired him to show his tricks under the coverlet, and he having laid himself down upon the coverlet that lay on the floor, I cast a cloak upon him, under the which he did show them: they that were present catching at the said thing that moved under the said cloak, being his hand, and he divers ways preventing them: sometimes by clapping his hand under his side, and some times under his ham. Lastly, we moved him to fall into the fire: whereunto he would in no sort yield: but after a while (as we were talking together) he came unto me & told me in mine ear, that if I would stand by the chimney, & be ready to catch him, he would on the sudden fall into fire. Accordingly, (I not acquainting the rest then present with our purpose) stood by the fire: and Somers standing by me, he did (suddenly running a little back) fall upon his buttocks into the fire, and presently I plucked him up. With this his sudden fall into the fire, those that were present, were greatly amazed: whereat the boy laughed, and then they demanding of him, why he would not cast himself into the fire, when they willed him: he answered, that if he had so done, it would not have seemed strange unto them: whereas falling into it upon the sudden, they saw it did amaze them. And in deed I perceived them to be greatly affrighted therewith, as they then confessed, and do yet acknowledge. At that time also they asked him, how he became so heavy as it was reported, and he willed them to come and try him. The manner whereof was thus: He standing upon the floor, did shrink himself downwards, and then, first M. Scot, & afterwards Francis Wyrom, coming to lift him, and taking hold upon the upper part of his body, the boy clapped himself close unto them, and seemed to be so strong and heavy, as they could not lift him. But Donnycliffe going unto him, and by my direction taking him below his girdlestead, he did lift him up very easily. And then the rest perceiving their own error, did also lift him up at their pleasure, and went away fully persuaded, that (as the boy himself had confessed) he had in deed dissembled in all the course by him formerly held.  
All which hitherto is deposed by Nicholas Shepherd, is likewise affirmed from point to point, in effect by the depositions of four of them: Henry Scot, Frances Wyron, Thomas Donnicliffe, and john Cooper.   

CHAP. II. How M. Darrel dealt with Somers, for the revocation of his said confession, that he had dissembled.  
Whilst thus some were desirous to see the boy do his feats, and to be satisfied, concerning the truth of his confession, & the manner of his tricks, acted before the said Aldermen of Nottingham: so on the other side, M. Darrell and his partakers were wonderfully perplexed, how the matter might (as it seemeth) be bolstered out and salved: wherein, how Master Darrel troubled himself, it is not to be doubted. For although he never had suspected, that Somers would have detected the secret plots betwixt them: yet because he had taken so much upon him, and in respect of his pretended experience, had been so resolute in every thing, it went to his heart: as well perceiving, that thereby his credit in casting out of devils would be altogether dashed. He therefore to encounter this detection, having heard what Somers had confessed and done before the said Aldermen, was charged before her majesties said Commissioners, to have gone unto him at Saint john's, and to have dealt with him very earnestly, for the revoking of his said confession: & for the justifying of his former proceed, in sticking unto it, that he was no counterfeit. This M. Darrell doth in effect confess, in these words. Once I went to William Somers, to S. john's, after that I understood that he had confessed, how in all his former dealings he had dissembled, and laboured to make him revoke his said confession, that he had dissembled, and to affirm the contrary.  
Furthermore, M. Darrell being charged, 
M. Darrel ad art 42. pa 21  that he was so moved with William Somers at S. john's, when he affirmed constantly to his face, that all he had done before was dissembled: as that he pronounced him to be in a desperate case, and in the state of damnation: 
M. Darrell ad, art. 10. pag. 51.  answered thus: I did at that time use divers sharp words unto Somers, upon the occasion mentioned, but I did not use the words of damnation, or desperation, or any words to that effect. But it is deposed.  
Somers, having affirmed to M. Darrell at S. john's, 
N. Sheph. fol. 2.  that he had dissembled, he the said M. Darrell told him, that he was now in worse case than ever he was. For now he was possessed with legions of Devils, and that if he continued thus, he was in state of damnation, and could not be saved.  
Master Darrell, upon Summer's saying unto him, 
joh. Cooper. fol. 21.  that he dissembled, grew impatient, and threatened him, that he was in state of damnation.  
M. Darrell, upon the boy's affirmation of his dissembling, 
M. Shute. fol. 19  said, thou art a lying boy, and wert possessed, dispossessed, and art now repossessed with many devils: and art in a desperate case. Which I thinking to be uncharitably spoken, persuaded M. Darrell to forbear such speeches, and to comfort the boy by some good means.  
Again, M. Darrell was charged by her majesties said Commissioners, to have sought so many ways to have withdrawn Somers from his said confession, & have stuck unto it, that he was possessed; as the poor boy was driven to write unto him, entreating him to let him alone, and to intermeddle no more in that matter, for his own credit: and that notwithstanding he still persisted, urging him as before. 
Som. pag. 363.  The tenor of the letter was thus. M. Darrell, my hearty commendations unto you: This is to desire you, that you would let me be at quiet. For whereas you said that I was possessed, I was not: and for those tricks that I did before you came, was through folks speeches that came to me. And those which I did since, was through you speeches & others. For as you said, I could not hear, I did hear all things, that were spoken, and knew all things that were done in the house, and all things that I did were counterfeit: and I pray you to let it pass: for the more you meddle in it, the more discredit it will be for you: and I pray God and you, 
M. Darrell ad art, 43, pag. 21.  and all the world, to forgive me. M. Darrell hereunto answering, saith: I confess that Somers did write unto me, to the effect here mentioned: and yet such his letters notwithstanding, I did afterwards persuade him, that he should not say that he had dissembled his former fits, but confess the truth: meaning thereby, that he should confess that he was possessed.  
When M. Darrell perceived that Somers, by no private means that he could use, would be drawn to follow his humour any longer, but did constantly persever in the affirmation of his aforesaid confession: he the said M. Darrel was charged, that then he sought to work for himself in the pulpit, and that so grossly & ignorantly, (but yet very maliciously) and that he presumed to preach: that Somers was not only repossessed in body as before, but now also possessed in soul, which was worse. And his answer hereunto is thus. I confess, that I did both preach in one of my sermons, and afterwards affirmed so much to divers, 
M. Darrell ad art. 6. pag. 34.  that Somers was not only repossessed in body as before, but also possessed in soul, which was worse. And the reason that moved me to say, that Somers was possessed in soul, was this: uz. Because in saying he had in the whole course of his former fits dissembled, he lied therein grievously against his own conscience, to the dishonour of God, & hurt of his Church. Consider the gentle zeal of benefiting the Church, by his faculty and skill in casting out Devils. But wretched is his own case, if lying should be so dangerous, who hath so oft by the testimony of so many witnesses, forgotten his oath in this cause.   

CHAP. III. How M. Darrell devised two or three shifts, to have avoided Somers confession, that he had dissembled.  
WE have found by the premises in the former Chapter M. Darrelles care to have brought Somers whilst he was at S. john's from his foresaid confession, by persuasion and preaching. Now there cometh to be considered, how, when he could not prevail thereby, he devised two or three sleights, as well as he could, to cover so bad a matter.  
Touching the first, 
W. Somers pag. 30.  whereof William Somers deposeth thus; When my confession before the said Aldermen was blown abroad, M. Darrell and such as favoured him, gave it out, that it was not I, that had made that confession, but the Devil, and that my said confession was a sure argument, that I was again repossessed. Part hereof M. Darrell himself confesseth: & for the rest, an other witness doth concur in effect with Somers.  
Somers, being at S. john's, & telling me and others present, 
M. Darrel ad art. 40. pag. 21.  that in the former course of his pretended fits, he had dissembled. I answered, that he lied in so saying: and have said at some times, that the said speeches of Somers were a confirmation, that he was again repossessed. M. Darrell asked William Somers, 
M. Shute. pag. 250.  being at Saint john's, whether he had said, that he had dissembled. To whom Somers answered, what I have said, I have said. I have said, that I have counterfeited, and so do I say now, the Lord forgive me for it: & I protest before God, & before jejus Christ, that I have in this action greatly dissembled with God and the world. Sayest thou so (quoth Darrell?) But how shall I know that this is thou William Somers, which now speakest unto me: unto whom I said, that I thought that to be a vain & frivolous question: for that Somers used his tongue & throat with other parts of his mouth, in as orderly & as natural an habit at that instant, as any of us all that were present could do: & M. Darrell, could yield no other reason to the contrary, but that William Somers might as well ask of him, whether it were M. Darrell that moved the question.  
At the same time M. Darrell, proceeding with the boy asked him some other questions: as if he had dissembled then, whether he could act those fits again. The boy said he could: let us see quoth Darrell. The boy did divers of them: whereupon M. Darrell, growing to be in a great chafe, breathed out his second oracle: saying, that it was no marvel though he could do them, considering that he had more Devils in him then before. Hereof M. Darrell hath not been examined, because it was one of the interrogatories whereunto he refused to answer. For true it is, that after that he had been examined divers times about this matter, he found himself so perplexed, as that he refused to be any further examined: saying, that his conscience was troubled, in that he had answered so much already. Wherein he is not greatly to be blamed. For although a liar must have a good memory, yet by many cross questions, he may be taken short, as it hath happened to him in many particulars. But to follow the purpose, 
M. Shute ibid.,  thus M. Shute hath deposed. M. Darrell proceeded with Somers into further questions. How couldst thou foam so vehemently? send forth such loud & fearful cries? draw & extort thy mouth to thy ears? frame thine eyes so wide & broad? & so ghastly to behold? etc. To whom Somers answered: I did nothing at the time and day of dispossession, but I can perform it, as absolutely now. Then let us see sayeeh M. Darrell. Whereupon Somers foamed immediately, after he had a little prepared himself thereunto, that the foam ran down on both the sides of his month, and about his chin. After that, he sounded forth very loud and fearful cries, etc. Herewith (as also in respect of some other speeches,) M. Darrell being offended, was ready to departed the house: and being desired to stay, and see the boy perform some other actions, he answered, that he would not stay any longer. For (quoth he) I am persuaded, that he can do the like again, in that he doth them by the same power, whereby he did them before: but I will stand to it till death, that he was possessed, and was dispossessed, and is now repossessed, with many devils. And so for that time in great impatiency departed.  
When M. Darrell perceived, that Somers acting of the like fits voluntarily, that he had done dissemblingly, it began to be held more commonly, that the boy was a counterfeit: then thirdly, he the said Darrell, and his adherentes, turned their tale, and gave it out; that his voluntary fits were but toys, and nothing like those that he had when he was possessed. But the contrary is deposed.  
The fits which William Somers did act, 
M. Shute. pa. 251.  before M. Darrell at S. john's voluntarily, did very aptly resemble those that he had, upon the day of his supposed dispossession.  
In the presence of M. Scot, and others, William Somers, 
Io Couper▪ pa. 295.  did voluntarily act his fits in like sort, and as strangely to the sight of them, that had seen him do them before, but especially, to one that was a stranger, they seemed to be done very extraordinarily, as when it was said, that he was possessed. Howbeit, upon the acting of them, (though indeed they differed nothing from the former) yet I said to the boy, that they were not so strange, to see what the boy would say unto me. To whom the said boy answered, that now I knew them to be done voluntarily, they might seem not so strange: but if I had not known them to have been counterfeited, they would then have seemed as strange as before.  

France, Wyron pa. 276.  I having been present at Porter's house, and at many of W. Summer's fits, in the time of his pretended possession: these fits, (meaning the voluntary fits, which Somers had acted before him, & 4. or 5. more at S. john's) were as strange for the manner of them, as those that I had seen him do in the time of his supposed possession, and the very same for the kinds and qualities, and continuance of them, as those were in every respect. And besides the casting of himself into the fire, being sudden & unlooked for of me (the boy having a little afore denied earnestly to act that fit by name) did affright and scar me much, until shepherd told me, that it was done upon compact between Somers and him. With this deposition of Frances Wyron, 
Tho. Donnycliffe pa, 276,  agreeth the deposition of Thomas Donnycliffe, Henry Scot, and Nicholas Shepherd.   

CHAP. FOUR How M. Darrell and his friends to discredit Summer's confession, did falsely report, that he was induced thereunto by promises, threatenings, and enchantments.  
THe three sleights mentioned in the former Chapter, albeit they were of some force to content those, who were desirous to take any thing for payment, yet were they not thought sufficient, without some further strengthening: whereupon (as it seemeth) sundry factions and slanderous devices, were cast abroad by M. Darrel and his friends, to discredit the boy, and all that the he had confessed, by surmising, and thereupon constantly affirming, that Somers had been induced there to speak against the truth, by indirect and unlawful means.  
Summer's being at S. john's, there was a rumour cast about the town one evening, that the Devil had carried him thence, and in his departure with him, had dashed out his brains against a wall. This was of likelihood a simple devise of M. Darrel's grossest friends: but yet such as it was, it wrought for the time. And thereof there are these depositions.  
One evening, whilst Somers was at S. john's, 
Nich. Shep pag. 211.  two Shoemakers, uz. one Randall Trivette, and one Phillippes, having heard (as they said) that the Devil carrying him away, had dashed out his brains against a post, came running in great haste to know if it were true.  
I hearing of john Bate of a report, that the Devil had taken away William Somers, and dashed his brains against a post, 
Randall Trivet. pa. 311.  went down to S. john's, to see whether it were so or no.  
Amongst many ways whereby men are corrupted, & induced to speak falsely, allurements by fair promises, have not the least force: which being very, well known to M. Darrell and his good friends, they thought it might carry some good probabilities, and serve for a shift, to give it out: that Somers was so wrought and drawn on to affirm, that he had dissembled. But how untruly they have charged him herein, the depositions following will declare.  
William Somers deposeth, that he was not induced by any promises so to confess, but that he did it willingly, 
Summer's pa. 365.  as being weary of his former dissimulation, and thinking (sayeth he) that I could not use these wicked vices, that I used before, but it would be spied, God put it into my mind to reveal the truth. Only he addeth this, saving, that when the Alderman, and M. Gregory came first to examine him, he desiring that he might be pardoned for his former follies, and then affirming that he would reveal all unto them: they, the said Aldermen and M. Gregory, promised to be a means for him to the town in that behalf. The men, who were chief suspected to have dealt with Somers (as here it is supposed) were john Cooper, and Nicholas Shepherd,: whom M. Darrell procured to be examined at Nottingham, by his own Commissioners, touching that point: and thereunto they have sworn as followeth.  

N. Shephea. fol. 17.  I never knew of any promises made to the boy, to confess that he had counterfeited: but I remember that M. jackson promised, that if he would declare the truth, he would be good unto him, and help him to a service in London: And john Cooper thus: 
Io. Cooper. 19  I do not know any that persuaded Somers to confess himself to be dissembler.  

pag. 343.  Richard Hunt, Anchor jackson, and William Freeman, Aldermen of Nottingham, & William Gregory Town-cleark: do affirm, that repairing to William Somers, at S. john's, he made this suit unto them, uz. that they would be a means to procure the towns favour towards him, so that he might not be punished for any of his follies past, and that he might be sent to London, out of that Country, to avoid disgrace: and then he said he would disclose the secrets of his supposed possession. Whereupon they promising him, that if they found him to deal truly, they would be a means for him, as he desired, he showed them all his tricks, together with the several ways, how he did act them: as it is before set down in the first Chapter.  
Again, that which said of the force of promises, what they are able to work, may also be verified of threatenings: and therefore considering that (as they say,) every thing eeketh. M. Darrell and his adherentes have laboured to impeach the aforesaid confession of Somers, 
M. Darrel's Apolo.  by giving it out, that he was moved thereunto by terror, and threatenings. But upon what slender grounds they have so done: it will partly appear by the deposition of those, whom M. Darrell himself procured to be examined at Nottingham: and by the Testimonies also of others.  
john Couper sayeth, that Somers, 
Io. Couper fol 16. & 17  (after his coming to S. john's) did pretend himself, thrice within a day or two to have certain fits. Whereupon the said Couper, putting at one time sundry wives out of the house, (at whose coming he the said Somers, did fall into one of the said fits,) and then giving him some words of correction; uz. threatening to whip him, he the said Somers presently rose up.  
Also Nicholas Shepherd confesseth, that in one of the boy's fits at S. john's, he threatened to have a pair of pincers to pinch him by the toes, if he used those tricks: and in an other place also (as it is before specified,) he sayeth, that upon his said threatening words, Somers being acting certain tricks, he the said Somers gave them over, and never used them afterwards, whilst he was at S. john's. By neither of these depositions it can be collected, that they threatened the boy, to say he had dissembled, or that thereby he was induced so to affirm. But by M. Darrel's own rule, in that Summer's being in a fit, heard their said threatening speeches, and rising up, had no more fits, 
M. Hurt. M. jackson. M, Freeman. M. Gregory pa. 345.  whilst he was in that place, it seemeth to be apparent that he was a dissembler.  
The said M. Hurt, M. jackson, M. Freeman, and M Gregory, do further also testify, that after William Somers had showed unto them his fits, with the manner of the doing of them, he did acknowledge that all he had formerly done, when he was supposed that he was possessed, was dissembled, and done by himself voluntarily, without the assistance of any Devil or spirit: which he knew to be so, for that he was (as he said) in good and perfect memory, at the doing of every thing: and constantly affirmed, that whatsoever he had then confessed unto them, he had done it of his own free will, without compulsion any ways.  
Moreover, for a surcharge unto the said promises and threatenings, it was also given out by M. Darrell, or his adherents, that the said Somers, whilst he was at S. john's, was compelled through sorcery and charms, used by one Nicholas air or some others, to say that he had dissembled: insomuch that (as it seemeth) some were examined by M. Darrel's means at Nottingham, upon that point. But nothing was proved, the conceit proceeding from a shifting and detracting humour.  

Somers. pag. 365.  William Somers, when he heard of this report, writ thereof thus. Be it known unto all men, etc. that I did confess my counterfeiting voluntarily, without any witchcraft, sorcery, ointments, papistry, or comurations, or any other unlawful means.  

Io. Cooper fol 16.  john Cooper deposed sayeth, that he never knew one Nicholas Air to have access to the boy, whilst he was at S. john's, to his knowledge. Of all likelihood, this Air was suspected by M. Darrell, to be either a Witch or a conjuror: and then if he were with the boy at all, it was sufficient for M. Darrell to work upon, and to enforce the said effect of sorcery. But the surmise of charming was pretty. One M. Gregory finding by Summer's words, that his legs were so sore, that he could not act his tricks, he the said M. Gregory gave direction to the boy's keepers, that they should anoint them with some oil, whereby he might be the more nimble to show them. Now forsooth, this oil was either charmed, or when the boy was anointed, some charms were used: and so he said that he had counterfeited.  
Touching this grave point, there are these depositions. William Somers answered, that his legs were so sore, 
Nich. Shepard. fol. 17.  he could not show his tricks, and then M. Gregory commanded, that some ointment might he given him: which I did, and the boy anointed his knees. And john Cooper: It is true that there was an ointment brought to Somers, by Nicholas Shepherd, 
Fol. 16  appointed thereunto by M. Gregory, with the which Somers was anointed, because he might be more nimble to show his tricks: But words of charm, I heard not at the anointing of him But hereof to much: because M. Darrell (as it seemeth) being ashamed of this ridiculous slander, hath in his Apology, where he hath set down the rest, omitted this.   

CHAP. V Of M. Darrel's ridiculous pretence, that Somers was induced by the Devil in form of a black dog, and an Ass, to say he had dissembled.  
lest there might be any defect ascribed unto the said promises, or threatenings, or sorcery, or charms mentioned in the former chapter, as being insufficient to draw Somers unto his said confession, the devil is brought in by M. Darrell and his friends, as a chief Actor to that effect: who appearing unto him forsooth, first in the likeness of a black dog, and then of an Ass, persuaded him to affirm, that he had dissembled. The beginning of this shift may not be concealed.  
William Somers having affirmed before the Commissioners deputed from York, that he had not dissembled, was asked, 
john Brinsley. pa, 132.  why he had then said before, that he had dissembled. To whom (as the tale goeth) he made this answer: the black dog with abagge of gold: and being able to go no further, fell down into an other fit. It had been well, if he had made an end of his answer, before he so fell, 
page. 124.  that so the sense might have been perfect. But it forceth not. For one George Small deposed, hath made it up: Who reporting his said answer, delivereth it thus. The boy offered twice or thrice to have answered, before he could answer, his wind seeming to be stopped: but at the last said, that he had seen a black Dog, which black Dog, had induced him to say, that he had dissembled. The rest that were present, could hear nothing (it seemeth,) but his said abrupt speech, vz, the black dog with the bag of gold: but this fellow was of a quicker ear.  
Summer's being hereof examined, telleth us this story. It had been a thing of course with him, (as he sayeth) in those his pretended fits, when Satan was said to seek to repossess him, to name a black Dog amongst other similitudes, (wherein M. Darrell had affirmed, the devil was accustomed to seek the repossession of those, out of whom he had been cast,) which black dog he feigned then to have alured him with gold and fair promises, that he might again re-enter. The remembrance of which his former instruction and practice, caused him to name the said black dog with a bag of gold. Now for that he had left his said speech imperfect, and also upon some other occasions, he the said Somers being sent by the said commissioners, to one Edmond Garlands house: he the said Garland demanded of him, why he had affirmed whilst he was at S. john's, that he had dissembled: seeing that he had now affirmed the contrary before the said Commissioners. Whereunto Somers answering (as he saith) in his knavery, told him: that being at S. john's, a thing did appear unto him, in the likeness of a black Dog, and then of an Ass, which persuaded him, partly by promises, and partly by threatenings, to say that he had dissembled, and that if he would yield therein, he should do any thing that he would. This tale of Somers was no sooner understood, but it was given forth, that whereas there was a black Dog by hap in the chamber, whilst Somers was acting his tricks before the said Commissioners: the said black dog was out of question the Devil, that had willed the boy to say he had dissembled, the dog belonging in deed to a Spurrier in Nottingham. Of this idle conceit M. Brinsley had been a chief spreader, relying (as he saith) upon the reports of M. Ireton, and M. Leigh. Touching M. Leigh he reporteth that he the said M. Leigh, seeing the Dog at the chamber door, did think the dogs eyes did gloare like fire. But M. Ireton, and M. Leigh themselves being deposed, do testify hereof as followeth.  
The black Dog, 
M. Leigh. pag. 266.  which was said to be in the place where the Commissioners sat, was a black Spaniel, which since M. Hurt hath showed to me (as I verily think) in the market place.  
A speech or conceit was raised (saith M. Ireton) I know not how, that the said black dog was a Devil: 
M. Ireton. 336.  which I think to be a mere toy, understanding that it was a Spurriers dog.  
I saw a black rough Dog in the Chamber whilst the boy lay in his tricks: which Dog was one Thomas Clerks, 
john Cooper. 202.  a Spurriar in Nottingham, and I do think in my conscience, that it was the same, that was about William Somers there & none other.  
Now M. Darrell building his Apology upon such lies 
apology.  and fooleries, telleth us this matter very gravely in this sort. Satan visibly appearing unto Somers (as his usual manner is to those he possesseth) sometimes promised him gold, and that he would be at hand, to do those things for him, he had done, howsoever he would have him, if he would say he had counterfeited: at other times Satan also threatened to pull him in pieces, if he would not say so. A man would think by these confident words, that M. Darrell had been present, and a witness of the Devils said speeches: whereas if he be well pressed, you shall find he hath nothing but the premises to ground upon: besides his great learning, whereby he affirmeth, like a cozening impostor, what Satan's custom is in such cases.   

CHAP. VI How M. Darrell hath falsely affirmed, that William Somers was induced to say he had dissembled, for fear of hanging: whereas he falling into his fits before the Commissioners at Nottingham, (upon a former compact) the fear of hanging was one of the chiefest causes, that he then affirmed, that he had not dissembled.  
IT should seem, that M. Darrell hath a good vain in teaching: & that Somers had a strong retentive faculty in holding of that which he hath learned, in that he was so hardly drawn, as it is pretended, to confess that he had dissembled. For besides that which hitherto hath been reported, of the said promises, threatenings, sorcery, charm, and the devil himself: there is added a fixed inducement, uz. the fear of hanging: he being slandered to have bewitched one Stirlande to death. Whereof Master Darrell telleth us: 
apology.  that undoubtedly, if he had stood to the truth, and never acknowledged any counterfeiting, he had been arraigned and sore laid at for his life. Now the proverb is, life is sweet, and who almost will not make a lie for the saving of it. Assuredly, this fellow through his acquaintance with Satan, (as it should seem) is grown to extraordinary and presumptuous boldness: not shaming to say any thing that may serve his turn.  
For the clearing therefore of this untruth: Somers before hath deposed, that one cause why, about the fourteenth day of januarie 1597. he fell again to those fits, (whereupon Master Darrel) affirmed that he was repossessed) was this, uz. The fear of such danger, 
M. Croven. fol. 15.  as he otherwise might have fallen into, by reason of the said accusation, concerning his bewitching of Stirland to death. And this deposition of Somers, is strengthened with that which M. Craven hath hereof deposed to this purpose, saying: that one of the reasons which moved him to think, that Somers dissembled, was: because that after his release, uz. from acting of such fits as he showed, when the Devil was pretended to re-enter into him, at the time of his detecting of witches, he never had any fit, for aught he knew, till he was bound over to the Assizes for a witch.  
Besides, after that Somers upon that occasion, and some others, fell to his old tricks, he continued in them about six weeks, & did not make his dissimulation publicly known, for all that time, and till his coming to Saint john's.  
So as it is apparent, that Somers for fear of hanging, fell again to his former by ace of dissimulation: knowing, that thereby he should be sure to be defended and upheld by M. Darrell and his friends, so far forth as they were able themselves, or by any other means that they could procure on his behalf. It was therefore too much presumption in M. Darrell to tell us: that he was drawn to say he had dissembled, for fear of hanging. But what, if it was the fear of hanging, that caused him not only to fall to his old course of dissimulation, (as is before expressed,) but likewise (after he had confessed for the space of a month together, that in all his former courses he had dissembled) to deny the same before M. Darrel's Commissioners, and to affirm for his safety that he had not dissembled? Surely, it will so fall out, if you can be content to have the same by degrees, made manifest unto you: as first why Somers fell into his fits before the said Commissioners, and then why having so begun, he was driven to affirm, that he had not dissembled.  

Somers. pag. 31.  Concerning the first, Somers deposeth thus. It being known, that I was to appear before the Commissioners, Nicholas Shepheard, and others moved me, that when I should come before them, I should show some of my tricks in such manner, and form as I had before done them, and not rise again, until M. Mayor should call me, that thereby (say they) it may plainly appear to the Commissioners, that whatsoever thou hast done before, was done of thine own accord, and merely counterfeited. This counsel being agreeable to M. Mayor's desire (as I was informed) I did willingly yield unto it.  

job. Cooper. fol 21.  Summer's fell into a fit at Nottingham, before the Commissioners from the Lord Archbishop of York, to the thinking of the beholders, that he was repossessed: where in truth, that very fit was determined of, about seven days before his coming before them, uz. that he should fall into a fit before them, and lie in the same, 
Nich. Shepard. fol. 2.  until M. Mayor should call him: and accordingly M. Mayor was acquainted herewith.  
Somers told me, 
Nich. Shepard. fol 2  that he would fall into a fit before the Commissioners, and would rise again at M. Mayor call, but at no man's else.  
I well remember, 
W. Freeman. pag. 377.  that about a week before my Lord of Yorks Commission was set on, john Cooper or Nicholas Shepherd came to my house, and told me, that William Somers, when he did appear before the Commissioners to be examined, he would fall down into his fits, & lie still on the ground, until M. Maior (being one of the Commissioners) should bid him arise. And further the said Cooper, or Shepherd said, that they would acquaint M. Mayor with Summer's purpose, that he might call upon him, and bid him rise, and so satisfy the company of his counterfeiting.  
Cooper & Shepheard being the boy's keepers at S. john's, 
Peter Clark, the Mayor, pag. 377.  did acquaint me with a determination, that Somers had to fall into a fit, before us that were Commissioners, and that I should have called him up from forth the said fit: at which call he would arise, so to satisfy all men, that it was but dissembled. Of which practice they acquainted me, at the least a week before the Commission was set on.  
Now for the second point, let Somers proceed: and the rather because that which he saith is otherwise deposed unto very fully. Upon the said agreement, I appearing (saith Somers) before the Commissioners, and after some speeches had with me (by some of them) fell down, & played divers of my tricks, as I was accustomed to do in my pretended fits. There I continued tumbling & acting my tricks for a long time, still expecting when M. Mayor would calm. Whilst I was thus tumbling, two did prick me with pings: one in the hand, and an other in the leg: which although I felt most sensibly, yet I endured it, because I still waited, that M. Mayor should call me: but he forgetting so to do, and I being no longer able to continue in that sort, I did rise up of myself, as I was wont to do, in the end of other in my dissembled fits. When I had thus ended these pranks, the Commissioners asked me, whether I had been troubled with any fit, since I came into that place before them, or had feet any hurt done unto me: and I answered no: and after affirmed upon other speeches, that I had not dissembled. And being here demanded why he so answered, he saith thus.  
Whilst I was in my pretended fit, I heard many rejoicingl say, that now it was most plain, that I was repossessed, and utter very sharp words against those, who had given it out, that I was but a dissembler. Besides, I began to suspect, that either Master majors opinion was altered, who was fully persuaded before (as I thought) that I had altogether dissembled: or else that he durst not speak his mind therein, and call me, seeing the rest of the Commissioners, and many others so confident in deed, that I was repossessed. Furthermore, I also then feared, least Master markeham's, and one jaques words, with sundry others, would prove true: who the same morning and overnight had told me, that if I were found to be a dissembler, I must be hanged: Whereas (quoth jaques) if it appear that thou art not a counterfeit, there can no law nor judge hurt thee. In these respects I thought it the safest way for myself, to yield for that time to their humours, and to answer as before is expressed, that I had not dissembled.  

Nich. She. pag. 210.  Now, for the better justification of this which Somers hath deposed: Nicholas Shepheard saith thus. I went to the Mayor, and desired him, to bid the boy rise out of his fits, saying, that thereupon the boy would rise. But Master Maior, being (as I think) terrified, by reason of the hard speeches of the justices, given out against those that had said the boy was a dissembler, and by the general clamour and speech of all that were in the place, being addicted to Master Darrell and his dealings he the said Mayor would not call upon him. And the then Mayor himself, 
M. Clarke pag. 377.  I must needs confess, that I omitted to call upon Somers, and thereby the people grow to confirm their opinions, of the truth of his possession,  
And touching that part of Summer's deposition, 
Nich. Sheppard. pag. 210.  concerning M. Markeham, and one jaques threatening words unto him, they are justified in this sort: The evening before William Somers appeared before the Commissioners, Sir john Byron, and M. Robert Markeham (two of the said Commissioners) as they were riding homewards by S. john's, called for the boy: who being brought unto them by me, Sir john Byron said unto him: art thou the boy, that dost thus disquiet the Country? And the boy answered, yea: Then (quoth Master Markham) if it be proved, that thou art a counterfeit, thou deservest to be hanged. The next morning also, a little before the boy was sent for to come to the Commissioners, one jaques, a servant of Master john Stanhopes (an other of the said Commissioners) came to William Somers, & said unto him, in the hearing of me, and of john Cooper, that if he were proved a counterfeit, he must be hanged.  
Master Markham said to William Somers, 
Io. Cooper pag. 296.  the night before he was to appear before the Commissioners, that if he were found to be a dissembler, he must be hanged: whereby I perceived the boy to be much terrified, in so much as he fell a weeping.  
Also one jaques told the boy in my hearing, the morning before he was sent for to the Commissioners, that if he did counterfeit, he would be hanged: & persevered so a long time in threatening sort unto the boy: and afterwards added, that if he were in case, as he was before, than he was innocent, and so no law nor judge could take hold on him, or condemn him. diverse others, at the least half an hundredth the same morning before he went to the said Commissioners, used the like words of terror to the boy.  
By these depositions, if the humour then regnant in M. Darrel's zealous adherents, so much addicted in outward show to set out the glory of God, do not somewhat appear, the peruser of them may out of doubt be deemed partial. This was threatening and terrifying in deed, able to have shaken the constancy of a stronger man peradventure then Somers was, the time and the persons considered, that dealt so with him. It had been good for M. Darrell, if he had omitted in his Apology this calumniation, seeing that thereby he is fallen himself into the same snare, which he had laid for others.   

CHAP. VII. How Somers was persuaded by threatenings, & promises, to have continued his dissimulation, after he had been before the Commissioners at Nottingham, until M. Darrell might again dispossess him.  
WIlliam Somers, having confessed before the Commissioners at Nottingham, that he did not dissemble, he was sent by their authority (upon the desire of Master Darrell & his friends) to one Garlands house. Of his being there, and of the course then held with him, he deposeth in this sort. 
Som. pag. 32.  When I came to Garlands house, there was great concourse again unto me, and divers persuasions were used, that I should never say again, that I had dissembled. Also Mistress Aldridge, & (as I think) M. Aldridge himself said unto me, that now it was apparent unto all the Commissioners, that I was repossessed & that if ever hereafter I should affirm, that I had dissembled: M. Mayor, & the rest of the Commissioners were certainly determined to hang me, & that they had a commission from the Queen so to do. She therefore with the rest encouraged me to continue in the course that I had again newly begun, and promised me, that the next friday after the judges were gone (whose coming was not then far of) there should be an other fast, and that M. Darrell would then dispossess me again. They also said, that there should be the same day a collection for me, and that then I should, being dispossessed, be placed for half a year with M. Bolton Chaplain to Sir john Byron, & afterwards wait upon one of the said knights grand children.  
These persuasions added to the reasons that caused Somers to say, he had dissembled before the commissioners, moved him, as he confesseth, to continue his old practices, for the space of about ten days: until the Mayor of Nottingham sent for him thence by the direction of the Lord chief justice of the common Pleas. And then he confessed before the said Mayor, (the last day of March, 1598. 
Pet. Clerk. Rich. Hurt, William Freeman. page. 369. ) Richard Hurt and William Freeman, justices of the Peace, the reasons that moved him to tell the Commissioners, that he had not dissembled, and to continue his fits at Garlands house, to the effect in every point, as is before expressed. Within two or three days after, the judges coming to Nottingham, he the said Somers, being sent for before the L. Anderson, confessed at large, how he had dissembled: & there showing his tricks before his Lordship, & divers others, in some extraordinary sort, to those that had not seen him before: he presently started up, upon his Lordship's bidding of him to arise, and showed himself to be as well, as he was before. Since which time (sayeth Somers,) I have been very well, I thank God, notwithstanding, that M. Darrell did then, 
W. Somers. pag. 34.  and hath since diverse times affirmed, that I remain still repossessed with viii devils, and that I am likewise possessed in soul. And I trust that God will hereafter give me grace, from ever consenting again to any such wicked courses: hoping that God will grant both M. Darrell and me true repentance, for our abusing of the world so notoriously, with such, and so many our ungodly practices.  
That William Somers did act his fits before the Lord Anderson, and confessed as it is above mentioned, to the Mayor of Nottingham, and others, after he was taken from Garlands house, 
M. Darrel ad art. 45 pag. 21.  it will not be denied. But for the rest, concerning a pretended fast for Somers second dispossession, that M. Darrel maketh altogether strange, as though he had never mentioned any such matter: and Mrs. Aldridge quallifyeth her speeches in some part, aswell as she can. Howbeit there are depositions which do argue, that to be true which Somers hath herein deposed.  

M Adridge pa. 96.  I heard M. Darrell affirm (sayeth M. Aldridge) that there should be a new fast after the Assizes, for the dispossessing again of Somers.  
When William Somers was first brought unto my house, I heard speeches delivered unto him, to this effect, uz. that now he having avowed the truth, 
Ed. Garland pa. 117  in saying that he was no dissembler, he should stand steadfast unto that truth: that there should within a short time, an other fast be appointed in S. Mary's: when God were so pleased, he should be again dispossessed, and that afterwards means should be made to M. Bolton, that he might be with him. 
Folly 4.  Again, I heard Mrs. Aldridge say to the boy, when he was at my house, sent the thereby the Commissioners, that if he would stick to the truth, she made no doubt but to place him with M. Bolton. 
Mrs. Aldrid. fol. 9  And Mrs. Aldridge herself: I willed the boy to stick to the truth, not doubting to make means by some friends, to place him in service with M. Bolton, Sir john Byron's Chapleaine, there to wait upon one of Sir john's grandchildren.  

M Aldridge pag. 96.  M. Aldridge also confesseth, that upon Somers coming from the Commissioners, or very shortly after: he said unto him: that now it was apparent to the Commissioners, and to the Mayor himself, that he had not before dissembled, and that now if he should hereafter (as before he had done) affirm, that he had dissembled, he deserved to be punished very sharply.  
If the Proverb be true, that a man may see day at a little hole, what may he then do at a great breach? If the Assizes had not been so near, M. Darrell (it seemeth) would have quit his hands of Somers, as being very weary of that matter. He was therefore (as it seemeth) very earnest, both by himself and his friends, to have had the boy continued his dissimulation a little longer: then he might have been rid of him with some show of honesty. But it would not be: such juggling will out: and not be concealed.   

CHAP. VIII. Of the depositions taken in M. Darrells behalf at Nottingham, and how upon the reexamination of his own witnesses, it falleth out: that the bodily actions of Somers in his fits, were not extraordinary, as they have been misreported.  
WE are now come to M. Darrel's last shift, wherein both he and his fellows do so greatly triumph: which is, the authority of certain depositions, taken before the said Commissioners, on his behalf, at Nottingham. Somers, who knew his own doings best, said he had dissembled, and M. Darrell affirmed that he had not dissembled. The wiser sort believed Somers, such as had some good experience of the course held betwixt him and Darrell: others (not to be impeached, so much for their want of wisdom, as for their blinding the eye thereof, by their preposterous affections, they held with M. Darrell. The issue was, it must be tried by a Commission, whether Somers said truly, in affirming that he had dissembled. The Commission was procured, and expedited the xx. of March 1597, by these Commissioners, (if the printed Narration said truly.) john Thorold Esquire, high Sheriff, Sir john Byron knight, john Stanhope, Robert Markeham, Richard Perkins esquires: Peter Clarke Mayor of Nottingham, Miles Leigh Official, john Ireton, john Brown, Robert Euington, and Thomas Bolton, Ministers and Preachers: men for their sufficiency, it is true, very meet to have dealt in a far greater matter. The Gentlemen are very well known, to be very fit Governors, and are a great stay in those parts of the country where they dwell. If the examination of a matter of high treason had been committed unto them, or any other of a lower degree, concerning the good and peace of their Country, they had been within the compass of their own element, and would no doubt with all sufficiency have discharged themselves therein. But the hypocritical sleights of false seducers, in matters that concern religion, they are of an other nature, or else it had been impossible for Popery to have so far prevailed: the chief points thereof having been upheld by lies, and feigned miracles.  
The Commissioners that were clergymen, their oversight was the greater, because they could not be ignorant, (at the least one or two of them) how the Church hath been abused from time to time, for above these 800. years, by false Impostors, and juggling Exorcists, who for their own glory, profit, and other preposterous ends, have taken upon them to cast out devils. Howbeit something also may be said to extenuate their oversight, in that none of the Ministers had ever seen Somers before, in any of his fits, nor were acquainted with such courses as were held on from time to time, betwixt Darrell & the boy. Besides, they had (as it seemeth) a good opinion of M. Darrell, and could not easily be led to suspect more than they saw. And for them altogether: who almost being strangers to that cause, would not have conceived as they did. They found M. Darrell ready furnished with many abettors: but no man showed his face on Summer's behalf. M. Darrell, (as the Narrator reporteth) had taken the names of threescore persons, who were ready to have been deposed, touching the extraordinary handling of Somers: but no one witness was sought out to be deposed for Somers. Of the said threescore, seaventeen were examined: which might very well have seemed to have been sufficient: considering that the boy did also concur with them, in saying, that he had not dissembled, as it hath been before declared.  
And concerning also the witnesses themselves, much might be said for their excuse. They, having conceived well of M. Darrell, could not easily suspect any treachery in him. And to say the truth, those grounds presupposed to be true, (which M. Darrell had taught them,) uz. that whatsoever he did or spoke in his fits, it was not Somers, but the devil that did it and spoke it: it may rather be marveled, that they deposed no more, then blamed that they deposed so much. For who seeing a man lie, in his conceit, as senseless as a block, would not admire the very shaking of his toe: especially being persuaded, that the Devil made the motion. But when he should see him leap and frisk, move the calves of his legs, the flesh of his thighs, thrust out his belly, and make sundry strange motions with his jaws, eyes and tongue: it could not be chosen, but it must seem terrible. Add hereunto the weakness of men's nature, which is subject to be terrified with devils, and wicked spirits, especially when they suppose the said spirits to be present, and in action before their eyes.  

M. Aldridge pa. 87.  M. Aldridge being asked, why heretofore he had affirmed, that he perceived, whilst Somers was acting his tricks, the forms as it were of kitlings, under the coverlet that lay upon him, the said coverlet being betwixt his eyes and them, rather than the forms of whelps, of Connyes, of Rats: etc. answereth, I think my so affirming, did proceed of this, etc. because I had heard before, that certain Witches had spirits in forms of Kitlinges, and those forms than came to my mind. And again, I do very well know, that a man's senses may be deceived. Besides, I was then very greatly afraid, which is a great means to deceive a man's senses: being a mighty passion, that will procure many imaginations, & cause a man to think that which is but little, to be great, that which standeth, to move, and that to be, which is not. Whereby I confess (my great fear considered) that I might be deceived, in affirming many things, concerning the particularities of the said Summer's fits: and I verily think it may be true, that Somers affirmeth, of making certain motions with his fingers under the said coverlet, and of his knocking against the Beddestocke, whilst I was praying by his bedside. Add hereunto, that the said witnesses were fully persuaded, that Somers had been possessed, dispossessed, and was repossessed: and that they conceived some good effects wrought in Nottingham, by that which they had heard so oft, both in their pulpits, and else where, concerning a power left to the Church, to cast out Devils.  
There have been many lewd practices of late years in England, thrust forward by sundry traitorous Exorcists, under the pretence of casting out devils: numbers of that generation, upon secret intelligence flocking unto them. Whereof, if any inquiry should be made, & examinations taken, you may be sure, you should have most strange things deposed by that crew, although all that was done, was feigned and counterfeited. To let men therefore in such cases, and being so affected, run on forwards with their own tales, no marvel if they seem very admirable. But one thing concerning our witnesses in hand, is worthy of consideration: that the most of those that were examined, were but simple persons, and such as had not been past twice or thrice with the boy, in all the time of his trouble. Some (having threescore ready) would have produced his chief witnesses first, but peradventure it was thought good policy to lay the burden upon the simpler sort.  
These points thus premised, concerning the expediting of the said Commission: you are now further to be advertised, that sundry of the said witnesses being reexamined by her majesties authority, in causes ecclesiastical, from the L. Archbishop of Canterbury, and others directed: have greatly qualified their former depositions, by diverse and sundry interpretations of their meaning, and as though some parts of their depositions had been mistaken. Inasmuch as now, the bodily actions of Somers in his fits, which were supposed to have been extraordinary, do appear to have been but ordinary, or at the least, such as a knavish expert boy might easily counterfeit, in such a company as he had about him: and thereby also, that which Somers hath deposed of the said supposed extraordinary motions, is in effect fully justified: 
Summer's pa. 36.  concerning the extraordinary motions of my body (as they were termed,) many things were reported of me, which I never did: and those things which I did indeed, were made much more strange than they were: I having done nothing in any of my fits, which an other man by practice may not easily do, without the devils help. The said reexaminations are as followeth.  
Whereas Thomas Hayes deposeth, before the L. Archbishop of York's Commissioners at Nottingham: 
Th' Hays, fol. 1.  that he saw some thing run out of William Somers legs into the other, and thence forthwith into his belly, swelling the same: insomuch that the same was much bowned upward: and when the same departed thence, he saw it plainly in his throat, in his tongue, and in his cheek, near to his ear root, to the quantity of the yolk of an egg, which he taking between his fingers, found the same to be in softness like the yolk of an egg. Being reexamined, he sayeth thus. I saw a swelling in his cheek, 
Th. Hayes, fol. 317  to the quantity of a yolk of an egg, and in his throat, of the same quantity: further than his throat and his face, I could not, nor did see it: (William Somers lying in his clothes) but I saw a stirring run down his breast, and into his legs, without any rising, or quantity, that I could discern, saving in his belly, the boy at that time lying on his back, somewhat bended.  
This swelling and running of some thing in Summer's body, is one of the chiefest supernatural actions or passions, (for the Apology it seemeth knew not whether to call them,) that M. Darrell and the Narrator do insist upon, for the proof that Somers was possessed. But if they were no other, then M. Hayes, upon his last examination, hath deposed: there was no great strangeness in them. It is supposed that M. Darrell will be very angry, to have these supernatural runings so extenuated: He himself having laboured so much to have them admired. But he must be content, for it is very agreeable to his former success, when he would have made them strange and marvelous. 
M. Craven. fol. 14.  Hereof consider what M. Craven hath deposed. When the Devil was said sensibly to move within Summer's body: first in one leg, and then in an other, I could perceive the leg (saith he) to shake and move, but nothing in the leg, till Master Darrell catching hold of the boy's thigh, affirmed that he had it under his hand, and called me and M. Aldred to feel it likewise. But Somers, being unwilling that we should so do, turned himself violently upon his belly, till by force we drew him back, and then we found nothing, but his gloves, or some such things as he had in his pocket. If M. Darrell do not here say, that the Devil skipped out of the boy's thigh into his pocket, and turned himself into a pair of gloves: the Devil may rather be thought to have run up and down in his own cozening pate, then in the boy's body.  
Of these swellings and run, Somers, 
W. Somers pag. 36.  who should know them best, hath thus deposed. Whereas (saith he) it hath been reported, that I had divers swellings, proceeding from my legs to other parts of my body, contrary to all course of humours, or wind: this I say, that of mine own knowledge, & in mine own hearing, very many false reports have been made thereof: some affirming, that they saw a thing run in my body of the bigness of a mouse, some of a Rat, some of a man's fist, and that sometimes those who were present, would affirm as much, of one and the same thing at one time, differing in their opinions, concerning that which they said they did then see. Besides, he likewise setteth down, how he did make the said motions that seemed to run in his body, in these words: I did move first the calf of my leg, than my knee-bone, which motion of the knee, will likewise make a motion or rising in the thigh. Also by drawing and stopping of my mind, my belly would stir and show a kind of swelling. The bunch (as they termed it) about my chest, was by the thrusting out of my breast. Likewise my secret swallowing did make the end of my windepipe to move, and to show greater than usually it is: Again, by moving of my jaws, one bunch was easily made in the side, my cheek near mine ear: and about the middle of my cheek, with the end of my tongue thrust against it. These motions by practice I would make very fast, one after another: so as there might easily seem to be running in my body of some thing, from place to place: especially when he was thought at those times to be as senseless, and for any motions of his own to lie as a block.  
Again, Henry Nussey deposed before the said Commissioners saith: that he saw William Somers with his mouth wide open, 
Hen. Nussey fol. 8  speak certain words to john Wiggen in Latin, which he understood not, his chaps nor teeth moving, when he did so speak: and that he saw these things evidently, for he came very near to him to behold him.  

Rich. Newton. fol. 4.  Also, Richard Newton deposed then of this point, after this sort saith: I found Somers in one of his fits, and heard him speak plainly with a continued speech, with his mouth wide open, his tongue drawn into his throat: so that there could be seen nothing of it, but the roots in his throat, neither lips nor chaps moving, and uttered this speech amongst other: Ego sum Rex, 
M. Darrell apology.  ego sum Deus. And hereupon Master Darrell telleth us this tale, relying for the most part of it, upon one singular witness. He spoke (saith he) with his mouth wide open: yea his tongue retorted into his throat, and namely these words: Ego sum Deus, ego sum Rex: I am God, I am King. But let us see what Nussey, and Newton, being reexamined, 
Herald Nussey pag 323.  do depose of these points: I heard Somers (saith Nussey) speak some words, which I understood not: but one john Wiggen told me, that Somers said in Latin, I am God: But I am not able to say, that he spoke those words, or any other, without the help of his tongue, neither am I able to affirm, that his tongue was turned into his throat, at the time that he spoke the said words. And with this reexamination of Nussey, agreeth the deposition of john Wiggen, in these words. 
Io. Wiggen pag. 321.  Somers, in one of his said fits said, Ego sum Deus, ego sum Rex: which words (I think) he spoke with his own tongue, and with the moving of his lips, and I never meant to be understood, that Somers spoke, having his mouth wide open, and his tongue turned into his throat, nor did ever at any time hear or see any such thing in him. And touching Richard Newton, he being reexamined saith thus: I heard Somers say these words: Ego sum Rex, ego sum Deus: and no more words that I remember: which words, I think he could have said at any other time, when he was well, as having been at Latin school. He spoke then after the same manner and fashion, as he spoke them when he was well, with his tongue and lips, and his own voice, saving that I think he counterfeited his voice a little. I had heard say before I came, of many extraordinary and strange things to be done by Somers, as that he could speak with his mouth wide open, without his tongue, or without moving his tongue, which I never see him do, nor think he either did or could do: for to my remembrance, his lips did then move, and his tongue both, when he said the words: Ego sum Rex, ego sum Deus.  
With these three depositions of Nussey, Wiggen, & Newton, as M. Darrel's feigned wonder is by them detected, so is Summer's confession in that behalf fully ratified. Concerning (saith he) the report of my extraordinary speaking, 
Somers. pag. 38.  with my mouth wide open, & my tongue drawn into my throat, neither moving my lips, jaws or tongue: I say, that the most of these reports are utterly untrue. But I confess, that I did divers times change my voice, speaking sometimes hollowly, and sometimes more shrilly: and likewise that I have spoken many words, my mouth being open, as any other man may do, and also when my lips seemed (in a manner) to be shut. But I never spoke any word, when my tongue was thrust into my throat: only I confess that when sometimes divers would look into my mouth, I did often suddenly convey my tongue backward, as it were, into my throat. Many are ashamed, I believe, of these their fond reports, and I hope, that in time they will vanish.  

Richard Me, fol. 13.  Furthermore, one Richard Me did depose before the said Commissioners, That he had seen William Somers stand, and turn his face directly backward, not moving his body, and that his eyes were as great as beasts eyes, and that his tongue would be thrust out of his head, to the bigness of a calves tongue.  
The several parts of this deposition are pretermitted by Master Darrell, in his Apology: saving that of turning his face backwards, which he doth somewhat alter, terming it, the setting of his face against his back. But let us see what the said Me hath deposed, upon his reexamination. Whereas I have been conceived, to say and swear, as is before expressed, 
Rich. Me pag. 325.  my meaning was, and is (saith he) that he the said Somers turned his face a good way towards his shoulder, and not otherwise: and likewise my meaning was, and is, that his eyes were somewhat gogling out, but otherwise no more then ordinary. And thirdly, my meaning was, & is, that by reason it was candle light when I saw his tongue thrust out, and by reason of my conceit of the strangeness of Summer's troubles, before I saw him: his tongue being thrust out, it seemed somewhat bigger, then if Somers had been well, I should have thought it to have been.  

jone Pie. fol. 6.  Again, one jone Pie, being deposed before the said Commissioners, affirmeth, that William Somers in one of his fits, upon the Saturday, that Master Darrell came to Nottingham, used these words, with his mouth extraordinarily wide, and strangely open, and without moving or stirring his tongue or lips, in speaking any of these words: uz. I will use William Somers tongue & members for three days: and that in an other fit the same day, she saw his body doubled, his head between his legs. But being reexamined, she saith thus: 
jone Pie. fol. 329.  I heard W. Somers say in the voice, he was wont to speak, his mouth not being wide open, but with his lips moving as at other times, as I then marked and saw, these words. I will use William Somers tongue for three days: but I saw not his head between his legs, neither at that time, nor at any time after.  
Lastly, 
W. Hunt: fol. 15.  William Hunt deposed before the said Commissioners: that he heard a voice proceed from William Somers, lying in one of his fits, his lips being close shut, and neither moving his lips or jaws, to his understanding, and that he continued so speaking, to the space of a quarter of an hour. This deposition, though it be but singular, yet M. Darrell hath thrust it into his Aplogie, but with some falsehood, saying: that he did speak distinctly, with a continued speech for a quarter of an hour, his mouth being shut close. I heard a voice proceed from William Somers (saith Hunt): he spoke distinctly with a continued speech (saith Darrell.) But let us hear Hunt being examined. Whereas I have been conceived (saith he) to report and affirm, 
W. Hunt. pag. 333.  that William Somers did continue speaking by the space of a quarter of an hour, having his lips close shut, and neither moving his lips, nor his jaws: I now say, that many times the said Somers would mumble some secret words alone, & not seem to open his mouth wide: but when he spoke many words together, he opened his mouth, and stirred his lips, as any other man doth. And when he seemed to mumble any words as is aforesaid, I could not well mark, whether he stirred his lips, and opened his mouth, as at other times, by reason the said Somers did so turn and writhe his face, as I could not well see.  
These were the chief points, which seemed most strange in the said depositions, taken at Nottingham: whereupon it was thought good to have the said witnesses examined. And how they qualify their former words, you see it apparent: neither is it to be doubted, but that if all other reports, which have been made touching Somers fits, were thoroughly looked into, and the authors of them discreetly examined, now that the heat of their affections is somewhat cooled, the issue thereof would sort and agree, with the second cogitations of these their fellows.  
The end of the Third Book.    

The Fourth Book.  
In this fourth Book it will appear, how M. Darrell made all things strange that Somers did: How loath he was that any man should make trial, whether he had any sense in his fits: and how he shifted to excuse the boy, when by divers circumstances it was supposed he dissembled. Besides, it is herein directly proved, contrary to M. Darrel's grounds and assertions: that Somers in his fits had his senses & understanding: that the casting of himself into the fire: the motions and knocking in his bed: his pretended knowledge: his supposed great strength, and his skill in divers languages, were no ways extraordinary: Briefly, that there was no impossibility at all in the boy's fits, and that as he was accounted a dissembler, before M. Darrelles coming to Nottingham, so was he still reputed by divers, all the while that Somers and he were practising together at Nottingham, notwithstanding that M. Darrell could either do, say, or preach to the contrary.  

CHAP. I. How Master Darrell laboured from time to time, to make those things that Somers did, (and were but very toys) to be thought both strange and extraordinary.  
THings that be strange, do cause men to wonder. If a man go to Rome, and be desirous of novelties, he shall find sundry Priests that will feed his humour. 
M. Attilius Serranus.  They will show him Christ's napkin, S. Inkes head, S. Andrew's arm, S. Blazes weazand, a piece of S. Christopher's arm, Saint Peter's fingers, the pincers wherewith divers Martyrs were pinched, a piece of the earth where Christ appeared to Marie Magdalen, Saint Anne's thumb, Saint Dominckes stole, a piece of Saint Paul's staff, that he walked with, Saint Peter's tooth, the Table whereat Christ last supped, some of the fragments of the five Barley loves mentioned in the Gospel, a piece of the chain that Saint john was bound with: Moses' rod: Aaron's rod, some of the shewebreade, the towel wherewith Christ wiped his Apostles feet: part of the reed that Christ was struck with at pilate's house, the ashes of Saint john Baptist, the vessel into the which blood and water flowed out of Christ's side: many clouts died with the blood of Martyrs: a stone of Christ's Sepulchre: a stone or piece of earth of Mount Caluarie: a stone or piece of earth from the place where Christ ascended into heaven: the sponge wherein they gave Christ Vinegar and gall: the crib that Christ was borne in: the thorns of the Crown that Christ was crowned with: our Lady's hair: the Chin of Saint john Baptistes father: some of Mary magdalen's hair: a piece of the fat of Saint Laurence: a piece of the arm, and some of the brains of Saint Thomas of Canterbury, with many such trinkettes.  
And they will vow and protest with great devotion, that these are no fictions, nor feigned relics: but the very things themselves whose names they bear, whereby many credulous and superstitious people are drawn to admire them. It is the manner of the Mountebanks in Italy, resembled by some of our peddlers, when they open their packs, to set out their ware with many great words. Unto which kind of people, and seducing Mirabilistes, Master Darrell in his practices with Somers, may well be resembled. When the boy spoke, he told the people it was the devil that used his voice: when he did any thing in his fits, he said that it was the Devil that did it. If he stirred his hands or any part of his body as he lay in bed, he affirmed the Devil to be in bed with him. The moving of the boy's fingers under a coverlet, he made to be devils, in forms of Whelps or Kitlinges: when he struggled, he pretended, that for strength he was almost an other Goliath. If he spoke any thing, whereof those that were present understood not the reason how he knew it: he was strait become a kind of Prophet, and to have supernatural knowledge. Two or three words of Latin, which he had learned at the school, was sufficient to give it out, that in his fits, he spoke Greek, Hebrew, and Latin. Briefly, all that the boy did in his pretended fits, M. Darrell would needs have to pass, and exceed the natural power of any man: and so must be done of necessity by the Devil. Whilst he was thus jetting up and down the place where Somers was playing his pranks, and setting out the boy's actions, as his chief Wares, with such strange words and qualities, a man may well remember the said Romish Priests in extolling their feigned Relics, and the said Mountebanks, and peddlers, in lying and cogging, to make the best of their packs.  
The particulars before mentioned, have been partly proved already, and it will appear to be true more plainly hereafter: and touching some others, there are these depositions following. 
Rob. Coop. pa. 98.  M. Darrell told those that were present, Somers being in a fit, that the Boy's tongue was drawn into his throat, quite out of his mouth, and taking the Candle in his hands, would needs have the company to look into his mouth, (the boy lying with his mouth open) and then said: see you not that it is so? what reason can be given of this? It passeth nature to do any such thing: with Cooper herein, 
Edm. Garland pa. 301 M. halam, fol. 7.  concurreth Edmond Garland.  
Upon the Sunday at night, sayeth M. halam, M. Darrell said (the boy lying in his fit,) behold his face is it just behind him, which is most strange: but I saw not the same strangeness.  

Rob. Coop. pa. 291.  M. Darrell told the people present at Porter's house, on the Saturday at night, when he came to Nottingham, that those things that the boy did, passed the power and skill of any man to do. With this deposition M. Parr doth fully agree in effect, 
M, Par, 264  word for word.  
Concerning the ridiculous gestures mentioned before, that were pretended to signify the sins of Nottingham: M. Darrell himself hath told us in his history, that Somers did them in that lively manner, that he thinketh, that the like dumb description of sins, cannot be made, by any humane skill or power. It hath also before been observed, how he willed the boy to utter some dark speeches, whereby the people might wonder at him: especially, when they heard his the said Darrel's profound exposition of them.  
Somers in one of his pretended fits, did take upon him, to expound the Articles of the Creed, which (he sayeth) he was in some sort enabled to do, by reason that almost every Minister, that came unto him, had in their speeches with him, interpreted them divers times unto him. Towards the end of the which his discourse, M. Darrell came in: who being informed thereof, and also of some errors, which had escaped therein, he made the matter very wonderful: first observe what is deposed, and then what M. Darrell sayeth.  

Th' Clerk pa 31●,  Coming one evening to Cooper's house, Somers fell into a fit, (as they called it) of squeaking, and screeching: and in his fiitte he began to repeat the Articles of the Creed, and to tell the meaning of every Article orderly. The which his exposition, I then thought, and do now think, to have been made by Somers himself, by the assistance of God, and not by the operation of the Devil.  
Somers did expound the Creed at my house, 
Rob. Coop. pa. 252.  by the space almost of an hour, Whereupon, M. Darrel then said to those that were present: that heretofore the boy had noted unto them, the sins that reigned in Nottingham, and that now they should hear him deliver unto him, the grounds of their faith, every Christian duty, and other godly rules, whereby they might learn to guide their ways: and therefore willed them to hearken unto his sayings, and to practise the same. 
M. Darrel pa, 223,  But now M. Darrell would be heard. Somers (sayeth he) having made a every glorious interpretation of the Creed, I came in, even as he made an end: and being informed thereof, and that some of the simple people were so ravished by the said interpretation, as they supposed it to be done by the Ministry of a good Angel: notwithstanding, some others told me of some errors that had escaped him: I answered them, that undoubtedly, the said glorious interpretation, had been made by an evil spirit, transforming himself into an Angel of light: adding, that thereof they might be assured, by his mingling of some errors amongst many truths. And again, in his Apology, speaking of Summer's supernatural knowledge forsooth, he writeth thus: 
M. Darrell Apo, pa, 13  From hence it was, that divine-like he continued his speech, in expounding the Creed for an hour together.  
M. Darrell was not (as you have heard) at this exposition, and the commendation it had, did proceed from the simple people: and yet here he sayeth, it was made divine-like, and termeth it a very glorious interpretation. But his reason why he ascribeth the same unto an evil spirit is very strange, and peradventure may touch himself as nearly as Somers. For if amongst many truths by him preached, the falling upon some errors, be an argument, that it was the Devil that preached in him, the most of his sermons at Nottingham, touching the possession, dispossession, and repossession of Somers, will haply be censured in Nottingham, to have proceeded from the Devil.  
But amongst all the rest of Summer's actions, which M. Darrell ascribed to the devil, there is one other that may not be pretermitted: which argueth, that he thought himself to have won such credit, as he might say any thing, were it never so absurd, without suspicion of falsehood or juggling. At some such times, as Somers being in his fits, called for drink, M. Darrell would suffer him to have none, affirming that it was not Somers, but the devil that called for it. This M. Darrell denieth, but it is deposed in sort, 
M Darrell ad art, 3, pag. 223 Edm. Garland pa. 301  as followeth.  
William Somers ask for drink, (sayeth Edmond Garland) M. Darrell caused it to be denied him: saying it was not he, but the Devil that asked for it.  

Rob. Coop. pa. 229.  Robert Cooper thus: I heard Thomas Porter say, that the boy being dry and hungry in the morning, before his dispossession, they durst give him neither meat, nor drink, till M. Darrell had been first acquainted with it. Again, Somers being at Porter's house in a fit, he said he was dry, but yet durst not drink, 
Rob. Coop. pa. 292.  because M. Darrell had told him, that the devil would make him dry and hungry, and did forbid him therefore, to take any drink or meat.  
Few men but M. Darrell (it is supposed) would have suspected, when the boy was dry, that the Devil called for drink. But it was his glory to show his skill and acquaintance with Satan's practices, and still to pretend that the boy's actions were wonderful. Many that were present, when they saw Somers do his tricks, supposing that it had been the Devil that did them, were greatly afraid. But M. Darrell was so strong in faith (forsooth) as, seeming greatly to disdain both Satan and all his doings, he checked him, commanded him, and reviled him at his pleasure: whereby the simpler sort of people, ascribed great virtue and holiness unto him. If the resemblances before made of M. Darrel's practices in this point, to peddlers, Mountebanks, and the Reliquemongers of Rome be not so fit: then as you remember, Somers and Darrell dissembling and colluding together, think upon the pretty feats, betwixt Banks and his horse. Indeed it was one of the greatest wonders that happened in those actions at Nottingham, that so many were seduced by such palpable fooleries.   

CHAP. II. How M. Darrell would not suffer (as near as he could) any to deal with Somers in his fits, to try whether he were senseless or dissembled.  
IF M. Darrell in his practices with Somers, had been of a single heart, none should have been more careful than he, to have searched and tried out his dissimulation: considering the common opinion after a while, that he was but a counterfyte. But he was so far from that, as he bent himself to the contrary. For the chief ground that M. Darrell wrought upon, being the opinion that Somers was senseless in his fits: when some who suspected him for a dissembler, thought good upon diverse occasions to make trial of it, by touching of him, and ask of him many questions: M. Darrell withstood them, as much as he could, greatly blaming them for so doing, and alleging sundry pretences in that behalf. Herewith M. Darrell being charged, he confesseth part thereof, but much more is deposed.  

M. Darrel ad art. 5 pag. 50,  Whilst Somers was in sundry of his fits, diverse attempting to try whether he had any sense, and whether he had dissembled, and to that purpose, pricking him with pings, and offering violence to some parts of his body, I did reprove some, and hinder others for so dealing with him: affirming, that though he could not then feel them, he would afterwards feel the hurt of it, and be sore.  
And touching the ask of the boy any questions his shift to hinder that, was a pretence, that he held it unlawful so to do: because in demanding any thing of him at that time, it was to ask the devil a question: wherein the Gentleman disagreeeth from all his authors, that writ of this art: who give many precepts, when, how, and what they must charge Satan to tell them: as who sent him: for what cause: what Saints prayer he feared most: what is his name: what company he hath with him, and such like. Besides, he also differeth from himself: for when he dealt with Katherine Wright, he had one or two pretty Dialogues with the Devil. But it was expedient for him in this case, 
M. Darrell, ad art. 22, pa. 42.  to dislike of that course. I confess (sayeth he) that I charged the spirit to tell his name, which I did then in ignorance, being drawn thereunto by reading a little treatise that came to my hands, concerning the dispossessing of one in the South Country. Furthermore, being charged to have asked Somers sundry questions in his fits, when he was grown a great man in the understanding of these mysteries, he answereth thus: 
M Darrell ad art, 3, pa, 215.  I never asked any one question of Somers, when I thought him to be in a fit, supposing that if I should so have done, I should have asked questions of the Devil, which I account a thing unlawful. But true it is, that Satan oftentimes of purpose to deceive me, would suffer the boy lie quietly when he was in his fit, whereby it came to pass, that I supposing his fit had been done, asked him a question, whereunto Satan hath answered. Here is fast and lose, as the Egyptian listeth.  
Some that stood by (sayeth William Somers, 
W. Somers pag. 10 ) endeavouring to make trial, whether I was void of sense or no, did call upon me: with whom M. Darrell was angry, saying, that I heard no more than a block. Others would have pinched me, but M. Darrell did prohibit them: affirming that it would make me sore afterward. Within a while also, the same night, uz. the 5. of November, an other ask me a question, I forgetting myself did answer him: wherewith M. Darrell was discontented, and blamed the party in so doing, saying, that it was not I, but the Devil that gave him that answer.  
Somers many times in his fits, 
M. Craven, pa, 258,  would talk merrily with the bystanders, and answer any man directly to any question he would propound: Which thing M. Darrell himself hath oft reprehended in the people saying, that the Devil took delight in such vain prattle.  
Summer's falling to toys and laughing in his fits, the fift of November, M. Darrell said in the end to the people, 
M. Hunt, Folly 18,  let him alone: for he is so full of knavery, that there is no dealing with him.  
M. Darrell blamed such as asked Somers any questions, 
Ro. Cooper pag. 291.  saying, it was the Devil to whom they spoke, and who answered them: though the boy did answer aptly and directly, to any questions that were propounded unto him. Again, diverse would adjure the boy in his fits, or the devil in him, (as it was pretended) to tell them how he came into him, whom M. Darrell would find fault with, saying, it was the devil, and not the boy to whom they spoke.  

George Richardson fol. 20.  I have asked some questions of Somers in his fits: and M. Darrell hath answered, let him alone, for he neither heareth, seethe, nor knoweth any thing, whilst he is in these fits.  
M. Darrell having told me that the devil was in bed with the boy, 
Geo, Pendleton. pa, 109  and an other showing me where he was moving under the coverlet, I catched hold of him, (as it was supposed) with my left hand, and would have pulled the clothes off with my other hand, saying, in the name of God, whatsoever it is, I will see it: whereupon M. Darrell held the clothes down, not suffering me to uncover him, and affirming, that the boy being in his bed, and in his fits, to uncover him, was as much as his life was worth.  
M. Darrel, talking with the said Pendleton of the boy's knowledge, 
Geor Pendleton, ibid.  by reason of the wicked spirit that was within him, he the said Pendleton, affirming that he had lost something by the way as he came to Nottingham, would needs know of the boy, what it was, that he had lost: nay quoth M. Darrell, he cannot of himself answer any questions, but doth speak only that which the evil spirit doth put in his mind to speak. This was a pretty evasion upon the sudden: but Pendleton was no way satisfied with it. M. Darrell knew very well, that the boy was not able to answer him: and therefore he used that shift, whereas if he had been indeed persuaded that the devil had been in him, 
Pendleton, ibid.,  he would no doubt have suffered him to have been put to his plunge, in answering the said question. The thing that Pendleton had lost was his rapier. Furthermore the said Pendleton, demanding of Summer's diverse other questions, and he answering none of them. What (quoth he) is the boy deaf? No (said Master Darrell) he is not deaf, but he cannot speak of himself in his fits, except the Devil do move him thereunto. Shift upon Shift.  
It being objected to M. Darrell himself, that at one time he catching at that which moved in Summer's bed, and under the coverlet, said he had hold of the wicked spirit: but would not do so much, as turn up the clothes to see what he had in hand, that thereby both he himself, and others that were present might have seen their errors: he the said Darrell doth thus answer. At one time, taking hold of that which seemed to move under the coverlet, 
M Darrell ad art, 8, pag. 223.  (being about a foot from the mass of his body) I did feel the same stir and move, as if it had been a living creature, but I did not turn up the clothes, as thinking or regarding so to do. The fellow was near driven, or at the least grown very dry in saying: that he thought not, nor regarded to turn up the clothes. In an other place he saith, that when they saw, 
M. Darrell ad. art. 17. pag. 39  as it were, a kitling, and sometimes three or four running up and down under the coverlet, wherewith the boy was covered, as he lay upon his bed, they did suddenly cast up the said coverlet, to see what was under it: but still the supposed forms of kitlings were vanished away.  
And is it then possible, that when he had grasped one of the said Kitlinges in his hand, that he should neither think, nor regard to see and try what he had hold of?  
But of all the examples wherein Master Darrelles courage hath appeared, there remaineth one pertinent to the point in hand, wherein he showed himself a man: regarding, or weighing the presence of five or six devils no more, 
M. Darrell. ad. art. 6, pag, 223.  then if there had been but so many Butterflies. I very well remember (saith he) that at one time whilst some were busily catching at the Devil or spirits, 
M. Darrell ad art. 6, pag, 223,  under the coverlet where Somers lay, and had so done for a good space, one saying here he is, an other, there he is, and so catching at them (there being five, six or seven spirits at that time there) I willed them to desist, saying, they were but wicked spirits, that had taken upon them certain bodies.  
They were but wicked spirits: a matter of nothing: M. Darrel's familiar acquaintances, and not to be feared. The truth was, that the boy was playing the knave with his hands, elbows, and knees, and other parts of his body under the coverlet: which Master Darrell could not choose but know, and therefore did what he could to prevent his detection.   

CHAP. III. How M. Darrell endeavoured to excuse Somers when he was taken short, and did such toys, as did argue him sufficiently to be but a counterfeit.  
WHen M. Darrell could not always so prevail, but that many upon divers occasions would be dealing with the boy in his fits: and thereupon perceived by their words, that they did collect by divers circumstances, that he had his senses, and so did dissemble: he the said Master Darrell was charged by her majesties said Commissioners, 
M. Darrel ad art. 11. pag. 224.  to have laboured by all the means he could with this excuse, and that excuse, how he might withstand and prevent that conceit and opinion. Somewhat to this purpose he himself confesseth: but more is deposed. I have at sundry times said, that Satan in his subtlety hath done in the boy some sleight and trifling things, at divers times, of purpose to deceive the beholders, and to bear them in hand, that he did never greater things in him: thereby to induce them to think, that he was a counterfeit.  
Whilst I was in these practices (saith Somers) divers would snatch at the spirit, 
Somers. pag. 21.  which they supposed to have been under the coverlet or clothes with me, and did thereby sometimes catch me by the hand, sometimes by my foot, and sometimes by my knee: which M. Darrell perceiving, and that some did thereby imagine that it was but my knavery, he told them that out of doubt it was the Devil that made those motions, and that he did sometimes put my hands or feet into their hands that catched at them, of purpose thereby to hinder the glory of God, which in this work he said, did manifestly appear. But when he was present, he would not suffer (as near as he could) any to catch at the said supposed spirits, nor to cast up the coverlet or clothes, as otherwise usually they did, to have seen the Devil, as they pretended.  
When Somers and M. Darrell had been deceived by the secret bringing of widow Boot the pretended witch into the chamber, where Somers lay in one of his fits: whereby they not knowing thereof, Somers lay quiet, both at her coming in, and at her going out: M. Darrell greatly misliking that practice when he knew of it, and perceived that some thereby supposed the boy to dissemble, did labour to persuade those that were present (saith Somers) that they should not so think or suspect: affirming it to be the devils practice, 
W. Somers pag. 23.  and that Satan would not of purpose vex me at those times as he had done before, that so he might (as much as lay in him) rob God of his glory, and blemish the great works which he did show in me.  
When Somers fell to his fits again after Christmas, 
Rob. Cooper. pa. 105.  I seeing him do and act certain foolish toys, was therewith discontented: and told Master Darrell before divers, that I verily thought the boy did dissemble. And Master Darrell gave me this answer: that such things as he did, were but the illusions of the Devil, assuring me, that he did not dissemble, but was again repossessed. And again: Master Darrel would always excuse the boy, 
Ro. Cooper pag. 299.  if he did any thing that might be thought to be counterfeit: saying, that it was the Devil that did the same, thereby to blemish the glory of God.  

M. Pare. fol. 5.  Being many times and often with the boy, I observed in him many foolish and frivolous gestures: which gave me some spark of suspicion of his dissimulation. For in all those fits, Master Darrell would say: let him alone, it is not he in deed, but the Devil that doth it: and upon the like occasions would further affirm, that the Devil endeavoured to darken the work of God.  

M. Pair, ibi.  Again, I heard Master Aldred charge the boy, to take heed that he did not dissemble: whereunto the boy answered, that he did not dissemble: for (saith he) I do not know of any strange things that you say I have done: and thereupon Master Darrell said: let him alone, it is not he in deed, but the Devil that doth it. 
M. pare. 265  And again, Master Darrell did labour to persuade the people, and that in his Sermons, that when the boy had done something that might argue him to be a dissembler, it was but a practice of the Devil, thereby to blemish the glory of God.  

M. Aldred. fol. 6.  Master Darrell hath said before the boy, to such as have been meddling with him in his fits: let him alone, for it is not he, but the Devil, and that the Devil would hinder the glory of God, by all the means he could.  

M. Law: pag, 262,  I telling Master Darrell divers times (saith M. Lowe) that if the Devil were in Somers, I wondered that Somers could speak no language but English: Master Darrell answered me (as he did generally to my argument that was alleged of the boy's counterfeiting) that the Devil did it to hinder the glory of God in his dispossession.  
Being entreated by M. Euington to come to Garlands house, 
Geo, Richardson. pag, 270.  to see the boy in his fits, and to confirm me that he was not a counterfeit, because I had always doubted him so to be: I went thither, where I found Master Darrell, M. Dodde, M. Hildersham, M. Aldridge, M. Euington, and others. At my first coming into the house, I found the boy in no fit: but upon some few speeches used to him by the Ministers, he presently fell into one. In the which fit he continued a while, and then foamed exceedingly: whereat (quoth M. Darrell, and the rest of the ministers) mark I pray you, for this is the especiallest sign of his repossession. Hereupon suspecting something, I laid my head close to the boy's head, where I heard a kind of grating of somewhat betwixt his teeth, & then I told Garland the boy's keeper, that I thought something was in his mouth. Whereupon Garland, taking him by the hair of the head, and I by his mouth, we shook out of his mouth a piece of black lead, & thereupon he awaked out of his fit. Then quoth Master Aldridge, Will. hadst thou not a piece of black lead about thee, or in thy mouth: no quoth the boy. And upon this the foresaid ministers generally concluded, that it was a practice of the Devil, to throw the said black lead into the boy's mouth, thereby to choke him.  
In one fit I saw William Somers froth at the mouth very much, so as the foam roaped down into his neck: 
Edm. Garland. pa. 373.  and at one time I found a piece of black lead in his mouth.  
At one time I foaming (saith Somers) very much in my fit, 
W. Somers pag 33.  Edm. Garland upon some man's motion (as I suppose) would needs search if I had any thing in my mouth: and I confess, that he found there a piece of black lead, which I had put into my mouth, that thereby I might foam in more abundant manner.  
Some other examples might be brought of M. Darrel's shifting devices, to preserve the boy's credit, or rather his own. For this course was usual with him, insomuch as when he was absent, & that the boy did any thing that went a wry, his scholars were so cunning, that they were able to coin him some excuses.  
Edward Freeman, 
Ed. Freeman. pag. 299,  going one morning with two or three Shoemakers to Garlands house, and perceiving that whilst he was there, Somers would not fall into any of his fits, he departed, being desirous that the Shoemakers (who had never seen him) should then see a fit: and at his departure he told them, that as soon as he was gone, they should see him in one.  
This Freeman was one, to whom Somers before had confessed his counterfeiting, and therefore he forbore his fits whilst he was present. But he was no sooner out of the doors almost, when he fell to his pranks. Now at the said Freeman's departure, Mistress Aldridge affirmed, that the Devil would not show any thing to them that did not believe.  

M. Craven. pag. 258  Likewise when M. Craven twitching Somers by the finger in one of his fits: he the said Somers cried: Oh who is that that nips me? One Wilkinson to excuse the matter said, that it might be the Devil was then leaving him, when Master Craven began to nip him.   

CHAP. FOUR How contrary to M. Darrel's assertion, Somers had his senses & understanding in his fits.  
THere is no building be it never so strong, that will long continue, if the foundation be not sure. He is therefore accounted a very unwiseman, that will build either upon the sands, or upon hollow & false ground. which point of good architecture or husbandry, if Master Darrell had well learned, he would never have set the frame of all his cozening practices, upon that moist and marish conceit, that Somers in his fits was altogether senseless. For beside, that none of his fellow Devil drivers was ever so absurd, as to maintain his position in that behalf generally, his weak ground in this particular of Somers is shaken and overthrown, by many depositions.  
The chief deceit to blear all their eyes at Nottingham, 
Rob. Cooper. pa. 106.  was the persuasion beaten into them by M. Darrell, that Somers was senseless in all his fits, & that when he spoke, it was not he, but the Devil that spoke in him.  
George Noble allegeth three reasons, why he thought Somers to have his senses in his fits, and consequently, 
Geo. Noble. pag. 278.  to dissemble in pretending the contrary. The first is, because (said he) that Somers dancing upon a bed, and a window being somewhat low, that would have hurt him, if he had not taken some heed of the same, he the said Somers would still be looking carefully at the said window lest he should chance to hit it, and so hurt himself. Secondly, in that a Londoner being by, and bidding him the said Somers to serve God: he the said Somers bade him get him into his country: and after being asked by the said Londoner where that was, he bad him scoffingly, go look. Thirdly, he also then heard, that one should bid him put up his shirt, then hanging out at his knee, whilst he was dancing upon his bed, and he did so.  

Nich Shepard. pag. 205.  Upon the Sunday in the morning I went again to see Somers, where after I had a while remained, & that the boy was dancing, leaping, and playing divers tricks upon his bed, it happening that his shirt hanging out of his knees, and speaking of it to one Rhodes, that stood by me, he the said Somers as he was leaping & dancing in his said fit, did with his hand pull up his shirt, whereby I, together with Peter Rhodes, George Noble, john Rhodes, and Thomas Freeman perceived, that the boy had sense in that fit, contrary to M. Darrel's saying over night.  

Pet. Rhodes pag. 280.  Upon the Sunday morning, after that M. Darrell came to Nottingham; I went to see Somers, and the house being full, he began his tricks, and as he was dancing and leaping, his shirt did hang out of his hose, and he put his hand in at his codpiece, & pulled it up: and as he ran backward, he looked behind him how near the wall was for hurting himself.  

M. halam. fol. 8.  It was constantly received (saith M. halam) that Somers in his fits had neither sense, memory, nor understanding: which he refelleth: First, because he answered directly unto certain questions when he was in his fits, as being asked whether a certain woman could see, he said she could: being asked how a Sow was killed, he answered, that a wain ran over her. Secondly, for that staring with his eyes (when I made as though I would have put my fingers into them) he the said Somers winked. Thirdly, because Somers lying quiet when mother Boot was brought in by me, I perceived, that at such times as Somers showed himself to be troubled, at the coming in of witches, he knew of their coming before hand.  
M. Craven setteth down this position, that Somers being in his fits, had the use of all his senses. And he proveth the same by five or six reasons: 
M. Craven. pa. 258.  the sum whereof followeth. First, because Somers remembered what he said in his fits, and was afraid, which showed to him to have both memory and fancy. Secondly, for his outward senses, as for seeing, in that I have been many times present, when the boy hath raised himself upon his bed being in his fits, to see who came in at the door, and hath named them as they entered, and jested upon them: also he would spy if any children stood near the bed, and at them especially he would many times leap and make faces, and laugh exceedingly when he saw them afraid. Thirdly, touching hearing, because the boy would many times talk merrily with the bystanders, and answered any man directly to any question he would propound. Fourthly, concerning smelling, for that a Gentlewoman coming in, who had civette, and sweet powder (which yielded indeed a sweet savour) oh (sayeth the boy in one of his fits) what a sweet smell is here? Fiftly, for his sense of feeling, in that being pricked with a pin before the Commissioners at Nottingham into the leg, he suddenly plucked it up: and because the same day in an other fit, I made him to cry out with a twitch of his little finger, & he said, oh what is it that nips me?  
Somers in one of his fits, whilst I was present, 
Th. Hayes. pa. 317.  did laugh exceedingly: and I demanding of him when his fit was ended, what moved him so to laugh, he told me, it was because the Devil showed him a bag of gold, and told him he would give it him. etc. which moved me to think that he understood and remembered what he did, or suffered in his fits.  
His taunting and using of slanderous speeches (when he was in his fits) against such as he liked not, 
Edm. Garland, fol 4.  might easily be observed to proceed from his own ordinary lewd invention, beside, many lewd and gross gestures, not fit to be mentioned. Again, where it was said, he had no sense in his fits, I have heard him diverse times being in his fits, call many by their true names, and describe others by nicknames, so as it appeared, he had both sense and understanding. With Garland also do agree in effect word for word, M. Parr, M. Aldridge, M. Aldred, and john Sherrart.  

M. Low. pa. ●62.  By Summer's answer unto me in these words: Ah sirrah, you think I counterfeit, I resolved myself, that he had sense, and understanding in his fits, as at other times also I had observed in him.   

CHAP. V Of the motions and knockings which were heard and seen about Somers in his fits, that they were done and made by himself, and were not as M. Darrel hath reported, extraordinary or supernatural.  
IN the Certificate to the L. Archbishop of York, from the Commissioners at Nottingham, the knocking and motions about Somers in his bed, were certified amongst the extraordinary actions done by him in his fits. M. Darrell termeth them extraordinary, and supernatural actions: and in his Apology writeth of them in this sort. Hereunto, add that most rare accident that happened under the coverlet, where Somers lay. There were certain things, sometimes 4. or 5. at one instant, stirring and moving under our hands, as if they had been kitlinges, whelps, or such living creatures: the coverlet being suddenly cast up, they vanished away, but thrown down, they were presently there again.  
He that once hath passed the limits of modesty, doth easily grow in short time to be impudent. What Somers himself hath said hereof, together with some other fooleries of M. Darrelles, you may peruse in the fourth Chapter of the second book, and what is deposed, doth here ensue.  
Having heard of many wonders, 
M. halam fol. 8.  of certain knockings in Summer's bed, I was very desirous carefully to observe the same: so as one night about twelve of the clock, Somers being waken, I heard this noise somewhat dully, and thinking it to be about the beds feet, I conveyed my hand into the bed very secretly and softly, and on the sudden laid my left hand on the boy's feet, and there felt one of his toes, slipping down from the other, which was the very knocking at that time. After which time the boy never used the like knocking in my presence.  
For motions, I have been oftentimes there, 
M. Craven fol. 14.  when others have said, they have felt the quantity of a Mouse, moving and panting under their hands: but myself, though I have often endeavoured to feel, and presently followed the hands of them, that said they felt, could notwithstanding, never perceive any thing. For the knocking, I have also heard it &c. notwithstanding, I more wondered at the boys cunning, then at the devils dancing. Again, this Devil was of a strange constitution, palpable to some, but visible to none. And again, I have discovered the slight of his juggling in many things: as when the noise of four or five knocks were heard together in manner of a chime, I found one of them to be his finger thrust under his thigh, as he lay upon his back: which thing I would have showed unto the people, had not the boy by force of his thigh wrested it from me, and turned himself hastily upon his belly, whereupon the Chime for that night ceased.  

M. Barnard fol. 12  For any likeness or shape, or motion of any bodily substance, to be seen or felt above or under the coverlet, I utterly deny it: except it were the body or parts of the body of the boy, who lying always under a coverlet, might be the sleight and nimble motion of some parts of his body, deceit the eyes of the beholders.  

George Richardson fol. 202,  Touching the likenesses of Kitlinges moving in Summer's bed, I have heard much wonder thereof, and at one time Thomas Slater being with me, we beheld a thing move and roll under the coverlet, whereupon Slater catched it in his hands, and drew his dagger of purpose to stab it, and presently we turned up the clothes, and it was the boys foot, which I know to be true, because I was present at the feeling and doing thereof. Again, to the tapping and rapping, I have heard the same, and did upon the hearing of it, imagine that it was the fillipping of one toe with another upon the bed, and sometimes with his fingers as he found occasion, which I suspecting, did at my going to bed secretly practise it. And it fell out to be so agreeable with that which the boy did, as my wife being in bed with me, was on the sudden in great fear, that Summer's spirit had followed me.  

Ed, Garland pag  Catching on a time at that which I saw move the clothes, I got hold of it, and offering to cast up the clothes, to see what I had in my hand, it slipped from me, and I did then suspect, and do now believe it to be true, that the thing I had hold of was the boys privy members, and that I offering to pull up the clothes, he shrinking in his bed pulled them out of my hand, I not holding fast, 
Edm. Garland. p. 301  because I then suspected so much, Again, Somers lying at my house, I found him in a plain trick of dissimulation, uz. he lying in a bed, and I hearing a knocking at the bed's feet, stepped hastily to the place, and catched the boy by the toes, which I perceived to have made the former knocking, and then I said, this is a counterfeit knack indeed: Whereat Somers laughed.  
For the knocking and tapping, I have oft heard the same, 
Rob. Cooper. fo.. 17.  & now verily think, that it was done by the boys own devise, which I did not formerly conceive, for that I gave too much credit to the opinion and learning of M. Darrell.  
Touching the rapping about Summer's bed, 
M Aldred fol, 6.  I and M. halam came to the beds side and heard it: and afterwards conferring together privately M. Hallams opinion was, that it was nothing else, but the tapping of one of his toe nails upon an other.  
I have heard sometimes a tapping about the boy's bed, 
M Pare, fol, 5,  which I verily think was either the fillipping of his fingers, or some motion with his toes. Again, touching a matter of substance, which moved in his bed, I did once catch hold of it, and grasped it in my hand, and I do think, that it was either his knee or his thigh.  
I saw a thing move in the boy's bed, and laid my hand on it, 
Marry Cooper. fol, 1.  but it got from me I know not how. The second time I catched at it under the clothes, and something pulled my hand very strait, and held it fast, and I think it was my brother's hand: for that I complaining of the hurt I had, he fell a laughing at me: and at that time both his hands were in the bed.   

CHAP. VI How Somers casting himself into the fire, was voluntary, and no extraordinary matter, as M. Darrell hath pretended.  
AMongst the admirable works of William Somers, his casting into the fire, 
M. Darrell, Apolo.  hath no mean reputation. M. Darrell telleth us in his Apology: that the boy being cast into the fire, his hands sometimes were in the fire, and that sometimes his face did lie there a while, and yet that he was not burnt at all. Omitting some other reports, as of likelihood condemned by himself, uz. that lying in the fire, neither his freeze jerkin, nor his hair touching the burning coals, were so much as singed. But Somers himself, who should know somewhat hereof, deposeth as followeth.  

Somers. pag. 37.  As touching the report of my casting into the fire, without any hurt or singeing either of my hair or apparel, this is the truth therein. Because the words of casting into the fire, do seem to import much. First I say, that the fires in my Mistress' house, and then afterwards in my father in laws, were but very small, made of slate coals, and so compassed at the ends and forepart with bars of iron, that except I should have thrust myself betwixt the said bars, and the wall, or have thrust my fingers betwixt the bars, I could not in any wise have cast myself into the fire. But I confess, that M. Darrell having told me out of S. Mark, and likewise having straightly warned such as kept me in my supposed fits, that they should be very careful to look unto me. I did cast myself now and then into the Chimney, or upon the irons or grates: but I never did so, but when there was company by, that would pull me out presently, and then also, did it with such wariness, as I was sure, that rather than fail, I might help myself. And for the singeing neither of my hair nor apparel: when I cast myself into the fire, I had commonly either my hat or cap on, which might keep my hair if my head had touched the fire. And touching my apparel, it is untrue that it was not singed, for the wings and skirts of my freeze jerkin did show the contrary. For my manner was so to fall into the Chimney, as that sometimes my shoulders only should touch the grate, and sometimes my buttocks only, whereby the wings, shoulders, and skirts of my jerkin, were apparently singed. But I wearing then old leathern breeches which were greasy, they indeed took little hurt. And more than this in effect, whatsoever is reported, I say it is false. Unto this deposition of Summer's divers other testimonies may be added. One thing amongst others, (sayeth M. Bernard) I saw William Somers act very foolishly. 
M. Barnard, pag. 255.  He standing by his sister in the Chimney, suddenly clapped his buttocks upon the fire by her, having on a very good strong pair of leathern breeches, and in his falling down, he did not clap himself right on the fire, but reeled on the one side, & was snatched up immediately: which I seeing so vainly done, I went away fully resolved of the boys villainous dissimulations, and could never after be entreated to see him any more. Somers at the end of one of his fits suddenly starting up, went backwardly to the fire, 
james Alwood pa. 289.  and fell down with his shoulders on the fire, but no man stepping to him, he tumbled quickly out again of himself. Hereunto also appertaineth that which is set down in the first Chapter of the third Book, concerning his voluntary falling into the fire at S. john's, to the admiration of those that were present, and knew not the compact betwixt him and Nicholas Shepherd.   

CHAP. VII. Of Summer's pretended strength and weight in his fits, that contrary to M. Darrelles and his friends reports, there was nothing extraordinary in them.  
AS touching the pretended strength of Somers in his fits, it hath been reported & avowed: that three or four had enough to do to hold him: that four or five had much a do to hold him: & that some times three, sometimes four, and sometimes six could scarcely hold him. 
M. Darrell, Apolo.  And M. Darrell enlarging the matter above the warrant of his authors, sayeth: that his strength was often such, that sometimes six men could not rule him, had much ado to hold him, could scarcely hold him. Had enough to do to hold him, (say his witnesses): could not rule him, sayeth M. Darrell. He hath so used his tongue to deceit, as hardly he can report any thing truly. Somers hath dealt since his examination at London much more sincerely and particularly in this matter.  

W. Somers pag. 39  Concerning my supposed extraordinary strength, (sayeth he) in that it is said, that three or four, five or six, and sometimes seven men using their whole strength, were much troubled to hold or carry me, I think indeed that I seemed divers times to be more strong than I was: because I often perceived that they were greatly afraid, who took upon them either to hold or carry me. Insomuch as at sometimes I have so skarred sundry with my looks, as they have started from me. Again, I also so seemed, for that they (being many that toiled themselves about me) much hindered one an other by pulling of me contrary ways. Besides, for one of my years and bigness, I have a reasonable strength, and do think it no great matter to trouble four or five, that should take upon them to carry me: as I did those that took upon them to carry me to Smalles' house, the morning before the fast. It hath also been reported, that when I have seemed senseless, that I have not breathed, that my pulse hath not moved, and that I have been cold, as though I had been dead: they might as well I think, have said, that I was dead, and that M. Darrell hath restored me to life again. That therefore which hath been given out touching my pulse, my coldness, and my not breathing, is utterly untrue. I confess that the time of the year was very cold, when I did practise those fits, and I being for the most part in my doublet and hose, could not choose but be often very cold. But of these last points, as by the way: his supposed extraordinary strength is the thing in hand: whereof there are these subsequent depositions.  
Sometimes Somers would make show of great strength, 
Ed. Garland fol. 4.  when being proved by me, it was but ordinary according to his person. And again, whereas it was reported, 
Edm. Gar. pag. 301,  that Somers had extraordinary strength, I found him often of easy strength, and to make show of greater strength then in deed he had.  
I saw and heard great admiration of the boy's strength and weight, and seeing one attempting to lift him, 
M. Foster fol. 18,  was tossed and sweat much therewith, I for my satisfaction endeavoured to lift him up in his fit, and did it very easily: neither finding nor perceiving any supernatural strength or weight in the said boy.  
I was at Garlands house with the boy, where were present M. Darrell, M. Euington, M. Aldridge, M. Hildersham, 
Geor Richardson, fol, 20.  & M. Dod, & some others: & there some one said, it is given out that this is counterfeit, and therefore let us see him that doth think so, now to try his strength. Whereupon M. Euington called out me, (because he heard my opinion thereof before) and bade me try the boy's strength. And so said, the boy was in a fit, and presently thrust down his leg as stiff as might be, and I came to him & heaved at him & lifted him up. The ministers asked me what weight he was, & I answered, that I had lifted an hundred and an half with more ease in my youth: yet do I not think him to be of that weight. Then they bade me to bow the boy's leg: and I seeing how he had stretched it out, set my knee to his knee, and then bended his leg backward at my pleasure.  

M. Pair, 264.  Hearing of the boys extraordinary strength, I thought good to try it: and upon proof, found it to be but ordinary: and so likewise for his weight, I could never perceive it to be extraordinary.  

Rob. Coop. pa. 291.  I have often proved the boy's strength in his fits, but never found it to be but ordinary. And I have oftentimes, when he hath fallen upon the floor, taken him up myself, and laid him upon the bed, never perceiving him either to be extraordinarily strong or heavy.  

Edw. Freeman. pag, 299.  Towards the evening, the boy making show as though he would throw himself into the fire, I catched at him, and notwithstanding the great strength & weight that he was supposed to have, uz. that four or five could scarce stir or hold him, I threw him easily upon the bed, which when the boy perceived, and that he was in my hands, to whom he had before discovered his counterfeiting, he presently cried out: Lord have mercy upon me, and gave over his fit.  

M. halam. fol. 8.  Being with Somers one night, after his knocking had been discovered, he assaying to heave up his body in a marvelous manner, and I endeavouring to keep him down, could not do it: but looking more nearly unto him, I espied that he supported himself with his legs & shoulders, wherefore putting my hand into the bed, & taking his legs from under him, he came down quickly & with ease. More to this purpose may be seen in the fourth Chapter of the second book, how the boy by shrinking down, and standing close to him that assayed to lift him, made show of greater strength, and weight than he had.   

CHAP. VIII. Summer's knowledge in his fits was not extraordinary, as M. Darrell and his friends have falsely pretended: neither could he speak Greek, Hebrew, or Latin, otherwise than he had learned.  
THe author of the brief Narration, to prove that Somers had extraordinary knowledge: and thereby to enforce that he was possessed, the same his knowledge proceeding from Satan that was within him, doth tell us, that Somers in his fits spoke of things done in his absence, at the instant when he spoke them: as that (saith he) of the examination of Millicent Horsley, and of M. Darrel's & M. Aldriges coming, unknown to any there present. These examples which the Narrator allegeth, being mere untruths, & cozenages, M. Darrell (it seemeth) is in his Apology ashamed of them, and therefore he omitteth them. Or if not so, his fault is the greater, in that he hath so set down this matter, as though it had been much more wonderful, then by the said examples it could be well induced. For thus he reporteth it: His knowledge was such, that by virtue thereof, he told of those things which were done and spoken divers miles of him, at the same instant they fell out, and foretold things to come. From hence also it was, that divine like he continued his speech, in expounding the Creed for an hour together. Who would not think by these general terms, that the boy had been a kind of Prophet? But they are (be you sure) a couple of false seducers, and counterfeit companions: it being impossible, (if they were not mad) but that they should write these things, against their own consciences, and of purpose for their own reputations, to abuse their Readers.  
Concerning the boys divine-like expounding of the Creed, the truth thereof hath been showed in the first Chapter of this book: and for the rest, how ridiculous it is, that which ensueth will declare and make manifest. And first, as touching this foretelling of M. Darrel's coming to Nottingham. Besides, that the boy understood by Hugh Wilson, and by other speeches of diverse persons, (to omit the compact betwixt them of his promised repair, when Somers could so act his fits, as he should be thought thereby to be possessed) that M. Darrell was still expected, 
W. Somers, pag. 9  he sayeth thus, for his said pretended extraordinary knowledge. As M. Darrell was coming, one overtaking him upon Trent bridge, and overgoing him, reported in Nottingham that M. Darrell was coming, which report being brought to the house where I lay, I heard thereof, and did also perceive, that he was coming by their looking out, and by the speeches of some others, that ran forth to see him. Whereupon I did say, that M. Darrell was coming: which words of mine, they that were present & heard them, took them (as it seemeth) to be miraculous, because M. Darrell had sent word by Hugh Wilson (but falsely) that in my fits, I heard no more than a block, which conceit I did nourish as much as I could, during the time of all my counterfeiting. And more than this, concerning this supposed wonder of my foretelling of M. Darrel's coming, I deny to be true.  
Now, for his supposed skill in foretelling of M. Aldridges' coming unto him, 
Summer's pa. 36.  and so of divers which might as well have been added, I protest (saith Somers) that this is the truth which ensueth, whatsoever is given out to the contrary. There were for the most part divers in the place, where I did lie, when I was in my fits: and some of them would be commonly looking out at the windows, and as they saw any Preacher coming, or any other man of note, they would say amongst themselves, one to an other, that such a man, naming him, was coming. Whereby I still over hearing them (they supposing me to hear nothing at all) I did oftentimes then say, that such a man was coming, and likewise named him: which they always thought through M. Darrel's instructions, to be done by the Devil, they supposing me to be possessed.  
And thirdly, as touching the report of his skill, concerning Millicent Horsley, thus also Somers himself doth depose. It hath been given out, that I, having before named Millicent Horsley for a witch, should tell the time, 
ibid.  and the words that she uttered, when she was examined before one M. Parkins, a justice of the peace, and others, four miles distant from Nottingham, where I than remained: the truth whereof is thus: Master Darrell told my father in law, and others in my hearing, that he the said Master Darrell, Master Aldred, and some others, were going to carry Millicent Horsley (that present morning) to the said Master Parkins, to be examined. Whereupon, I guessing by the time of Master Darrel's departure, and by the distance of the way, and of the likelihood that she would deny herself to be a witch, said to those that were present by me in one of my fits, about eleven of the clock, that then Millicent Horsley was in examining, and that she denied herself to be a witch. Hereof when Master Darrell at his return was certified, he accounted it a great wonder, affirming, that I had truly spoken, both concerning the time, and the witch's words. And then he and others took upon them to write divers things about that matter, which I had never thought of: as that I had foretold, that the said witch was picking of her toes, when they came to her house in the morning: and that she denying to go with them, they were compelled to draw her forth by force: which things they also said, were true. Howbeit, I did very well know, that I had never spoken of them: but I was content to let them say what they list, because such reports did give the more credit to the rest of my doings. And whereas one jone Pie hath deposed before the Commissioners, authorized from the Lord Archbishop of York, that I made mention of Millicent Horsleyes' examination, about one of the clock in the afternoon, I do not think, that therein she deposed truly, or at the least I think Master Darrell at his return, signifying, that the said Millicent was in examining, about one of the clock, did thereby make her the said jone to imagine, that it was about that time, when I had spoken of the said Millicent Horsley.  
But I marvel, why some other examples of my supposed wonderful knowledge of one Beresforde, whom I was thought never to have seen before: notwithstanding, that about a year or more than past, I went with the said Beresforde towards Chesterfielde. Whereupon, when he came unto me in my supposed fits, I named unto him certain styles in the way: and some other things, whereof we had spoken, as we were going together: as that he should have been a schoolmaster, and that he was going to his brother, etc. which things Master Beresforde, confessing to be true, it was reckoned for a miraculous matter: the rather because he affirmed, that he had never seen me before, neither was it known to any then present, that I had ever been in his company.  
Likewise, it might here have been added, how I told one of the jailers, (as I remember) of the Queen's prison, how much money he had in his purse: which happened in this sort: I desired to borrow six pence of one Henry Ball that stood by me: who presently said to the rest of the company, that I had truly told him what money he had in his purse, and that he had in deed but six pence in it. Whereupon quoth one of the said jailers (leaning upon Henry Balls shoulder by my bed's head,) If he can tell me how much money I have in my purse, I shall then verily think that he hath a Devil in him. And so the said jailor telling Ball softly in my hearing (whom they supposed always to be senseless in my fits) that he had three shillings in his purse, and no more, he did then ask me what money he had in his purse: and I told him he had three shillings: which seemed to be a very strange matter to all that were present. And thus far Somers himself, of his own extraordinary knowledge. Now let us hear what is deposed of this matter.  
Four things are worthy the marking (saith Master Craven.) First, 
M. Craven, fol, 14.  that the boy never cried (in my hearing) at the approach of any person accused, but either when some noise was made about the door, whereby he might guess of her coming, or else some body told aloud in the house, that the Witch was coming.  
Secondly, that he would raise his head from the pillow at the coming in of every Witch, and be sure to see her within the house, before he fell (as they called it) into his sleeping trance.  
Thirdly, that he cried sometimes, as though a Witch had been near at hand, when none was either coming, or sent for. As once when the Constable said, they would fetch one Morris wise, whom he had affirmed to be a witch, having a familiar, in likeness of a bird: upon a noise of people at the door, he cried out after his usual manner: which made every man present to look for the witches coming in: whereas the Constable upon some better advise, never went for her. Fourthly, that when a woman, accused for a witch, was closely brought in for an experiment by M. halam, (a minister of honest report) the boy neither cried at her coming or going, nor slept as he was wont whilst she stayed in the house.  

M. Aldridge pa, 88  I thought that Somers had named some for witches by an extraordinary knowledge, being therein confirmed by Master Darrel's speeches, of the detection of certain witches by some in Lancashire. But now because he named none for witches, but such as were commonly reputed so before, and for that Somers saith, he had no other knowledge whereby he named them: I rather think it to be true, which the boy affirmeth, then that he had any extraordinary knowledge of them. And again, at one time, 
M. Aldridge pag. 234.  I came to Robert Cooper's house when the boy was in a fit, & there was brought into the house widow Else of Carleton, formerly nominated by him to be a witch, and sent thither by M. Aldred (as I think.) Upon her coming, the boy grow to increase in his fit: but when she came near, and that he saw her, he became quiet. Whereupon I purposing to make trial, whether he dissembled in that point or no, took the widow Else away, and walked to the Church door, (which was about thirty yards distant from Cooper's house.) And after some stay made there, I returned to the house again, & brought the said woman close behind me: where we found the boy well & at meat. And after some few speeches with him (as ask him if he had any good meat, and whether I should eat with him: & he answering yea, if it pleased me) I moved my body awry: by means whereof, he viewing the woman that stood still close behind me all the while at my back, did fall presently into a fit.  
It is likewise proved by M. Hallams deposition, 
M. halam, fol. 8  that the boy had no extraordinary knowledge, as it was pretended. First, in that when a blind woman was taken in suspicion to be a Witch, he ask Summer's being in a fit, whether that Witch could see or no: he said she could: Secondly, in that when widow Boot was brought in and out, three several times secretly, he not knowing of it, neither altered either at her coming in, or going out, as otherwise his manner was.  
Now concerning Somers pretended extraordinary knowledge of diverse languages. M. Darrell was charged before her majesties said Commissioners, that he had very confidently affirmed, that the boy in some of his fits, did speak Latin, Greek, and Hebrew, in a very admirable sort. And he confesseth the same in effect to be true: But he is convinced of great oversight therein, by sundry depositions. What M. Darrell hath deposed, doth here ensue: and the witnesses to the contrary do afterwards follow.  
I have said that William Somers in some of his pretended fits, did speak some Hebrew, and Greek, 
M, Darrell ad art, 12, pa, 329,  being altogether ignorant in both those languages: but it was very little, that he so spoke. And in that he spoke no more, it did proceed from the subtlety of Satan, who if he had spoken much in that sort, should have made his own work in Summer's most manifest: and likewise I confess, that diverse questions being propounded in Latin to Somers, he the said Somers answered aptly in Latin so long, that he drive one speaking into him in that language, to a non plus, as I believe, being one that was no great scholar, although he the said Somers (as I believe) could not of himself have answered so in Latin.  
The said M. Darrell being here demanded, whether he was present, when the boy did speak either Hebrew, 
M Dar. ibid.  Greek, or Latin, answereth, that he was not: but sayeth, that the Greek words (which he doth not remember) were delivered unto him in writing, by a Master of Arts, one M Bernard: and the Latin words (which he hath also forgotten) by one john Wiggen: And touching the Hebrew, he sayeth, that he hath so heard, but knoweth not who told him, nor any thing of the certainty thereof. A man of such good parts as M. Darrelles friends do account him, would not have published such matters upon so slender grounds. And yet if he had said truly therein, his credulity might in some sort have excused him. Consider what is hereof deposed.  

Io. Wiggen. pa. 321  Whereas it hath been conceived, that I should report, that William Somers in his fits did answer in Greek, and Latin, to many questions demanded of him: for the speaking of Greek, I remember that one Master john Lowe spoke unto him in Greek, and he answered him nothing but laughed. And for his speaking of Latin, my meaning was, that Somers said: Ego sum Deus, Ego sum Rex: and sometimes, etiam, non, &, minime, and otherwise, not any saying, or sentence whole together.  

M. Bernard, pag 401  Albeit, (sayeth M. Bernarde) that I was oftentimes with Somers in many of his fits: yet he did never speak or pronounce any Hebrew, Greek, or Latin, at any time, when I was present. And with M. Bernard, do agree word for word in effect, M. Craven, and M. halam.  

M. Lowe, pag. 262,  I went to William Somers, of purpose to try, whether he could speak, or the supposed Devil in him, either Latin, Greek, or any learned language, that I might inform myself concerning the truth or falsehood of his pretended possession. Whereupon apposing him with divers questions in Greek, and in Latin, neither he the said Somers, nor the supposed Devil in him, did answer one word, either in Greek, or Latin, except etiam, or minime, or such like, without any fit relation to that which had been asked. And again, talking with Master Darrell diverse times about the premises, and telling him, 
Ibid.  that if the Devil were in Somers, I wondered that he could speak no languages but English: Master Darrell answered me, (as he did generally to any argument that was alleged of the boy's counterfeiting) that the Devil did it to hinder the glory of God in his dispossession.  
By the persuasion of Mistress Grace, 
M. Leigh pa, 266,  I did go to see William Somers with this resolution, that if he had (as it was reported) a Devil in him: the Devil having the use of his tongue, could speak Latin, Greek, or any other learned language. Whereupon, when I came unto him, I spoke in Latin, and asked an answer from him in Latin again: but he did not answer me any thing at all in Latin, but non, and nolo: which I perceiving, took him for a counterfeit, and so afterwards did always repute him.   

CHAP. IX. There was no impossibility in Summer's fits, as M. Darrell and his friends have falsely pretended.  
THe general plea of M. Darrell in his Apology, and of the author of the brief Narration, with the rest of his friends, in defence of himself, and to prove that Somers did not dissemble, is this: uz. that those things which he did in his fits, were impossible for him to have done by any natural or artificial power: and that therefore there was some supernatural cause of them, which was (sayeth Master Darrell) and evil spirit possessing him. For sayeth he further, if those things most strange, and admirable can be done by any humane skill, I deny not but he may be a counterfeit. For the better satisfaction therefore of the Gentleman, it may please him to peruse the last Chapter of the third Book, and there to consider, what his own witnesses upon their reexamination have deposed, touching these pretended impossibilities, and also to vouchsafe the reading of these depositions following.  

Rob. Cooper. pa. 106.  Now I consider without fear, what things the boy did in his fits: I think any other of his nimbleness and capacity may do the like.  

Nic. Shep. fol, 2,  I never did see any thing that Somers did, to make me to think, that it was supernatural. And again, I told M. Darrell, that Somers was no more possessed than I was myself: for (quoth I) I have seen him do all his fits, and I myself can do two more than he hath done. Why then (quoth M. Darrel) thou art possessed with a Devil: 
pa. 209,  to whom I answered, that he lied, and that I was as good a Christian as he.  

M. Craven▪ fol 14.  Notwithstanding, all the wonders by other men seen, and reported, it was never my hap, though often there, to see him do any thing, which an other boy that would have endeavoured himself to the like lewdness, might not easily have performed.  

M. Foster, fol. 18  I was but twice with Somers in all his fits, and at one of the same times, I well remember, that M. Aldred asked me my opinion, touching the truth or falsehood of the boy's repossession, whereunto I answered, that I saw nothing but it might be counterfeited.  

George Richardson fol. 20.  I was oft with the boy in his fits, and could never see any thing done by him, but I could do the like.  

M Aldred, pag. 246  Seeing Somers in his fits the fift of November, heaving up his belly, drawing his mouth towards his ears: scriching &c. I departed away persuaded that he was a counterfeit, and that he did nothing, but that which a boy noughtly disposed might do aswell as he.  
Standing near to the bed where Somers lay upon the day of his pretended dispossession, 
M Pare. pag. 264.  and well noting the manner of his present fits, I could not perceive any extraordinary thing to be done by the boy, but what any other might well have done, although M. Darrell did then endeavour to persuade the hearers present, that they were past the power of any natural man to do.  
Although (said M. Wallys, 
T. Wallys. pa. 268.  brother in law to M. Darrell,) I had diverse times heard, that the boy did things past the naturdll power of man: yet when I saw them, I could not perceive any such strangeness in them: and therefore I did forbear much to visit him.  
Seing William Somers upon the Saturday at night (before his pretended dispossession,) lie on his bed, gaping, struggling, 
james Alwood p. 289  and spurning, I observed that any body naughtily disposed, might have done the same.  
I never saw (sayeth Richard Newton, one of M. Darrel's chief deponentes) Somers do any thing, 
Rich. Newton.  but that a boy of his years might easily do.  
Whether these depositions will satisfy M. Darrell & his friends, it may be doubted, they are so strongly possessed with their own conceits: but to any reasonable men, they will be sufficient, to show the vanity of the foresaid pretended impossibilities.   

CHAP. X. How contrary to M. Darrel's and his friends assertions, William Somers was accounted by many in Nottingham, for a dissembler, from the time that he began his practices there, until he confessed the same himself.  
IT hath been falsely given out by M. Darrell and his friends, that there was no suspicion and report that Somers was a counterfeit, till about a month after M. Darrel's coming to Nottingham, and that then, he the said Somers, having detected a kinswoman of M. Freeman's for a Witch, he the said M. Freeman began to report that the boy was a counterfeit. For the truth is, that he was deemed for a dissembler, not only before M. Darrel's coming to Nottingham, but likewise aswell whilst M. Darrell dealt with him about his dispossession: as afterwards also in the whole course of his pretended fits, as by the depositions following it will appear.  
First therefore concerning the opinion held of Somers, before M. Darrel's coming to Nottingham. It being objected against M. Darrell before her majesties commissioners, that he was advertised upon his first coming thither, that he the said Somers was thought by many to be a dissembler: 
M. Darrell ad. art. 1. pag. 215.  he denieth the same: but that is deposed, as also that Somers was so reputed: and that he the said M. Darrell understanding thereof, laboured as much as he could to persuade the contrary.  

T. Porter, fol. 3.  At M. Darrel's coming to my house (saith Thomas Porter) on the Saturday at night, the fift of November, I told him, that it was reported by the townsmen, that the boy did counterfeit: and M. Darrell in the presence of the boy, and of many people there present answered: I do assure you, they that think so, shall see with their eyes the contrary.  
After three or four days, 
Ro. Cooper pag. 97.  that William Somers did begin to have fits, I did verily think that he did but dissemble: and when I could not persuade him to desist from that course, I did refuse afterwards to come to him for the space of a week or more, until M. Darrell came: by whose words I was drawn to be of his opinion, uz. that the boy was possessed: 
R. Cooper. pag. 199  for the which I am now very sorry, and that I was so deluded. And again, it was very generally received and thought, a fortnight before M. Darrel's coming to Nottingham, that the boy did dissemble.  
M. Aldred also departing, upon the fift of November, 
M. Aldred. pa. 246.  from Somers with this persuasion, that he was but a counterfeit, as before it is expressed in the former chapter, he further deposeth thus. The next day (sayeth he) I spoke with M. Darrell, who told me, that the boy was no counterfeit, but possessed with a Devil: and that he knew it by the signs in the boy, which were like to those signs that he had found in Katherine Wright, and in the seven. in Lancashire. And then and there, I did change my mind of the boy's counterfeiting, relying on the report, credit, and experience of M. Darrell only: and yet I did always doubt in my heart, that he did but dissemble.  
Indeed it was thought by many before M. Darrel's first coming to Somers, that the Boy did absolutely dissemble. 
Edm. Garland. pa, 246,   
Unto these depositions, all those witnesses may be added, who have testified that M. Darrel, the first three days that he came to Somers, endeavoured nothing more, then to persuade the people, that Somers did not counterfeit, but was indeed possessed, thereby to beat down the opinion of his dissimulation: which argueth directly that he was acquainted (as Porter hath deposed) with the said opinion.  
Secondly also, notwithstanding M. Darrel's peremptory assertions, and all his persuasions, for the first three days, and afterwards, that he came unto Somers, that he the said Somers did not dissemble, but was possessed, and afterwards assaulted to be repossessed: yet many still retained their former opinions that he was but a counterfeit, as the depositions, following do declare.  

Garland, pa. 197 & pa. 198.  M. Darrel, at his first coming to Somers, did signify to the people, that the boy did not dissemble, and made many speeches to assure them thereof: but yet many did still hold the contrary opinion. And again, M. Darrel in many of his sermons, and at sundry other times, hath related the manner of the boy's fits, before the dispossession, and at the dispossession: setting forth the manner and strangeness of them, and hath blamed such as would not believe the same, charging them with weakness of faith: And yet notwithstanding, sundry persons still held & affirmed, that the matter was but dissembled.  

T. Porter pa 198  M. Darrel, at his first coming to Somers at my house, both on the Saturday, Sunday, and Monday, did signify that the Boy did not dissemble, and in those times used many reasons and speeches to persuade the people there present, to think so: but all that notwithstanding, diverse persons still held opinion, that the boy did dissemble. 
Porter 199  And again, M. Darrell in many of his Sermons and other speeches, after the dispossession, urging that the Devil would seek to enter into the boy again, did blame those that would not believe that the boy was possessed, and dispossessed, and charged them with unbelief: and used many such like speeches: but yet all that notwithstanding, sundry persons still held opinion, that the boy did but counterfeit.  

Ro. Cooper pag. 200  When Somers was at my house, and made show that he saw the Devil, in this form, and that form: and that Master Darrell told the people, that he saw the Devil rolling under the coverlet, and expounded the knocking and tapping to be the evil spirit: Master halam, and some others began then to suspect the matter to be more strangely accounted of by Master Darrell, then in deed it was. And from thenceforth, many began to observe the boy's fits with less fear, and more circumspection: But at all times sundry persons still held opinion, that all was but counterfeited: whereat M. Darrell was continually much displeased. And again, M. Darrell in sundry of his sermons after the supposed dispossession, did blame those, who held that the boy did dissemble in his fits, both at the time of his dispossession, and at other times, charging them with unbelief, 
pag. 199.  and delivering speeches of scorn and disdain to satisfy them any further therein. But all this notwithstanding, many still held and affirmed, that it was but dissimulation.  
Likewise Peter Rhodes, George Noble, Thomas Freeman, and Nicholas Shepherd (as it is before deposed & mentioned) perceiving by the boys pulling up of his shirt, in one of his fits upon the Sunday morning, after M. Darrel's coming unto him, that he had his senses, they went their ways with this resolution: that for a certainty (as they thought) he was but a counterfeit.  
And thirdly, although M. Darrell, 
M. Darrell ad. art. 3. pag. 34.  when it was commonly given out in Nottingham, that Somers was a counterfeit, did (as he confesseth in his sermons) persuade his auditory (the best he could) to the contrary, affiming confidently that he was no counterfeie: and notwithstanding all that he could say and protest concerning Summer's fits, when Satan was seeking to repossess him, or any thing he did allege for his repossession, either before or since: yet the general opinion in Nottingham and thereabouts, then was & still doth continue amongst the discreter sort, that he the said Somers was in all his said practices a counterfeit dissembler.  
The depositions to this purpose do ensue. Master Craven saith, 
M. Craven. fol. 14  that upon the wonderful report of the boy's possession and dispossession, he could not at the first but think it to be true: which if he had seen, he should not perhaps have so lightly believed. But after his repossession (as they called it) I soon changed (saith he) mine opinion: First, because I never saw him do any thing, which an other lewdly disposed, might not easily have performed. Secondly, for that I discovered the sleight of his juggling in many things, uz. in playing his tricks under a coverlet. Thirdly, because the boy seeming weary of his service, did peradventure take this course to be rid of it: which I do conjecture, because that after he was released, he never had any fit (for aught I know) till upon an other discontentment, when he was bound over to the assizes for a Witch.  

M. Bernard. fol. 13.  Master Bernard yieldeth in like sort certain reasons, whereby he was induced to think, that Somers dissembled. The sum whereof is. First, because he had heard that Somers began the like fits four or five years before. Secondly, that being a prentice, he might thereby procure his liberty. Thirdly, because his counterfeiting was gainful. Fourthly, for that he being a proud boy, his pretended wonderful fits, did bring him great admiration, which pleased his humour. Fiftly, in that his latter fits were more lose, and not so cunningly handled as his first. And lastly, because in discovering of Witches, he named none but poor and base people, such as he thought he might be bold with. And again, seeing the boy act his fits vainly and ridiculously, 
M. Barnard. pag. 254.  I verily thought that all his doings were but villainies and knaveries.  

Ed. Garland pag. 301,  I observed many fits to be feigned by the boy, during the time that he was at my house: whereupon I held him, and accounted him afterwards for a counterfeit. 
M. Leigh. pag. 266,  And Master Leigh: When I perceived that the Devil, that was pretended to be in Somers, could speak no language but English, I took the boy for a counterfeit, and so always after did repute him.  
Having talked with William Somers, 
M Aldred. pag. 96.  and comparing together all things, which happened in the time of his supposed possession and repossession, and what hath been brought to light since, and considering the present estate of the boy, and divers particulars, whereof I have been now examined, I do verily think and believe in my conscience, that they were all in Nottingham, who thought the boy to have been possessed, and repossessed, very much abused diversly: and that the said Somers was but a dissembler in all the course of his said fits: and so consequently, that he was neither possessed by Satan, as it was imagined, nor dispossessed, nor repossessed.  
And the boy's father in law: I do verily think, 
Rob. Coop. pa. 106.  and believe in my conscience, that William Somers did counterfeit all that he did: that he was never possessed, dispossessed, nor repossessed: and that Master Darrell hath dealt very ungodly in all this cause, and either by compact or cunning, did draw on the said boy in his dissimulation, for what cause I know not, except it were for his own estimation: which I do verily suspect.  
These general depositions are further strengthened by sundry particular testimonies, in every Chapter almost of this book: especially in the fourth and fift Chapters, where it is proved, that the pretence of the boys want of sense in his fits, and the knockings and motions under a coverlet, were all mere fooleries and dissembled cozenages. Besides, although this treatise hath grown to be over tedious: yet very many things have been omitted, which would more fully have discovered Master Darrel's jugglings, and unconscionable practices. It is true, that less might have been sufficient in such a paltry matter: saving that many have been carried so headlong with a prejudicate opinion of as it seemed fit for their better satisfaction, to set out the same more at large, then otherwise it had been convenient.  
The end of the Fourth Book.    

The Fift Book.  
In this fift Book are discovered M. DARREL'S proceed with THOMAS DARLING, commonly termed, the boy of BURTON, & with one KATHERINE WRIGHT, concerning their pretended possession and dispossession: and likewise a new course which he had begun at Nottingham with the sister of WILLIAM SOMERS, one MARIE COOPER.  

CHAP. I. How M. Darrel's credit, touching his dealing with the boy of Burton, doth rely upon a false & foolish book, that was published of the said boys pretended possession and dispossession.  
ONe Thomas Darling of Burton upon Trent, beginning to be sickly in February, 1595. did afterwards take upon him to dissemble certain tricks: wherein continuing till the week before Whitsuntide following, he was deemed by M. Darrell to be possessed, and the next day after (as it is pretended) was dispossessed. From which time he continued well, by the space of about eight days, and then being at the school, he fell again to certain tricks, and persevered in them by starts two days, whilst it was pretended that Satan sought to repossess him. But since he hath left those practices. Of this whole matter, a story was afterwards published in print, and is of such credit with M. Darrell, and his adherents, as he the said Darrell doth account it in his Apology a great absurdity, to call the truth of it into any question. Darling is said to have counterfeited. 
M. Darrell Apolog.  I answer (saith M. Darrell) that, that can not possibly be. For in the book which is printed concerning him, it is reported etc. And again: To say that Darling counterfeited, is to deny the truth of the book printed: which for the substance of it, hath been offered to be confirmed by the oaths of a great many: and is still, if by authority they may be thereunto called. In one of his examinations he saith thus: I account that history to be true in substance, but I will not justify it in every circumstance. And being then demanded what he meant by substance, whether he thought that Darling was troubled & vexed, & had such dialogues with Satan in his fits, as the said book doth report: his answer is, that he so thinketh. 
jesse Bee. pag. 188.  Concerning therefore the credit of this book, it was penned by one jesse Bee, a sadler of Burton, allied by marriage unto the said Darling, in this sort: Darling having had many fits in my absence, sometimes I was informed of them by word of mouth, from those two that kept him, & sometimes I received some short notes. But for the most part, such informations as I had, were by word of mouth, both from the said keepers, & divers others. And when I was present myself at his fits, I took the notes of his speeches and other things which happened, which notes (when I came home) I joined together, as my memory would serve me: always studying rather to write them in better order, than the boy spoke them, then in worse: & rather binding myself to the sense of the boy's words, then to the words themselves. I also confess, that the boy's speeches were oftentimes delivered so fast one upon another, as I not being able to write the brief notes of them, one man would tell me one piece, and an other some other piece: which when I came home, I did still join together, as is before expressed. But I am not sure, that either they told me the truth directly, or that I have therefore written every thing as I should have done. And again, 
jesse Bee, pag. 192.  I do confess that in penning the said book, I did of purpose set down many points, to favour and give credit unto Thomas Darlings pretended torments: & that in all my speeches and dealings, I used to countenance, & make likely the boys pretended possession: wherein I confess myself to have been greatly overseen.  
Besides the said jesse Bee, being absent from Darling, by the space of a month, and at London, one Thomas Saunders procured the latter part of this book to be penned, and that in this order. He the said Saunders did take short notes in his tables, and when he came home, he did cause one Edward Wightman upon his report to set them down. Also upon the said jesse Bees return from London, the schoolmaster of Burton told him something, which he likewise thrust into the latter end of the book. So as (saith he) all these points touching my treatise considered: there may be for aught I know, very many untruths in it. This book being penned thus faithfully by jesse Bee and others, was afterward abridged by one M. Denison, 
M. Denizen 163.  a minister, at the request of M. Walkeden, Tho. Darlings grandfather. In doing whereof (saith M. Denison) after I had read two or three leaves together of the said treatise, I did set down the sum of them as my memory would serve me, leaving out many things, and adding sometimes of mine own according to the general sense, as I imagined. Furthermore, being fully persuaded by the constant reports which I had heard, that those things which were written by the boy, were in substance true: Paid in the contracting of the said book, very willingly amplify the boy's commendation: as well in respect of his own words, as also those speeches, which sometimes the beholders used of him: and I did bend myself to make many things appear more probable than they were in the written copy. As when I found such points, as I thought might seem absurd or repugnant one to another. I did of purpose leave them out: or else amended them as well as I could. For example: where it was in the written copy (at large) the boy's torments and afflictions in his fits were all of them no doubt mere illusions: I judging those words to cross the whole intent and meaning of the book, did of purpose leave them out of my Abstract. Again, where it is in the said written copy, of the boy's fits which he had the ninth of May, uz. Wilt thou give me whatsoever I will desire of thee, if I will give thee leave to enter into me again? Avoid Satan, thou wert in me late enough: all these words I purposedly omitted (as I think) for that they could not agree with the rest of the discourse of the boys fits before the supposed dispossession.  
Moreover, by reason that I did so much trust my memory in the contracting of this book, I perceive by comparing it with the written copy, that I have disordered some of the fits, and likewise the circumstance belonging unto them, ascribing that to one fit which did belong to another: as also some points of the boys supposed speeches to sathan are mistaken by me, & some displaced, altering the sense from the written copy.  

M. Denison ibid.  Besides these omissions, alterations, & mistake, confessed by M. Denison himself, it further appeareth that his abstract, falling afterwards into some huckster's hands, received some new additions. For saith he, whereas in the printed copy in the 15. page, it is said, that the party of whom mention is there made, did utter an oath: I do verily think that the same was added by the printer or some body else. Again, where it is said in the printed copy, pag. 39 (speaking how the boy was assaulted after his supposed dispossession) uz. here is to be noted, that howsoever sathan grievously assaulted him, yet did he not once torment him, because he was not as before in him: I confess that there were no such words in the written copy, nor believe that I of myself did add them, but am rather of opinion, that M. Darrell when he perused my abstract, having received it from M. Walkeden, did add them.  
The occasion that the abstract came into M. Darrel's hands, was this: I having sent the book abridged, 
M. Walk●den, pa 159  to have it printed at London, (sayeth M. Walkeden) I afterwards met upon occasion M. Darrell and M. Hildersham, & telling them of the sending of the said book to be printed, they desired me to send for it back, that they might have the perusing of it before it were printed, which accordingly I did, and upon the receipt of it back again, I sent it unto M. Darrell. And (as I think) both M. Darrell, & M. Hildersham had the perusing of it, and upon their approbation I sent it to London again to be printed. And M. Darrell himself confesseth, that he read, or at the least did hear the said Book red over, before it went to the press: and yet acknowledgeth upon diverse occasions, 
M Darrell ad art. 9 pag. 141.  as hereafter shall appear, that sundry points in it are untrue. Which being considered together with the premises, it may well be thought that M. Darrell writeth falsely, when he telleth us, that a great many would depose the said Book to be true, if they might be called thereunto by authority, and that the credit of it notwithstanding, Darling may well enough be judged a counterfeit. Besides, it is here likewise to be observed, that for aught which hitherto hath appeared upon any deposition, M. Darrell did himself never see Darling in above one fit. So as all those particulars that are grounded upon his experience, how the devil dealt with the boy of Burton, and whereof he made so oft mention, in his practices with Somers, do in effect all of them, depend upon that corrupt and false and ridiculous treatise.   

CHAP. II. Of M. Darrel's rashness in affirming Thomas Darling to be possessed, and of his cunning instructing him, how to behave himself upon the day of his pretended dispossession.  
Whilst M. Darrell was instructing of Somers at Ashbie by fits, this matter of Thomas Darlings fell out at Burton, about a year and a half before Somers was ready for him. And it seemeth it was so acceptable unto him (having been out of work from the pretended dispossession of Katherine Wright, uz. for about nine or ten years,) as that he thrust himself into it somewhat grossly. For being at Burton upon occasion, about a month before the pretended dispossession of Darling, and before he had seen him in any fit, he gave it out, that he thought him to be possessed, upon the bare report of one Robert Toone the boy's uncle, concerning the manner of his troubles: not doubting (as it seemeth) but that (being the only man of note in the Country, that had skill in casting out devils,) he should again be employed, if he could procure that the boy might be thought to be possessed. This his rashness being objected unto him, before her majesties said Commissioners, he denieth it: but the same is proved as followeth.  

Rob. Toon pa. 171  About a month before Thomas darlings pretended dispossession, john Darrell upon the day of the common exercise at Burton, came with M. Hyldersham, M. More, (as I think) and diverse other Preachers unto my house, to see the said Darling: but at the time of their being there, he had no fits. Whereupon I did relate unto M. Darrell, and the rest of the said preachers, the manner of the boy's fits: and then M. Darrell answered, that his opinion was, the boy was possessed. But M. Hildersham, & M. More (as I remember) did say, that they were of an other opinion, and asked of M. Darrell his reasons, why he thought the boy to be possessed. And then the Preachers said, they would confer further about the matter.  
Touching this conference mentioned by Toone, it should seem, it was had by the said ministers before their departure from his the said Toones house, and that M. Darrell did so far prevail therein, as he did not only persuade them, that the boy was possessed, but resolved with them of a fast to be had at Burton for his dispossession: which resolution was altered upon a very light accident. 
jesse Bee. pag. 188  The third of May, 1596. (sayeth jesse Bee) M. Hildersham, M. Darrell, and divers other Ministers (having kept an exercise that day at Burton,) came unto Thomas Darling: unto whom M. Hildersham used some short godly speeches, the rest being altogether silent, and not offering either then, or afterwards to speak to the boy. At this time, as it should seem, the ministers had resolved to have held a fast at Burton, for the recovery of the boy: but they altered that their determination (as I have been informed either by goodwife Toone, or by mine own wife,) for that (as the Ministers thought) one being present, when they were with the boy, did laugh at them, wherein they were deceived, the cause of the laughter being this. Whilst M. Hyldersham was in his prayer, I did set my knee upon the leg of M. hastings Grisley, who thereupon smiling, willed me to remove my knee, saying, that I did hurt him. And this was the laughter that hindered the said fast, as I was informed.  
Afterwards darlings friends having taken diverse courses in the boy's behalf, it was resolved that M. Darrell should be sent for, and accordingly at the request of M. Walkeden, M. Darrell himself confesseth he went to Caldwal, 
M. Darrell ad. art. 2. pag. 39  where the boy then lay. Before whose coming thither there was (as it seemeth) great expectation, that he would work wonders, as partly it may appear by these words of Darling. About three or four days before M. Darrel's coming, I heard that one should come from Ashbye, 
T. Darling pa. 49.  as without doing me any hurt should relieve me. It is here also to be noted, that the said Darling deposeth.  

Darling, ad ad art. 7. pag. 120.  That although he had heard it commonly supposed, that he was bewitched, and that the Witch herself had confessed as much: yet he did never think himself to be possessed with a wicked spirit, until M. Darrell had so affirmed to his Grandfather. And true it is, that upon the examination since of some of the boy's friends, touching his counterfeiting, so they might have said, that the boy was bewitched, and did not therefore dissemble those things he did: for his possession or dispossession, that they would not stand upon.  

T. Darling. pa. 71.  But to proceed with M. Darrell. Being come to Caldwall, he no sooner saw the boy in a fit, but presently he affirmed him to be possessed, as Thomas Darling hath deposed, and as he himself in effect hath confessed: saving (that to set some little colour upon the matter) he sayeth (but untruly) that he had first seen him have three or four fearful fits, before he so affirmed. If he had done so, yet the same had not been any sufficient ground for that rash assertion, as it hath been declared in the first book and fift Chapter. Now for the better persuasion of the boy's friends, that he was possessed, and likewise that the boy might have an example, (as it seemeth) to imitate, he told them as he was charged in his hearing of Katherine Wright: who having been possessed, was troubled in such sort, as he the said Darling had been troubled. This Master Darrell denieth: 
M Darr. ad art. 3. pag. 139. Dart. pag. 71.  but hereof the boy deposeth thus. Master Darrell told divers in my hearing that were then present, of a certain woman, whom he affirmed to have been possessed, and said: that she in the time of her possession had some such fit as I had endured. He also at the same time repeated (as he was charged) in the boys hearing, what were the signs, both of possession, and dispossession, mentioned in the scriptures: whereby Darling might learn, what he was to act and practise the next day, when he was to be dispossessed. These points, 
M. Darr. ad art. 4. & 5. pag. 139. Darling pag. 71.  M. Darrell also denieth: But Darling deposeth thus unto them: M. Darrell then also repeated unto them the signs of possession mentioned in the scriptures: as foaming at the mouth, and some others: and in like manner, he also then told the signs of dispossession, as that the parties would lie as though they were dead, and some other signs he then named.  
It being further objected to M. Darrell, 
M. Darrell ad art. 2. pag 14.  that then moving the boy's friends to have a fast for his pretended dispossession: he told them, that that kind of spirit was not cast out, but by prayer and fasting: thereby taking upon him to discern the nature of the spirit, which he pretended to be in the boy: He the said Darrell doth deny it. Whereupon, being pressed (out of the book before mentioned, perused by himself) that having appointed the fast, and moved the parents of the boy, with the whole family, to prepare themselves to that holy exercise of fasting, and prayer, he alleged (to put by all doubts) the words of Christ: this kind goeth not out, but by prayer and fasting: his answer is, That this point is not set down truly in the said book, and that he is therein iniurted.  
Again, M. Darrell was charged, that having appointed the said fast to be held the next day, he foretold to those that were present in Darlings hearing, that they should see the devil cast him into very strange fits: and that they should hear the devil speak in him, whereby the said boy might learn, that he was to act that day the fits before mentioned: and he the said Darrell, procure to himself great credit, when all things should fall out as he had prophesied. Whereunto he the said Darrell answering, 
M. Darr. ad art. 4. pag. 15.  confesseth somewhat: but more is deposed. I told (saith he) some of the company apart, that if the next day in their exercise, they should see the boy almost continually vexed, (as I said I thought it would fall out,) than they should be thereby further confirmed, that the boy was possessed, and encouraged to continue their exercise, etc. But Darling himself hereof saith thus: Master Darrell told my friends in my hearing, 
Th' Darling pag. 72.  that they should see me cast into very strange fits the next day, and namely (as I remember) that they should hear the Devil speak in me: and willed them notwithstanding, that they should not be discouraged: for (saith he) when you shall see these things, 
M. Darr. ibidem.  his deliverance is at hand. And whereas the Book hereof perused by himself, saith, that he foretold them what interruptions were like to follow by the enemy's rage: He saith, that this point, as it is set down in the said printed book, is not true.  
When the pretended fast for Thomas Darlings dispossession began, there are only named four persons (besides the boy) to have been present: and when he is said to have been dispossessed, there were but nine. Besides, the boy is noted in the treatise penned by jesse Bee, to have had eighteen or nineteen sore fits that day.  
Furthermore, whereas there was no Minister to be present at the said fast: Master Darrell prescribed certain prayers to be read out of a Book entitled the Enemy of security.  
Again, for aught that appeareth in the said Treatise, none read the Prayers appointed in that Book, but the boy himself: and commonly after he had read five or six words, he fell into a fit. These points considered, it being objected to master Darrell, that it is not likely that the Devil could be dispossessed, by such almost private, slender, interrupted, and scambling prayers, assisted with the forbearing of one meal: he the said Master Darrell answereth thus: Howsoever the prayers articulated were interrupted, yet I believe they were available with the fasting that then was used. Whereby it should seem, that the Devil, wherewith the boy was possessed, was not any of that kind, whereof our Saviour speaketh in the ninth of Mark, that was so hard to be cast out, but rather such an one, as Thyraeus maketh mention of, that by going to the church, or by some little check, might easily be overruled.  
But peradventure master Darrell in his answer, hath further relation then to the fasting and prayer, that was used at Caldwall, where Darling was. For in the said printed Book, the Devil forsooth, is made to have uttered these words by the boy's tongue, in one of his fits. Brother Glassap we cannot prevail, his faith is so strong, and they fast and pray, and a preacher prayeth as fast as they. And by the preacher master Darrell saith (as elsewhere to another purpose it hath been noted) that he believeth he himself was intended and meant. Besides, in the end of the said book, the pretended dispossessing of the boy, seemeth to be chiefly ascribed unto M. Darrell: he had the chief commendation of it, insomuch, as when the seven in Lancashire were to be dealt with, M. Dees Butler told M. Starkie what a fellow this Darrell was, and what he had been a means of, at Burton.  
It being furthermore objected as a fault to M. Darrell, in that having taken order for the said fast, and being very earnestly entreated to be present the next day at it, and likewise knowing, that except he stayed, no Minister was likely to be there: Yet he would not be entreated, but made this answer, (as it is set down in the said book of his own perusal) viz. My assistance in prayer and fasting you shall have: but not my presence: His answer hereunto is thus: 
M. Darr. ad art. 5. pag. 15.  Where it is expressed in the printed book, that I promised my assistance in prayer, and fasting: it is not true: Howbeit, being reexamined hereof, about three or four months after, he made this answer, viz. I believe that I said unto them, that I would not be unmindful of them, and of that which they had in hand, in my prayers. But (saith he) being earnestly entreated for my presence at the fast, I denied the same, and that for these two reasons: viz. for avoiding the note of vain glory, and that the people might through mine absence be kept from ascribing any special gift to me in casting out devils. In which his second reason it may be observed: First, his conceit, that the devil the next day would be cast out: than it appeareth that he had used great vaunts of the dispossession of Katherine Wright, or otherwise, why should he have suspected any such thing by the people? Again, if this were not a shifting reason, how came it to pass, that he was present at the dispossessing of the seven in Lancashire: but especially of William Somers, when his name was almost at the highest? And touching his first reason of vainglory, it being objected unto him, that the cogitation thereof, as the case then stood, could never have entered into a man of a single heart, and that thereby it might be reckoned for a note of vainglory, for any Minister to be present in such an action: his answer is, as followeth. Albeit, it be not in itself a note of vainglory, for a Minister to be present at the dispossessing of Satan: Yet forasmuch as I did fear, that some thought that I did glory somewhat too much in the action of casting forth devils: I for mine own part, thought it would be a note of vainglory in me, to have been present at the fast of Darling. At the time of this examination, he had set down part of his former answer, thus: Yet, forasmuch as in mine own experience, I did find that some thought that I did glory too much, etc. But afterwards, upon his repetition, he struck out these words (I did find in mine own experience,) and in place of them, added these: I did fear that some, etc. Howbeit, if he had been so careful to have avoided the note of vainglory (as he pretendeth,) he would never have suffered the words before mentioned of the devil, touching his praying, as fast as they did, that were with Darling, to have passed his hands, for thereby he seemeth so greedy of some commendation, as rather than fail, he was contended to receive it from Satan.   

CHAP. V Of Master Darrells shifts and absurdities, concerning the pretended dispossessing of Thomas Darling.  
FOrasmuch as Master Darrell holdeth this for one of his grounds, that the party to be dispossessed by fasting and prayer, is more tormented that day, then at any time before (Satan knowing that he hath but a short time in him) it being demanded of him, the said Darrell, how it came to pass that Thomas Darlings fits did grow upon the day of his pretended dispossession, to be less and less (as it is reported in the said book which he perused) this is his shifting answer: If his fits did grow less towards the end of the day, as the book reporteth, I can give no reason of it, except it should be that he was possessed with two spirits, as the Book doth seem to insinuate, and then it might be (I think) that one being gone out, his fits might be somewhat the less troublesome. Master Darrell (we see) is in this point full of uncertainties: as whether it be true that the Book reporteth: if it be true, he can give no reason of it, except the boy had two devils in him: and then he is furnished, relying upon that which is written in the said book, in these words. In the end of one of his fits, about two of the clock in the afternoon, he strained to cast with great vehemency, and got up some phlegm, and choler, at which time if he were possessed with two spirits (as it is probable he was,) one of them went out of him. Probable? it is more than probable, that these are more than palpable fooleries, some peradventure will say, ridiculous cozenages. But let us see what became of the second devil. About six of the clock saith the book, the boy being in a fit, began to heave and lift vehemently at his stomach, and getting up some phlegm and choler, he said, (pointing with his finger, and following with his eyes) look, look, see you not the mouse that is gone out of my mouth? and so pointed after it unto the furthest part of the parlour. Hereof Master Darrell being interrogate, saith: 
M. Darr. pag. 153  I believe that the spirit then left Darling, when getting up some phlegm and choler, he said, look, look, see you not the mouse that is gone out of my mouth? And therein I am the rather confirmed by mine own experience, in that it hath been so with others at the instant of their dispossession.  
It seemeth that Master Darrell hath met still with choleric spirits, which are so hard of digestion, as no marvel if his patients from time to time, have strained themselves to vomit. But upon occasion of his said answer, it being demanded of him how it came to pass, (if he the said Darling was dispossessed, when the mouse went from him) that he did not give GOD thanks for his deliverance, till about an hour after, as the Book doth report, he saith thus: Although I believe that Satan went out of the boy, when he said: Look, where the Mouse goeth, yet I will not define it, because it may be, that he continued longer in him: and for his thanksgiving, I believe that he did then give thanks to God, when the spirit of God moved him thereunto. This fellow, his faith is as it seemeth, of a strange quality, that can believe the devil was gone, when for aught he knew, he might remain still in him. Besides, it was usual with Darling to give God thanks presently, at the end of every fit, (Satan remaining in him,) which maketh it the more strange, that being cast out of him he should remain so unthankful by the space of an hour. But the impostor will have an answer for every thing, be it never so unlearned or foolish. He, the said Darrel, being here further demanded, how (he believing that the boy was dispossessed, when the said mouse went forth of him) it came to pass, that an hour after, he had (as the Book reporteth) two fits or trances more? this is his answer: I can not give the cause of it, but I think that Satan being without him, might cast him into the said trances. It had been more probable, if he had said, that the boy was so weakened in straining to get Satan out of his stomach, as it could not be chosen, but that he should afterwards have divers sore pangs and gripes.  
Moreover, whereas it appeareth by the said Book, that Thomas Darling did not take himself to be (forsooth) possessed, nor his friends that were present, until after his last trance: wherein these words were heard to proceed from him: viz. My son, rise up and walk: the evil spirit is gone from thee. Forasmuch, as M. Darrell affirmeth, that the boy was dispossessed an hour before, when the mouse went from him, it was asked of him, who it was that uttered those words: and he answered in this sort. I am fully persuaded, 
M Darrel ad art. 14. pag. 154.  that the said Words were not Darlings words: but were delivered either by a wicked spirit, or by an holy Angel. Whereunto, I rather incline. It is much, that there should be such an affinity betwixt the devil, and holy Angels, as that they so hardly be distinguished. But it was well, that he rather inclineth to the holy Angel: for otherwise it might have been suspected, that his patient had been the child of Satan: in that the voice said: My son, rise up and walk. If M. Darrell had considered better of the said Book when he perused it, he would have prevented the occasions of these shifts. For the encountering whereof, we find nothing in the premises of any certainty but within. Here is nothing but, within him: without him: I believe I am the rather confirmed: it may be: I cannot give the cause of it: I will not define either this or that, I rather incline: If a man had been hired of purpose, to have marred a good matter, he could not have managed it possibly worse: so skilful a Cat is Master Darrell in hunting after darlings mouse.  
Again, M. Darrell is of opinion, that the only certain means of discerning one to be possessed, 
M. Darrell ad art. 16 pa. 144  are the signs mentioned in the scriptures, uz. the crying of the spirit, his renting sore of the party, and the said parties lying as if he were dead. which signs because they are not mentioned in the said book, and for that M. Darrell himself was not present to see, whether the said signs did appear in the boy or not, upon the day of the fast, it was demanded of him how he knew, or is yet assured, that he the said boy was then, or is yet dispossessed? and thus he answereth. I am fully persuaded that the signs of possession appeared in the boy that day, and I verily think, in that the said signs of dispossession are not mentioned in the said Book, it did proceed from the ignorance of those that were present, or of the penner of it, or of both.  
And being afterwards further interrogated: upon what ground his said full persuasion was built: he answereth: the reasons that move me to think that the said signs were showed, uz. all three, or at the least one of them is, for that I am fully persuaded, that Darling is dispossessed. And that my persuasion of his dispossession is confirmed. First, by his continuance so long well: secondly, by his sensible perceiving of the egress of Satan in the likeness of a mouse, and by his very cheerful and hearty thanksgiving to God for his deliverance. Note by the way, that one of these signs is sufficient to show one to be dispossessed: If the party do but cry: M. Darrell can discern that the devil is departed. It was here further objected to M. Darrell: that Darlings continuance so long well, could be no certain argument unto him the said Darrel, that the boy is yet dispossessed, considering how he held: that Satan may lurk in one that is possessed, without making signs of his being in him for a long time: as he hath oft affirmed of William Somers. And hereunto, 
M, Darr. ad art. 17 pag. 144.  he shapeth an answer in these words: Satan is contented to lie hid, whilst according to his desire, it goeth with the party and others, that do not acknowledge the work of God in their said parties dispossession: but do deny and gainsay the same: but in as much as it falleth out otherwise in Darlings case, he justifying the work of God in his own deliverance, and praising him for the same, and others likewise praising God for that work of his, and endeavouring to profit by it: it cannot be, but if Satan were in Darling, he would show himself in vexing of him.  
You may remember what hath been noted of these kinds of jugglers in the last chapter of the first book: how by their own rules, they seek to prevent the detection of their cozenages: Somers being dispossessed (as it was pretended) in November 1597. and having now continued well above a year and a half, yet forsooth Satan lieth lurking in him, because he hath confessed his dissimulation. Nay, here we see that darlings friends maintaining that he was dispossessed, is made an argument that Satan doth not lurk in him. Howbeit if Darling were at all possessed, it is very likely, for aught that hitherto M. Darrell hath said, that so he continueth still: for he is neither certain when Satan departed from him, nor hath any assurance, otherwise then by conjecture, that there appeared upon the day of the said fast, so much as the signs of his dispossession. Such unskilful Exorcists deserve no great reward.   

CHAP. FOUR Of M. Darrel's further practices with Darling to pretend, that Satan sought to re-enter into him, and of some other his untrue assertions, concerning the boy's fits, and of his cunning dealing likewise with him, that he should never confess his dissimulation.  
THe third or fourth day after the pretended dispossession of Darling, (he the said Darling remaining very well without any show of trouble) M. Darrel came to the place of his abode: and after some other communication, entered cunningly into speech with him, concerning one of his slender grounds, uz. how it was the custom of Satan when he had been cast out of any, to seek by all his skill, that he might again re-enter: and thereunto added, that for a certainty, he would so deal with him, the said Darling. 
M, Darrell ad art. 10 pa. 141  This in effect M. Darrell confesseth in these words. The monday after the dispossessing of Darling, I came unto him, & told him apart out of the xii. of S. Mat. that the devil would seek to repossess him: and therefore counseled him to watch over himself, and to resist him. A godly pretence to cover a sleight with. If he had put no such thing into the boy's head, he had never dreamt of any such matter.  
Again, for the boys further instruction (as it may be judged), when M. Darrell had beaten it into him, that the devil would seek to repossess him, he added (as he was charged) that peradventure in so doing he would appear unto him in the likeness of a friend, and use all the means he could devise to persuade him to some evil, that so he might catch him and re-enter. 
M, Darr. ad art 11. pa. 142.  This M. Darrel denieth: but Darling deposeth it in these words. M. Darrell coming unto me said, that peradventure the Devil, in seeking to re-enter into me, would appear in the likeness of a friend, and use all the means he could to persuade me to some evil. And about seven or eight days after these speeches of Master Darrell, thus used unto him: he the said Darling having continued perfectly well in the mean time, and being then at the school, did fall newly again into his former course, and pretended himself to have that day and the next, seventeen or eightteene fits, as perceiving by M. Darrell, that if he meant not to be reckoned a dissembler, in that he had done before, he must also pretend that the devil was seeking to repossess him.  
Upon the second day, after the undertaking of this new dissimulation: Satan so withstood, (as the said book pretendeth) by the strength of the boy's faith, that he durst assail him no longer: insomuch, as a voice was then heard, but uttered with his tongue, saying: the Lord thy God hath tied thy enemies fast in a chain: unless thou fall again, he shall never attempt thee: and thereupon the Boy (as the Book reporteth), was well both in mind and body, and so hath ever since remained. This was a quick dispatch: too hasty a great deal, if that which the book sayeth be true. 
M. Darrell ad art. 14 pa. 143.  For although M Darrel affirmeth: that he verily believeth, that the said Darling was never repossessed: yet there it is said, that the first night of his pretending that Satan was seeking to re-enter into him, a voice was heard from him as uttered by the Devil, and saying: he fell, and I caught him. And also the next morning, the like words in effect are reported to have been uttered, as in the person of God: thou didst fall, and he caught thee.  
Besides his friends supposing (as it seemeth by the book) that the devil had caught him again: they fell again to their prayers, for the removing of that heavy displeasure of God. And there appeareth nothing in the printed book, whereby it might be denied, that he is not still repossessed: but the said words pretended to be spoken by the Dove, viz. the Lord thy God hath tied thy enemy fast in a chain: which words M. Darrell ascribed to the Devil, 
M. Darrell, art. 15. pa. 154.  Moreover, jesse Be coming from London, and finding the boy in these kinds of fits, saith thereof thus: I verily thought, that he was as much possessed then, as he was before, & still I see no reason why I should think otherwise. In deed therein he saith truly: for a dissembling knavish boy he was before, and so he then showed himself, by the cunning instruction of that Impostor his master: to whom he was not yet so much beholden, in that he allowed such things in the said book, as doth argue as much the certainty of his repossession, as of any thing else that therein is reported.  
Furthermore, whereas M. Darrell did never see Darling in any fit but once, 
M Darr. ad art. 5, pa. 50 & 152. add art. 5 & 7.  and cannot say much of the manner of his pretended trouble, but by hearsay: yet he is confident, that in all his fits, as well before his supposed dispossession, as in those that followed after: he the said Darling was altogether senseless, having neither memory, nor understanding of any thing he either then did or spoke. It shall not be needful to repeat his words, because he affirmeth as much of all that have come under his hands: it being one of his false general grounds, whereupon the chief part of his juggling consisteth. The untruth whereof (as it hath been showed in the discourse of his dealing with Somers) so will it most manifestly appear in the actions and proceed of Darling: as they are set out in the said book, that he himself approved to be fit for the press, & to be published: and as the boy himself hath confessed, and some also have deposed.  
Above six weeks after the boy began his tricks, he had upon the fifteenth of April, three several fits in effect together: wherein he had a Dialogue or discourse (as is pretended) with Satan: which fits being ended, the book reporteth thus: He told them that stood by, that if Satan came again, 
The book pag. 10.  he would ask him many questions, and charge him with many things: for he remembered what he had spoken as well as any that was present. Likewise after some other dialogues had with Satan by the boy, as it is pretended, M. Eccarshal Parson of Burton persuaded him (as the book saith) that if Satan spoke to him again, he should not answer him. Whereupon, he being overthrown into four several fits, one after another, (the last whereof was most intolerable) it seemed by the boy's looks and gestures, that the evil spirit spoke: but because of M. Eccarshals' advise, he kept a discontented silence, as afterwards he told his mother. Again, the said book proceedeth to divers other particulars which do ensue: when in his fits he was deprived of the use of speech, he would make signs of praying with folded hands: 
pag 5.  sometimes lifting them up, and sometimes striking them upon his breast. And being asked if he could remember what he did, when he made such signs, he answered, that sometimes he prayed.  

pag 6.  Again, being asked at the end of one of his fits, wherein he did screech pitifully, the reason thereof: he answered: that the pain which he endured was very grievous, like the pricking with daggers, or stinging with Bees, which caused his crying. Again, after an other fit, he was asked what he saw: he answered, a green Cat: and then, 
pa 15  oh (quoth he) this hath been a grievous torment unto me.  
Likewise at the end of an other fit, he said, 
pa. 21,  that a thing spoke unto him with a voice small and shrill: Again, being asked what he had seen in some other conflicts: he answered, many and fearful things, and called to mind a thing that spoke to him. The same question being also demanded of him after an other fit: he said, a great Bear came roaring upon him: Again in his extremity, 
pag. 27.  he made signs to the standers by to pray: and himself by folded hands and other gestures, gave testimony, that the spirit of God was mightily labouring against his infirmities, etc. he said, pray, pray, etc. he desired the standers by to sing the sixth Psalm: 
pag. 28.  and so they did, he singing with them very cheerfully etc. he sweat exceedingly & dried his face, as though he had not been in a fit. divers other things in the said book to this effect are here omitted: these being sufficient to control M. Darrel's folly, he himself justifying so confidently the book to be true. But if they will not serve him, let Darling himself be heard.  
In all those Dialogues (saith the boy) wherein I did as it were dispute and answer Satan, I think I had my memory, 
Darling pag. 73.  as I had the use of my tongue. Again, I confess, that in all my fits generally, I felt myself to be inwardly sore tormented and troubled: and as they asked me when my fit was done, of the torments and grief I had endured: so I told them more or less how I was troubled.  
And jesse Bee, the author of the said book deposeth: 
ibid.  that he verily thinketh the boys sits were mere illusions: that the boy was very willing to fall into his fits, because thereby he might show the graces of God in himself, by resisting of Satan, as he did in some of his Dialogues with the Devil: that he thinketh that Darling, being well, did know he should have the use of his memory, when he fell into his fits: that he might have avoided many of his said fits, if he had listed: that he did of himself willingly cast himself into some fits, when the devil did not enforce him thereunto: that he did willingly so cast himself into divers fits of purpose, that when the word of God was read, those who were present might thereby the better be brought to think that the devil could not abide it: & so have a more due and godly regard afterwards of it. And further (saith the said jesse Be) I confess that finding Darling so willing to cast himself into his fits, I did also often read unto him for the same cause (last before mentioned) and used the words as they are in the book, of provoking him to battle with Satan: for thereby I well perceived, that divers that were present, and had been before of profane life, were very much terrified, and have ever since much more regarded the word of God. Besides, my practice was, when at the reading of the word of God, Darling did seem to the beholders, to have been cast into a fit by Satan, then to desire those which were present carefully to mark what force the word of God had. And again: as I saw occasion, by reason of some licentious persons then present, and was thereupon willing that Darling should fall into any fit: I in reading would give some verse that I thought to contain substantial matter, an especial twinge: that is, I read it more earnestly, and with a sharp voice: and then presently the boy would fall into a fit. This course he confesseth he held with the boy, whilst he the said Darling continued at Burton. And the chief matters of the book penned by him, do contain the great wonders that were wrought in those fits, to set out (forsooth) the force and power of the word of God.  
By reason of sundry the testimonies before mentioned, & some other cross interrogatories ministered to M. Darrell touching this point, he was driven greatly to the wall, by mincing the matter after this silly sort. I believe (saith he) that Thomas Darling had not his senses or memory in his fits: but I think that Satan might so order the matter, as that he either had, or might have had his senses in his said fits. The reason why I think he had not his senses or memory, is for that in my experience I have seen it so in others. But concerning Thomas Darling, I have no certain knowledge, whether he was always without his senses in his fits, because I have not searched nor inquired into it. And thus having oftentimes resolutely affirmed at Nottingham, and in sundry of his examinations: that the boy of Burton was senseless as well in such fits as he had before his pretended dispossession, as also in the other whilst Satan was seeking his reentrance: Now he confesseth, that he never searched nor inquired into that point, to know the truth: and beside shaketh his false ground in that behalf, in that he saith: that sathan may so order the matter, as those who are possessed may have their senses in their fits.  
Moreover, as M. Darrel hath presumptuously & falsely affirmed, that Darling was senseless in all his fits: 
M. Darrel, ad art. 4 pag. 152. ad art. 12. pag. 142. & ad art. 1.151  so hath he as grossly and gracelessely maintained, that whatsoever he the said Darling seemed to do or speak in any of his said fits, it was not he but sathan, that both did it, & spoke it. And thus he saith particularly of certain dialogues (where it seemeth that sometimes Satan, & sometimes the boy should speak): 
M. Darrel ad art. 1. pag. 151. Dar. ad art. 5. pag. 50.  I think (saith he) that it was sathan only that used the words in those dialogues mentioned in the said book: he the said Satan transforming himself into an Angel of light, at such times when he seemed to speak godlily. And in an other place speaking of Darling & others he saith: that the devil at such times did use their members and parts of their bodies, without their knowledge or understanding. For the disproof of which bold untruths, that which hath been set down of the boy's senses, understanding, knowledge & memory, is very material, and much more may be added.  

Darling ad art 5. pag. 108.  Thomas Darling, who should be the fittest judge in this matter deposeth thus: I do not believe that what I did or spoke in my fits, was done or spoken always by sathan: for that divers things were uttered & spoken by me through the assistance of God's spirit, 
Darling ad art. 6 pag. 120.  in the time of my fits. And again, as I know at this present for a certainty, that I have the spirit of God within me: so do I with the like certainty believe, that in my dialogues with Satan, when I alleged sundry places of scripture, to withstand the temptations he assaulted we with: I had the spirit of God in me, and by that spirit resisted Satan at those times, by alleging the scriptures to confound him. True it is, that he the said Darling (about a month, or 5. weeks after his depositions last mentioned) having learned as it seemeth, that M. Darrel was peremptory, that it was the devil who uttered all the words in the said dialogues: & being again upon occasion examined touching that point, he deposeth in another sort. viz. I believe (saith he) that Satan did speak and utter such Godly speeches, as were used in those dialogues, & that they were not spoken by me, through any assistance of God's spirit. This contrariety doth arise from the boy's affection to Darrel, being so bewitched with a false opinion of his holiness, as he supposeth he may say or do any thing that he would have him. As for a further example; He the said Darling, 
Thomas Darling pag. 51.  being asked whether if M. Darell and the rest of his adherents should now say, that they took all his former fits to be fooleries & deceits, & that they think he was not possessed, he would not now think that he was not possessed: His answer is thus: Yes I would think that I was not at all possessed. Again, being asked whether if M. Darrel & the rest of his fellows should then at that very instant: tell him that he had fits, and that he were at that instant possessed, he would at the same instant think he were possessed: he said yes: I would so believe and think.  
The said jesse Be understanding what Darling had lastly deposed, of the devils uttering all that was spoken in the said Dialogues: and that it would thereby follow that the devil moved the standers by to pray and sing psalms, as it is in one of the said dialogues, and that he & divers others, when they did sing & pray accordingly, did therein accompany Satan, and not Thomas Darling: saith upon his examination touching this point. I do verily believe, that whosoever affirmeth, that it was the devil that moved us then to pray and sing Psalms, he saith not truly, 
jesse Be pag. 148.  but doth lie in so affirming. Again, both I and the rest of the boy's friends (as I believe) did verily think and were persuaded, that when Thomas Darling did seem to use the godly speeches mentioned in the Dialogues, he himself did use them, being directed by the spirit of God: neither did we once imagine or suspect, that the said speeches were uttered by Satan: and I do still believe, that they were uttered by the assistance of God's spirit, and not in any sort by the devil. And again, if it be held for a certain ground, that whosoever is possessed, is so far in Satan's bondage whilst he is in his fits, as that whatsoever he saith it is not he, but Satan that speaketh it: I do then fully believe that Thobas Darling was not possessed, and that he saith untruly, if he affirm that he was possessed.  
Furthermore, whereas it appeareth by the said book, that Th. Darling & all his friends were of opinion, that all the godly speeches in show therein mentioned, to have been uttered by the boy in his fits, were spoken by him the said Darling through the assistance of God's spirit: and that likewise the principal scope of the book doth tend to the magnifying of the boy's faith, and his wonderful constancy in his combats with Satan: M. Darrell being demanded why he suffered the said book to pass his hands with that great error, considering his own judgement, that all those things and speeches, which the boy's friends rejoiced in, proceeded from Satan: he the said Darrell answereth thus: I do think that the boy, the Author of the Book, 
M. Darrell ad art 12. pag. 142.  and the boy's friends, were of such mind and opinion as is here mentioned: and for the Book, I suffered it to pass to the press, having read it over at that time cursorily: and I was then of opinion, that a great part of the speeches mentioned in the said dialogues, were uttered by the assistance of God's spirit, or by the ministry of an holy Angel. Howbeit, since upon better advisement, as I think, I am persuaded that all the said speeches were uttered by Satan transforming himself into an Angel of light. If any man will take the pains to peruse those speeches, which jesse Bee hath fathered upon the boy in the said dialogues: he shall find them to be such, as will hardly be found again in any story (that ever was written) to be ascribed to sathan. But peradventure M. Darrel may have some conceit: that the boy being supposed to have two devils in him, one of them had finished the time of his torments, and so was become a faithful spirit, ready to be translated from hell into heaven, as some in that behalf have moralised.  
Lastly, it is to be observed, that Darling after he had continued a while in his first pretended fits, many supposed & gave it out, that he was but a dissembler, as it may appear by the depositions following. 
jesse Be pag. 148.  Whilst Darling was troubled, (saith jesse Be) many did think and affirm it, that he dissembled: & one of their reasons was, for that he did pretend that the devil spoke unto him, when none else did hear him that were present: at which times they heard Thomas Darling pretend as though he answered him. 
Edw, Baker pag. 179.  And Edward Baker: I believe (saith he) that the boy did dissemble, and I using these words to his mother: I pray God he do not dissemble: she said, that I had no faith. This opinion of the boy's counterfeiting being held by many, it was feared (as it seemeth) lest he should be induced by some means, at one time or other to confess his dissimulation, and thereupon some of his friends did encourage him to take heed thereof, and to continue constant in affirming, that he had been possessed, and was dispossessed. Some thing to this purpose Darling acknowledgeth in these words. 
Darling pa. 73  I confess that since the time of my supposed dispossession, my uncle Toone told me, that although it should be said, that I had but dissembled: yet I should not be discouraged by their words. And M. Darrell being charged, that since the time of the pretended dispossession of Darling, he had cherished, entertained and lodged the boy at his house: and that lest his own packing and dissimulation might happen to be detected aswell as the boys: he did use this, or the like persuasion in effect unto him: uz. that he should continue constant, and not suffer himself by any allurement to be drawn to say, that he had dissembled in his former fits, and that he was never possessed with any wicked spirit. And his answer is thus: 
ad ar. 15. pa. 143.  One night I entertained the said Darling in my house at Ashbye: and the rest he denieth: but Darling himself hath deposed it. 
T. Darling. pag. 77.  I have been with M. Darrell (saith he) diverse times, sometimes at Burton, once at Apleby, once at Packington at several exercises: from whence I went home with M. Darrell to Ashby, and supped that night with M. Hyldersham, M. Darrell, two other Ministers, and Mrs. Ireton, at M. Hyldershams' house, and I did lie that night at M. Darrel's. Also I confess that Master Darrell hath had some communication with me, and hath willed me at some times that I should be constant, and stick to the truth, meaning, that I should not suffer myself to be drawn to affirm that I was not possessed: but that I had dissembled in all my said fits; and so consequently, that God had not delivered me from the possession of Satan.   

CHAP. V How Darling confesseth his own dissimulation.  
THomas Darling being sent for by virtue of her majesties Commission for causes ecclesiastical: was examined, concerning his pretended possession, and dispossession, and afterwards again was dismissed. Of which dismission, the author of the brief Narration sayeth thus. When they perceived that the power of God in the boy, was stronger than the malice of Satan, they let him go. His meaning is, that the boy could not be removed from justifying his own, and Master Darrel's proceed with him. It may please you therefore to consider, what the boy deposed, before he went. Inprimis, (sayeth he) I do voluntarily of myself confess, that whatsoever Master Darrel did say about my supposed possession, or about prayer for my dispossession, or about my fits before or after my dispossession: I did all either of ignorance, or to get myself a glory thereby. Item I confess that I verily think, that if I may speak with M. Darrell, I can persuade him never to take any more such courses, nor to take upon him any such power, to be able to cast out a devil. Item I confess, as that I think, if my Lord will deal favourably with Master Darrell, and be good Lord unto him, he will of himself confess the truth, uz. that he did think me never to have been possessed, and that he will promise never to enter into any such practice again. Item I confess, that I felt indeed at first some prickings in my legs: and that at the first I vomited, and was somewhat evil at ease: but as for all and singular the fits mentioned in the Book, and the dialogues with Satan, viz. my saying of sentences out of the scriptures to Satan, his supposed saying to me, as also all those supposed apparitions of a Cat, a Dragon, a Bear, Lightnings, Thundering, a Lamb, a Dove, a Woman, and so of all the several visions and torments set down in the printed book, I confess they be all untruths, and no credit to be given to them, or any of them.  
And again: the special occasion he saith, that first drew him on more apparently to the said fictions, was this conceit put into his head: that the Devil could not abide the word of God: that therefore when the word of God was read, he did willingly at the hearing of some especial points, cast himself into many fits: that in the same he used sundry godly speeches: that the Standers-by thereupon observed the power of the word: and that having little discretion, partly for his own praise, and partly because he thought the word of God thereby would be better reverenced, he did proceed in his dissimulaton, as in the said book is more at larged expressed.  
Being then further asked, why after his pretended dispossession, he fell again to his former course: his answer is: that having heard of Master Darrel, that Satan was accustomed to seek to re-enter into those, out of whom he had been cast: he thought it meet for the better crediting of his former dealing, to take upon him, as though Satan had sought to have again repossessed him.  
Much more he hath set down to the effect specified, and hath thus subscribed unto it with his own hand. This my confession being read over by the L. Bishop of London in my hearing, I do acknowledge to be true, and this I do affirm without fear or constraint, very willingly, by the virtue of my oath taken to deliver the truth in those points, whereof I should be examined concerning my pretended possession. Howbeit, true it is, that within a fortnight after he was set at liberty, and had conferred with M. Darrell in the Gatehouse, and with some others, he writ a letter to the Bishop of London: affirming that he had been drawn on by subtleties to make the said confession: and addeth these words: what is all this to the purpose? If I of frailty should say, that all was dissembling, was it therefore? If I say that this paper is black, is it so therefore? Those articles which I was sworn unto before, I will stand unto them, and justify them: but concerning the other, I will never consent unto them: It must be even as the apt scholar of M. Darrel's list: a more proud and desperate forsworn boy, hath not lightly fallen into any man's examination. His answers, that he sayeth he will justify, are those which have been mentioned in the former Chapter: which are in effect as much as is included in this his aforesaid voluntary confession. And this may suffice touching this matter, aswell of the boy of Burtons' dissimulation, as of M. Darrel's practices with him.   

CHAP. VI A brief of Katherine wright's confession, touching the beginning of her dissimulation, and of the reasons that moved her so to do.  
THe first beginning of M. Darrel's glory, did proceed from his practices with Katherine Wright: and he hath enjoyed the fruit thereof, now about thirteen or fourteen years. The general cause itself, touching the late attempts of casting out divelies, is of great importance: otherwise it is not usual, that matters so long passed should be searched into. Neither had this been dealt with, but that Master Darrell hath in all his practices, with the rest of his Demoniackes, still insisted upon his experience in the pretended dispossessing of this poor woman. She therefore, the said Katherine Wright, being examined, confesseth upon her oath, 
Katherine Wright. pa. 1.  that which will not please Master Darrell. For she saith: That in all the course of her pretended possession and dispossession, and of her fits both before and since, whatsoever she did that seemed to be extraordinary, it was all dissembled. And yielding some reasons of the beginning of this her dissimulation, she saith, That her father in law one john Mekin, did for sundry years use her hardly, in beating and bruising of her very sore, that she grew therewith to some weakness, and for want of sleep to be idle-headed: that being in this case, and going one morning for water to a well, she imagined she saw a child without feet, and that being therewith greatly afraid, she began to be more and more troubled in her fancy, supposing that she saw divers shapes and apparitions.  
Furthermore, he affirmeth, that about the time of her foresaid weakness (she being then about the age of seventeen years) she began to be troubled with a kind of swelling in her body, occasioned (as since she hath learned) by some stopping of humours, not unknown to divers women: that upon signification unto her father in law, & to her mother of her foresaid sight of the feetelesse child, and what shapes she saw at sundry times, and also in respect of her said swelling, he her said father in law made much of her: that she finding this alteration in her said father's usage towards her, thereupon grew to be indifferently well, saving that her said swelling would often rise, yet she did still pretend to be troubled with her former kind of fancies and apparitions, and in her fits of swelling, did voluntarily make herself to seem worse than indeed she was by scriching, casting her arms abroad, starting up suddenly from the place where she sat, and sometimes by falling down, as though she had swooned.  
And this course she confesseth, she hath held from the time she began it, until the time almost of this her examination, viz. about thirteen or fourteen years: partly because she was by that occasion much made of, and for that she feared, that if she had showed herself to have been perfectly well for any long season, her father in law would have fallen to his former hard usage of her. But when she was examined, she professed, That thenceforth she would become a new woman, and leave all her former dissimulation.   

CHAP. VII. Of Master Darrel's proceed with Katherine Wright, for her pretended dispossession.  
IT seemeth that after K. Wright had continued a while in her aforesaid dissimulation, a bruit thereof was spread abroad, and divers came to see her. Amongst whom, 
M. Beresford. pag. 9  one master Beresford resorting to her, and being moved in compassion towards her, took her away from her fathers, & carried her home to his own house, because, (as he saith) her said father's house was no fit place to give entertainment, to any that should come to help her. At master Beresfords' house she continued about a month, and then (as he saith) he sent her to Mansfielde, to be comforted or cured of her infirmity, because he had heard master Beckingham to be a man of note, and master Darrel, dwelling then in Mansfield, a man of hope, for the relieving of those which were distressed in that sort. At this time master Darrell was not above three or four and twenty years old: but young it pricketh that will be a thorn.  
The said Katherine Wright coming to Mansfielde upon the Thursday, Master Darrell had dispatched the devil out of her, by the Saturday at noon next following, and in this manner, as he himself confesseth. Upon the Saturday in the morning, M. Darrell accompanied with his own wife, the goodman of the house, named Edward Loads, & the rest he remembreth not, undertook this work. He began (he saith) to pray about four of the clock in the morning, & continued in a manner till about twelve, at what time she was delivered. The prayers which he used, were partly described, and partly conceived by himself. One of the prescribed prayers, he read out of the book entitled The enemy of Security. Being here demanded whether the five his associates did continue with him all the while that he prayed, he answered thus: It is likely that some did stay with me all the while, and that some of the family, viz. the householders, did not continue theirs all the while without departure, as haply not being so devout, that they would forbear all worldly business to attend that holy exercise. By which his answer, it is likely, that the whole burden for Katherine wright's dispossession, did rely upon the shoulders of M. Darrell and his wife. A devil could not well be cast out with less trouble, if this had been all: but there was another engine used, as Katherine Wright hath deposed in these words. 
Ka. Wright page 5.  One fashion of Master Darrell in my pretended dispossession at Mansfield, was to lie upon my belly, saying that he would by so lying, press the devil out of me. When this strange fashion was objected to Master Darrell: Ah (quoth he) I looked for this, and then framed his answer unto it in this sort: 
M. Darr. art. 7. pag. 40.  I having read in the scriptures, how Elias and Saint Paul did stretch themselves along on some that were dead, in their recovery to life, and being a young student in divinity, not past four or 25. years of age, I did in a blind zeal (as I think) lie upon the said Katherine Wright as it is objected. Afterwards this his said answer being repeated (as the manner is,) he did thus amend it. viz. I did lie upon the said Katherine Wright, but not upon her belly, as I believe. This his qualification being allowed of, he desired about three days after, a second review: & then for the discharge of his conscience (as he said) in delivering the truth, he settle down his mind in this sort: Whereas, being examined upon the sudden of a fact done twelve years past, I have said that I did the same, as there it is expressed in a blind zeal, meaning a foolish and indiscreet imitation of the Prophet and the Apostle: I do now protest, that having called myself better to mind, by conferring with my wife, (who was then present) and by better deliberation upon the same, that I verily believe, I did not the said fact, to the end there specified: loath for that I never dreamt at that time of working any miracle, neither did look for her deliverance from Satan: but she being at that time very unruly, I did it to keep her down, there being also at that time, another upon some part of her, and upon me, that we might the rather keep her down. And thus at the length you have his perfect answer: wherein it is to be feared, that he hath made bold with his oath. For whereas at the third time, he saith he was taken upon the sudden, when he made his first answer, that seemeth not to be true, for that his said lying upon her was no sooner mentioned unto him, but he affirmed that he looked for it, and had two examples ready for his excuse therein. But the chief matter he feared, that would have been inferred of his first answer, was this, viz. that thereby it would have been collected, he had a purpose to have wrought a miracle, which he (forsooth) by no means can endure to hear of. You may term his casting out of devils, a strange, a wonderful, and a miraculous work (as his friends have done in their writings, with his good liking) but not a miracle.  
Furthermore, 
M. Dar. ad art. 71. page. 39  as touching the effecting of this miraculous work, master Darrell affirmeth, that although he inclined to think, that Katherine Wright was possessed when he took her in hand: yet he was not fully persuaded of it, till after her dispossession. Howbeit, Katherine Wright saith thus: Master Darrell as soon as he saw we, said he was of opinion, that I was possessed of a devil, but master Beckingham thought otherwise: and master Darrell was the first that ever I heard say, that I had any devil in me. But upon his own said speeches, he being demanded why he continued so long in prayer upon the Saturday, being not fully persuaded that she was possessed, he answereth after this manner. I was then fully persuaded that she was vexed with Satan, either within or without her, and knowing that faithful prayer is the best means to withstand sathan, etc. I did join and continue in prayer so long with her. But being here interrogated, that forasmuch as prayers must be made without wavering, whether he had not hope by his prayer, to deliver her from Satan's molestation, whilst he continued therein so long: I do not think (saith he) I am bound to answer hereunto. So as here was a devil cast out by chance. Master Darrell meant somewhat that sathan could not endure, and therefore he departed.  

M Darrell ad art. 10. pa. 152,  Moreover, forasmuch as Master Darrel holdeth that Christ did ordain fasting and prayer to be the ordinary means to continue in the Church for casting out devils: and that the duty of the party to be dispossessed, is to dispose himself before to prayer and fasting, and to perform the same if sathan do not hinder him: he being again demanded, why he did not appoint a fast, as well as use prayer for the dispossessing of Katherine Wright, this is his answer: 
M, Darr. ad art 6. pa. 40.  I was not then of the opinion mentioned, and as now I am, and therefore I did but only use prayer. But whether I myself purposed to fast, or advised Katherine Wright so to do, I do not now remember: but I believe that I did not make mention of any fasting to the rest of the company. This is a lose shift if it be looked into. For if he were not then of the said opinion, why doth he forget why he purposed to fast or not? he would not be thought at that time, to have had any needless purpose. But be it as he list, yet there we see, that Katherine Wright was dispossessed, but not by the ordinary means that Christ hath appointed: and so he must be driven to confess that he wrought a miracle.  
Again, it being objected to master Darrell, by her majesties Commissioners, that he knowing the said Katherine Wright to dissemble in her pretended fits at Mansfield, had private conference with her, & taught her how to order herself in the manner of her counterfeiting, whereby he encouraged her in that her lewd course: 
M. Darrell, ad art. 8. pa. 31.  he doth deny it, but thereof Katherine Wright deposeth thus. M. Darrell after his coming to me at Mansfielde, did tell and teach me alone, 
Ka. Wright pag. 4.  how to use and order myself in my fits.  
Likewise master Darrell being charged to have had private speech with Katherine Wright, before her pretended dispossession, and in the same to have told her, that she had sundry devils in her, that he heard them speak, and one of them call another by the name of Midlecub, and divers other names, he answereth thus: 
M. Darr. ad art. 9, p. 40,  I with some others did hear from within her the said Katherine Wright, (being in a trance) the morning of her dispossession, an intercourse of certain speeches dialoguewise, of which speeches, I do not now remember any thing. A strange matter that devils should talk together in M. Darrel's hearing, & yet that their communication upon his first acquaintance with him, should make no deeper impression in his memory. Some others (he saith) heard the said speeches, meaning of likelihood his wife: for having but 5. with him, 
Ka. wright. pag. 4.  & they of the household applying their worldly business, many could not hear them. But consider what Kathr Wright hath hereof deposed. M. Darr. told me once alone that I had devils in me: and I said I knew I had none: but he told me yes, saying, that he heard them speak in me: that were strange (quoth I) seeing I myself do not hear them. Why (quoth he) I heard them call themselves in thee, Midlecub, and other names which I cannot remember. Now lest any should doubt how these devils came into her, M. Darrell so contrived it, as they were sent thither by one Margaret Roper, a witch. 
M. Dar. ad art. 24. p 42.  Hereof master Darrell saith thus: When Katherine Wright came first to Mansfielde, I demanded of her when and how her fits began she answered, that they began shortly after that she had denied to give something unto an old woman, 
john Meekin pa 20.  one Margaret Roper of Eckington. Whereupon (saith john Meekin, the maids Father in law, Master Darrell presently affirmed, that the said Margaret was a witch, and had bewitched her. Many other things happened no doubt betwixt master Darrell and his patient, the first three days before her pretended dipossession, but these are sufficient to show, how being but a novice in that trade, he bestirred himself in so short a time.  
Again, it being objected to master Darrell, that he did falsely pretend the said Katherine Wright to be dispossessed, in that she departed from him, as she came to him, and continued presently afterwards, when she was carried back to master Berisfords', to be as she was before, he answereth thus: 
M. Dar. ad art. 11. pa 40,  I do verily believe that she was dispossessed, and that she continued well after, for the space of six or eight weeks: saving that three or four times, whilst she was at Mansfield, the devil seeking to re-enter, did trouble her a little for some quarter of an hour, or an hour, whom she for that time did resist, and I did assist her therein. And whilst she remained at master Berisford's, she was not troubled with any fit. But Katherine Wright deposeth thus: I remember that M. Darrell said he had cast a devil out of me, notwithstanding that I neither perceived nor thought any such matter but was when I parted from him in the very same case, when that he came to Mansfield: that is, I was somewhat held with my swelling, and the rest I did willingly act of myself. 
M. Beresford.  And Master Beresford. I remember that Master Darrell brought Katherine Wright from Mansfielde to my house, and told me that he had recovered her. Howbeit, I finding her shortly after to be as evil as before, discharged myself of her, and sent her home to her brother's house at Whittington. Likewise Thomas Wright. Master Beresford told me, 
Thomas Wright, pa. 21.  that my Sister Katherine Wright having been with one Master Darrell, was not amended, and so willed me to take her home with me, which I did accordingly. 
john Meekin, pa. 19  And john Meekin. Katherine Wright being returned to Master Beresfords' house, I came unto her, and carefully observed to see what change was in her, and found her after her wonted manner, according to her former fits, nothing bettered by her being at Mansfield. It is to be observed that Katherine Wright went to Mansfielde about Easter, and remaining there a month, was carried back again to Master Beresfords', and from thence to Thomas wright's, about the Whitsuntide after. By which conference of the time, it appeareth directly, that master Darrell is herein greatly deceived, and that Katherine Wright was not at all in any sort relieved by him.  
Within a fortnight or three weeks (as it seemeth) after Katherine Wright was with her brother at Whittington, she continuing her former practices, master Darrell was again sent for to come unto her, by the direction of M. Beresford (as Thomas Wright affirmeth) and upon his first sight of her he presently affirmed, that she was repossessed. This M. Darrell confesseth in these words. 
M. 〈…〉.  As soon as I came and saw her, I affirmed to those that were present, that she was again repossessed, but I am uncertain whether I so said when I was in her presence. If there were nothing else but this to charge M. Darrell with, yet were it sufficient to show either his childish rashness, or that he is an Impostor: it being impossible for any man upon the sudden to pronounce any to be repossessed, except he had the gift of discerning of spirits, which M. More saith, is now abolished. But according to this beginning, so he did proceed. First he affirmed that she was in her fits altogether senseless: and that whatsoever she either did or spoke, it was not she, but the Devil in her that did both. Which two points being objected unto him: he answereth thus: I do not believe that I affirmed her to be in her fits altogether senseless: 
M. Darrel ad art. 17. pag. 41.  but I doubt it might be that I said, that whatsoever she either spoke or did in her fits, it was not she but Satan. Whether he said than she was senseless or not, it is not material: seeing he hath so affirmed many hundredth times since: but how untruly concerning them both, these depositions following will declare.  

Ka. Wright pag. 3.  M. Darrel at his coming to me to Whittington, told the standers by that I was senseless, notwithstanding that I well knew every one of my acquaintance there present, and heard him every word what he said, and could answer readily & directly to any that asked any questions of me. It was M. Darrel's manner (saith Th. Wright) to affirm that she was senseless, & that it was the devil in her that answered him: 
Th. Wright pag. 21,  notwithstanding that both I & all others present (as I think) judged that she had the commandment of her own senses, & knew what she spoke, because at all times she understood any questions made unto her, & would answer roundly and aptly to the same. 
M. Beresford. pa. 10  And M. Beresford. At the time of her second pretended dispossession, I and others did ask her in her fits some questions, which she answered sensibly.  
Furthermore, as touching the ordinary means of casting out Devils by fasting and prayer, according to M. Darrel's own rules, he being charged not to have used the same, and yet after some interrupted prayers, to have affirmed, that she the said Katherine Wright was again dispossessed: he confesseth, that he so affirmed, and for the other point saith thus. There was no fast appointed: 
M. Darrel art. 19 pag. 41.  but I for my part did fast, and I think I did move Katherine Wright to do the like. How likely this is to be true (considering he was not then of opinion, that fasting was necessary in this case) may easily be guessed. The day of his own pretended fast was upon the Sunday: and thereof M. Beresford deposeth in this sort. M. Darrell coming to my house, we went together unto Whittington upon a Sunday after dinner. By which words, it seemeth that they dined together that day: and then Master Darrel's was but a curtolde fast.  
Before M. Darrel's coming to Whittington, 
W. Sherman. pa. 25.  but after it was known that he should come thither, there was a great bruit that a miracle should be done there: as William Sherman deposeth: whereupon he amongst others repairing thither: I found (saith he, as I think) four or five hundred people gathered together, at, and about the house of Thomas Wright, where the maid lay. To which effect, M. Beresford likewise deposeth, 
M. Beresford pa. 10.  that when he and M. Darrell came to Whittington, they found a great number gathered together, to see what would become of the matter. hereupon we may not doubt, but that M. Darrell laboured to show his skill: and beside, that which before is expressed, did play indeed sundry pretty tricks to move the greater admiration. For whilst he was endeavouring to dispossess her, he induced her by cunning speeches, to lie as though she were senseless, which he termed a trance. It is true that he denieth this: but thereof K. Wright deposeth. I confess that M. Darrell put me in mind to be in a trance, and to lie as though I were senseless after my violent fits, and that at the time of my pretended dispossessing at Whittington, when I should have lain as though I had been dead: I fell fast a sleep, and then when I awaked, 
Ka. wright. pag. 4.  I heard master Darrell say to them that stood by, that I had been in a trance. Another of his feats was this, whilst he was thus working with her to cast out the devils: (for you must understand that the first had brought 7. more with him) he fell to show the strength of his faith, in daring to enter communication with the said spirits, divers in the mean time trembling & quaking as fearing some hurt to themselves, when they should be cast out. In this his great show of courage, he commanded the devils to tell him their names, and one of them (forsooth) saying his name was Roofye: thou liest (quoth M. Darrell) that name is common to all spirits: and then further urging them, another (forsooth) said his name was Midlecub, which M. Darrell approved to be his true name. Unto these particulars M. Darrell answereth thus.  

M. Darrell ad art. 22. pa. 42.  I confess, that I charged the spirit to tell his name, (which I did then in ignorance) and that on spirit said, his name was Roofye, in a very great voice, and in very fierce and cruel manner, & that another said his name was Midlecub. But Th. Wright deposeth of the other circumstances. I well remember (saith he) that at the time when M. Darrell charged the spirit to tell his name, he answered his name was Roofye, to whom M. Darrell said, 
Thomas Wright, pa. 23,  that he lied, for that was a common name to all spirits: and then he charged him again to tell his name, and he gave divers other names which now I remember not. Now how it came to pass that Katherine Wright used those names, she hath before signified: when M. Darrell told her at Mansfield, that he heard the spirits within her, terming themselves by those names: 
Ka. Wright pag. 4.  which names (saith she) I remembered, when Master Darrell asked the supposed devils their names: and so did answer him in the person of the devils, according to the names that I had learned of him. Besides, it would be considered what evil luck M. Darrell hath in his depositions. For whereas he saith, that the spirit Roofye told his name in a very great voice, and in very fierce and cruel manner: William Sherman deposeth, 
Wil Sherman. p. 26.  That he heard a voice, which he thought to be no other, than the maids voice, she lying under a covering. 
Th', wright. pa, 21,  And Thomas Wright. The speeches spoken (as Master Darrell said) by the spirit, were verily taken to be the speeches of Katherine Wright, and spoken by her natural voice and none other. Again, he played a third legerdemain, answerable to any of the former. For whilst he was further labouring in this matter with the maid, he took upon him to discern when every of the said 8. spirits departed: saying to those that were present, there goeth our one spirit: and then after a while, there goeth out another spirit, and so the nimble fellow proceeded until as he pretended, 8. devils were gone out of her. It may be easily conceived, in what a perplexity the people were, when these eight devils were thought to be flying amongst them. But let master Darrell speak the best for himself. Upon the sunday, etc. (saith he) the said Katherine Wright showing the signs of dispossession, 
M, Darr. art 20. & 21, pa. 41.  as renting sore, crying loud, and lying for dead, I affirmed, that I believed, that then one of the spirits went out of her: which signs appearing in her eight several times that day, and the night following, I said she was possessed of eight wicked spirits, and was also dispossessed of them. The rest of the premises he denieth. But they are deposed by Katherine Wright. 
Ka Wright pa. 3.  I heard (saith she) M. Darrell affirm: there goeth out one spirit, there goeth out another spirit, and so till all were gone: notwithstanding, I knew well, or at the least thought, that I had none in me.  
Furthermore, it being objected to M. Darrell, that upon Katherine wright's naming of Midlecub, as is before expressed, he (having learned of the said Kather. Wright, that she and one Margaret Roper of Eckington were at some jar, and thereupon had affirmed to Katherine Wright, that she the said Margaret had bewitched her) did ask the said Midlecub who sent him thither: and the maid or Middlecub forsooth, answering Margaret Roper, he the said M. Darrell gave it out publicly, as he had before privately to the said Katherine: that Margaret Roper was a Witch, and had bewitched the said maid: and thereupon procured a Constable to carry her with him the said Darrel to one M. Fouliamb a justice of the Peace, who disliking his course, threatened to send him to the jail. Hereof M. Darrell confesseth part, and there are some depositions for the rest.  

M. Darrell, ad art. 25. pa. 43. Io. Meykin, pa. 20.  Upon the occasion mentioned (sayeth M. Darrell) I did procure the said Margaret to be carried to M. Fouliambe, who would have sent her to the jail. But john Meykins thus. At M Darrel's instigation, she was carried to one M. Fouliambe a justice, and he reproving the said Darrell for accusing the said woman, told him, that if he so demeaned himself any more, he would send him to the jail. 
Th. Wright pa. 20  And Thomas Wright. M. Fouliambe examining the matter, found no cause in any sort to touch Margaret Roper, and forthwith discharged her.  
Again, M. Darrell was charged to have persuaded Katherine Wright to scratch Margaret Roper the pretended Witch, till she drew blood of her: saying, that in so doing she should be cured, and that he accordingly procured the said Margaret to be brought unto her, and that she the said Katherine did draw blood of her. These points M. Darrell doth after a sort deny, but with some shifting. Thus he saith. 
M. Darrell ad art. 25. pag 43.  I verily think that Margaret Roper would sundry times have confessed her sself to have bewitched K. Wright, but that still at the instant, when she should have delivered those words, the devil (as I think) did stay her: A substantial conceit to be delivered upon his oath. But he proceedeth, & telleth us, that he stayed her from the jail, as he remembreth. It seemeth that this could not have been forgotten, if it had been true. But he showeth this reason why he so entreated for her, telling M. Fouliambe this tale, viz. that the spirit, which had affirmed, that Mar. Roper had sent him to K. Wright, 
ibidem.  did likewise affirm, that if the said M. Roper were brought to the said Katherine, she the said Katherine should smart for it: or words to that effect. M. Fouliambe is dead, so as this dependeth upon M. Darrel's poor credit. He could not deny but that the pretended witch was brought to K. Wright, & therefore as it seemeth, deviseth this shift to cover that point objected unto him in this behalf. But he goeth on further saying thus: Mar. Roper being brought to the said Katherine, 
M. Dar. ad art. 25. p. 43  etc. some others, I not being amongst them, as I believe, would have had the said Katherine to have scratched the said Margaret by the face, but as I was informed, the said Katherine was not able to scratch her, nor did draw any blood of her as I believe. This scratching of witches, is generally accounted a thing unlawful, which caused M. Darrell (it may be thought) to pretend this great uncertainty. Howbeit, though his memory be weak, his faith we see is strong. But K. Wright affirmed upon her examination, that master Darrell told her, as is before expressed, and that accordingly, when M. Darrell brought Margaret Roper unto her, she the said Katherine scratched her, and drew blood on her. And for the better justifying of her words therein, T. Wright her brother deposeth thus: In my hearing M. Darrell persuaded K. Wright to scratch Margaret Roper, and to draw blood of her, assuring her that the said Margaret had bewitched her, and that by drawing of blood from her, she should be cured. And to that purpose Master Darrell procured the said Margaret to be brought to my house to Katherine Wright, and accordingly she the said Katherine did scratch her by the face, and drew blood of her. All which notwithstanding, the said Katherine received no ease thereby.  
Lastly, whereas M. Darrell did pretend that then Katherine Wright was dispossessed of eight devils, and hath since so often bragged of his dealings with her, both at Burton & in Lancashire, & at Nottingham, & in every place in effect where he hath come, in so much, as some of his friends thought, he took too much upon him in that behalf: the truth is, as it appeareth by sufficient depositions, that he delivered her no more from the said eight spirits, than he had done before from the first, and that she received no benefit at all, by his prayer and packing with her, but then left her again as he found her. To this purpose there are these depositions: 
Io, Meekin pa. 19,  M. Darrell continued making of a wonder and a din to and with her, (when he pretended to cast out eight devils of her) but what good he did her thereby, I could not perceive, neither could I find that she received any ease thereby. This I certainly know that M. Darrel spent at Whittington some three days, and that after his departure, she continued as before in the self same manner of fits, that formerly she had used. And Th. Wright: I could never find, 
Th. wright, pa, 24.  either by mine own judgement or by the opinion of others that were present at the time of her said dispossessions, or afterwards, that the said Darrell had done any good or ease unto the said Katherine, during her abode with me. Which I most certainly do believe, for that the fits which she had before Darrel's coming to her in my house, and at the time of his being with her, and likewise all the time after, were still alike, without any change or alteration.  
And to conclude, Katherine Wright deposeth, 
Katherine Wright pa. 4.  that when in her pretended fits she scritched, started, strived to seem strong, feigned to speak in the person of the devil, and to act many such tricks, she did dissemble, and counterfeit them all, and acknowledge that in so doing, she deserveth to be grievously punished, both by God and the Queen, and is heartily sorry, and beggeth pardon for the same. But M. Darrell will stand to it like a man, that she did not counterfeit and dissemble: but was indeed first possessed by one devil, then dispossessed, and afterwards repossessed with eight, and again dispossessed of them all: 
Ibidem.  Katherine Wright sayeth, that none in the world did know she dissembled, but M. Darrell, and that he at Whittington did charge her, that what means soever were used, she should keep her own counsel and his: for if ever she confessed her dissembling, they were both undone for ever. And she addeth, that she thinketh he will never confess, that he practised with her to dissemble, by reason of the words he used unto her. But M. Darrell will start at this, and verify her opinion. Katherine Wright deposed, sayeth, that since M. Darrel's first dealing with her, she hath continued her dissimulation at times, till within a quarter of a year or thereabouts, before this her examination, for the same causes, that first she pretended herself to be worse than indeed she was: uz. to live at some ease, and to be much made of: but now promiseth and avoweth to leave all her former practices, and to become a new woman, and to live and work orderly and quietly with her mother and father, as it becometh an honest poor woman to do. But Master Darrell, he (forsooth) is resolute; that she was repossessed within a short time after he had left her, and that so she hath continued ever since, and so remaineth at this Present. True it is, that if he should not so hold, he must be driven with shame to confess, that all his dealings with her were vain and frivolous: which would very much discredit the rest of his wonderful works.   

CHAP. VIII. of M. Darrel's proceedings with Mary Cooper the sister of William Somers.  
THe last that M. Darrell had in hand to work his skill upon, was one Mary Cooper of Nottingham, wife of Robert Cooper the younger. This Mary remaining with her father in law, had seen her brother and Master Darrelles dealings with him, at her said father in laws house, and did herself begin to practise her brother's tricks: pretending to be troubled as he was presently after Christmas, 1597. at what time her brother falling again to his old tricks, was judged by Master Darrell to be repossessed. Of which matter Master Darrell in his Apology writeth vauntingly in this sort. If Somers be a counterfeit, and I have taught him, then undoubtedly Marry Cooper his sister is such, and hath also confederated with us herein. For she cannot only do some of his tricks, as they call them, but beside, for a time began her fits, when he had entered his: he in like sort following her, having their fits by course. And this they did although they were in several rooms, as I am able and offer now to prove by a multitude of witnesses. But hereof as she will clear me, so it hath not hitherto been said, that she hath any hand in this counterfeit action, why then do any charge that upon me? Is it not time well bestowed to deal with this Impostor? See how in effect he reasoneth: I taught not Mary Cooper to counterfeit: therefore I taught not Somers. And again, if I have taught Mary Cooper to counterfeit, than she hath confederated with me and her brother. But because M. Darrell will needs be so gallant in this matter, it shall appear both what may be, and hath been laid to his charge, together with his answers thereunto.  
First, Mary Cooper sayeth thus: 
Marry Cooper. pa. 203.  many times Master Darrell would call me unto him alone, I being in my father's house, and tell me that he doubted, that I would prove in time to be possessed, and therefore bade me look unto it. 
M, Darrell ad art. 1. & 2 pa. 211  These points Master Darrell doth in effect confess to be true in these words: I believe that I have had diverse times private speeches with Mary Cooper: but so as I always did cast to avoid suspicion of incontinency: and also that sometimes or other, I have said unto her, that as I thought, she would prove to be possessed with a wicked spirit. He was never charged with any suspicion of incontinency, nor other crime, which did not concern his casting out of devils: so as therein he was too cautious.  
Howbeit in that, which here he hath confessed, he was not so circumspect. For his particular speeches with her were nothing else, but a cunning project to put Mary Cooper in mind, that she might counterfeit such a matter, and so she took it. Hereunto also that appertaineth, which she deposeth thus: I oftentimes heard M. Darrell say before my pretended evilness, that it was the devils custom, 
Marry Cooper. Ibidem  when he had possessed one in a Family, to seek to possess more of the same family likewise. This, (as arguing too plainly his cunning packing) Master Darrell denieth: but it is somewhat strengthened by Summer's deposition in this behalf: 
Summer's pag 26.  Before time (sayeth he) that I fell again into this course, meaning his pretended repossession, I heard M. Darrell tell some that were present, that except very good heed were taken, the devil would not cease with afflicting of me: but would also, as he thought, assail some other in my father in laws family. Of which words, I did not then know the meaning, till afterward, that my sister did pretend herself to have the like fits to mind, and then I did verily suspect that M. Darrell had brought my sister to imitate me. But afterwards I was out of doubt thereof: for I desiring to understand of Master Darrell, what my sister ailed, he bade me not to fear her: for (quoth he,) she is but as thou art, and shall do well enough.  
Furthermore, whilst the said Mary Cooper was meditating (as it seemeth) upon Master Darrel's former speeches, it fellout, that a child of hers died a little before Christmas: which she took so heavily, as it made her (as she sayeth) indeed and truly evil at ease, and somewhat weak: whereupon certain women, and others in the town, coming unto me, told me (saith she) that I was worse, than I knew myself to be: and that I would be as evil as my brother William was. These words added to M. Darrelles former speeches: that he doubted, she would prove to be possessed, and that Satan was not content with one in a Family, together with her experience of the signs of possession; which she had seen in her brother, and often heard of Master Darrell, made her, (as she sayeth) to do that which she never thought to have done: that is (as she addeth) to tumble and toss, to talk idly, and to laugh: which laughing, I would sometimes have restrained, but could not by reason of the people's foolish speeches that were present. This laughing and fleering some would think to be but a small matter: but consider what M. Darrell gathered of it, 
M. Darrell ad art. 4. pag, 211.  I affirmed (saith he) in Mary Cooper's hearing, that her laughing and fleering countenance was such, as I had seen in others who were possessed.  
Again, the said Mary Cooper being thus deemed to be troubled with Satan, it fell out, that besides her said grief and weakness, she had also some swelling in her body: whereby she verily thought herself to be with child. And otherwise whatsoever she pretended in outward show, she neither had, suffered nor felt, (as she hath deposed) any thing in the world. Against her opinion of being with child, M. Darrell opposed himself as much as he could. M. Darrell (saith she) laboured to bring me from my persuasion of being with child: by often saying, that it was no child, but such a child, as God bless every good body from: and such a child as would stick by me, as all there in Nottingham should see apparently. 
M. 〈…〉   
These words of Mary Cooper's being deduced into an article (as they are here set down) M. Darrell answering unto it, saith thus: I have at sometimes laboured to persuade the said Mary, as it is articulated.  
Furthermore, notwithstanding that the said Mary Cooper hath confessed her dissimulation, and the reason that moved her thereunto: & moreover also deposeth thus: when I spoke any idle words to the beholders, I knew very well what I said and did: but made show to speak idly: when I laughed, I knew that I laughed: and in all my pretended fits, I heard and saw, and understood as well as any present: and did answer directly to any thing that the standers by demanded of me: and when M. Darrell in my pretended fits was vehement and earnest with me, I laughed at him, and could not but laugh, if one had given me never so much: yet notwithstanding M. Darrell saith in this sort: I confess that I affirmed, that the strange troubles, 
M. Darrel ad ar. 7 pa. 212.  which she endured, did either proceed from sathan within her, or by his outward operation: that I believe she was senseless in her fits, and I have said, that her laughter in her fits did proceed from the devil: and I do likewise believe, that when she spoke, it was not she but Satan. It may hereby evidently appear, what a garboil this lewd Impostor would have made in Nottingham, if he had not been prevented: for upon his said speeches, divers of his adherents, specially women, they bestirred themselves in this matter, as Mary Cooper hath deposed.  
When mistress Grace (saith Mary Cooper) and the rest of her company came about me, saying and reporting, that I should be delivered of some monstrous thing, I laughed hearty at their folly: and this my laughing they termed my fit, and would cry out: now Lord bless her, she is in a sore fit: the which their foolish wondering made me laugh more and more: and the more I laughed, the more they cried: Lord have mercy on her, she is in a strange fit. Besides, when I had laughed till my heart was sore at them, and so was feign of necessity to lie still, and not stir, because my strength was spent with laughing, then would the whole company of women, namely Mrs. Grace, and the rest, cry out: Lord bless her, Lord save her: Lord jesus have mercy on her, now she is in a trance.  
And whereas M. Darrell in his words before recited out of his Apology, doth offer to prove by a similitude of witnesses, that for a time Marie Cooper began her fits, when Somers had ended his, and that he in like sort followed her, having their fits by course, and that this they did, although they were in several rooms: which he maketh a strange matter, and doth thereby insinuate, that they being in divers rooms, could not know by any ordinary knowledge when either of their fits ended, that so the one might begin after the other had done. Consider what M. Aldridge doth here depose. William Somers and his sister (saith he) being troubled together, (as it is pretended) I had very much to do with them: for I had no sooner done with the one, but presently I was compelled to go to the other. When I had been a while with Somers, he would break out of his fit, and cry vehemently unto me: go look to my sister: and accordingly I still going unto her, found her in her fits. But here it is to be observed, that there was but a thin wall betwixt both their beds, so as she might easily hear her brother when he willed me to go unto her. Furthermore, when I had been in like manner with the said Mary, and that she had continued a space in her fits, she would also break out of them, and cry out unto me: go look to my brother. And still when I came upon her motion to Somers, I found him in his fits. Now these words, uz. go look to my brother, go look to my sister, were spoken by them both so loud, as that they might easily hear one the other. And in this case they both continued together (as I remember) about five days, whereby I was very much wearied and troubled. And thus this great mystery being laid open, Master Darrell needeth not to produce his multitude of witnesses.  
Again, it being objected to M. Darrell, that Mary Cooper imparting unto him, how in her dream she had seen certain sights, which made her afraid: he laboured to persuade her, that she was in no dream, but that she saw such things in deed, and willed her to affirm and avow, that in her fits she had had such apparitions: his answer thereunto is as followeth. Marry Cooper hath divers times told me, that sundry nights she being broad awake, 
M. Darrell ad art 8. pag. 212.  and not in any dream, hath seen diverse shapes appearing unto her, as of Cats, Dogs, etc. which I believe were wicked spirits, appearing in such shapes: and I confess that I have affirmed so much unto others, but cannot depose that so I have affirmed unto her: howbeit, I believe if I have not spoken so much unto her, yet I have done it to others in her hearing. But Marry Cooper deposeth thus: The relation which I made before the judges at the assizes, of my seeing strange sights and apparitions, as the apparition of cats and flames of fire, with the rest, I had dreamt of them by night in a dream only: and when I had told M. Darrell what I had dreamt, he persuaded me, that it was no dream but a true vision: and bade me say & avow, that I had seen those cats and flames of fire in deed. By this his persuasion I did so say & avow, and caused it to be belief or a truth.  
You hear in this deposition some mention of the judges: whereupon it is fit to remember unto you, what a very strange and malicious practice was undertaken to have procured the death of a poor woman, one Alice Freeman upon pretence that she was a witch. This Alice Freeman was one of those whom Somers had named for witches, & is allied to M. Freeman an Alderman & justice of peace in Nottingham. This M. Freeman (as it seemeth) had no liking of M. Darrelles proceed with Somers, which stirred up great hatred and malice against him: which because M. Darrell and his adherentes could not execute upon him: they thought they would be revenged upon his kinswoman: It is said (but untruly) by some of M. Darrel's friends, that before the detecting of Alice Freemon for a witch, it was not reported in Nottingham, that Somers was a dissembler, thereby inferring, that the offence taken by her detection, was the cause that raised up a slander (forsooth) of Summer's dissimulation: & therefore no marvel, if M. Darrell & his associates, were greatly inflamed therewith. Now this Alice Freeman having escaped that imputation in respect of Somers, for that his bewitching was one while laid upon the Darbishire witch, and afterwards upon the Worcestershire witch, a practice was undertaken to charge the said poor woman Alice Freeman, to have bewitched to death the child before mentioned of this Marie Cooper: and that she likewise was the cause of the said Mary's trouble and vexation, as having bewitched her in like manner. This conceit being thrust into Marie Cooper's head, she charged the said Alice with that felony: her indictment was framed at the next Assizes: she was arraigned: M. Darrell was one amongst divers that gave in evidence against the woman, grounding himself much upon Somers detecting of her for a witch: and matters were so prosecuted against her, as had not the judges in their wisdom discerned somewhat, & rectified their courses to a due issue, it is verily thought the poor woman (being found guilty by the great inquest) had been condemned to death. Of these particulars, there are no depositions (saving what Mary Cooper herself hath confessed upon her oath). Howbeit that the said Alice was so dealt with, it will not be denied. But let us hear Mary Cooper.  
I was procured (saith she) by Mistress Grace, George Small and his wife, M. Power and his wife, to prosecute the matter of indictment, which I preferred against Alice Freeman, at the Assizes for a witch: and I received money of mistress Grace, to pay for the bill of indictment: and likewise I received instructions from amongst them to frame in evidence: and they likewise urged me to move for the good behaviour against Alice Freeman when she was acquitted. But in my conscience I am persuaded, and was persuaded of the said Alice Freeman, that she was never any witch, and I did all that I attempted against her at the urging of the parties aforesaid. Besides, as soon as Alice Freeman was acquitted, I went as I was willed before to Mistress Darrell, M. Power and his wife, & Mistress Aldridge were met together, and stayed for me: and then and there M. Darrell and the rest were earnest with me, to frame a petition to my Lord Anderson, and notwithstanding the acquitting aforesaid, to offer to take it upon my oath, that the said Alice Freeman had bewitched, not only my child, (for the which before she had been indicted and acquitted) but also myself, and they framed and gave me a petition accordingly: but my conscience pricked me not to deliver it.  
If his be true which is thus deposed, it is but agreeable unto the violent humours that reign in that kind of people. But sure, the practice was fowl: and therefore it was feared (as it seemeth) to be detected. For after that Somers was in examination at London, the said Mary had a shrewd caution given her. She deposeth thereof in this sort: Master Darrell (saith she) and the rest above named, meaning Mrs. Grace, Master Power and his wife, and Mrs. Aldridge told me, that I must beware: for if any hole could be espied in my coat, I should be sent for to London, as my brother William was.  

W. Somers pag. 26.  This Mary Cooper having continued about three or four weeks in her said dissimulation, she did leave off those practices, as her brother saith, without any assistance of M. Darrell to dispossess her, and hath been well ever since. And M. Aldridge: afterwards she grew to be indifferently well, and so doth continue: only she complaineth, that she hath a kind of stirring in her belly. But in deed (as information is given) the poor woman liveth orderly and well amongst her neighbours, and is not otherwise troubled, than it happeneth out upon occasion with other women. Only it seemeth she is in great fear of some hard measure to be offered unto her, upon the coming to light of her examination. For thus she deposeth: 
Marry Cooper. pa, 204,  Now that I have from my conscience told the truth in this matter, I shall be so pointed at, reviled and abused, in the open streets of the town, as I shall grow weary of my life. For the meeting with which inconvenience, it is wished and not doubted, that the Magistrates in Nottingham, will be careful.  
Unto these notable exploits of M. Darrel's, concerning Mary Cooper, Katherine Wright, the boy of Burton, & William Somers, something might be added of his pretended dispossessing the seven, so often mentioned in Lancashire, out of one Master Moor's examination & confession touching that matter. His said examination is in the Registers office to her majesties Commissioners, for causes ecclesiastical: where all the rest of the aforesaid examinations do remain. And if any will take the pains to peruse it, he shall find, that M. Darrel and M. Moor's course held with those in Lancashire, was as vain and ridiculous, as with any of the other. The author of the Brief Narration, after he hath taken his pleasure against the proceedings of her majesties Commissioners, and such as they deputed for the better examination of these causes, as disdaining and scorning them, he writeth (judging other men of likelihood by his own corrupt conscience) in this sort: What goodly stuff they have returned, time and malice will make known unto us. The stuff such as it is (vile in deed) his mastership may be pleased now to peruse: and thereby reap some profit, if he read it with no greater malice than it was written.  
The gentleman concludeth this Narration (as it hath been before mentioned) in some choler, when alluding to those that cannot believe Master Darrel's wonders, he saith: Let him that is filthy be filthy still: And thereunto addeth, that do Satan what he can, wisdom shall be justified of her children: meaning (if he apply the place with any sense) that Master Darrell and his proceed shall be defended and justified.  
Howbeit peradventure, when he hath better considered the contents of this treatise, he will not be so peremptory. Otherwise, he hath here matter sufficient to show his skill in, for the justification of it.    


The Contents of the First Book.  

THe number of such persons as are said to have been dispossessed by M. Darrel's means. Chap. 1. pag. 1.  
The occasion why M. Darrel's dealing with Somers was called into question at Lambeth. Chap. 2. pag. 4.  
How M. Darrel's friends have set out the pretended dispossessing of William Somers Chap. 3. pag. 15.  
How M. Darrell is made a fit instrument to cast out Devils then many other. Chap. 4. pag. 19  
How M. Darrell knew William Somers and the rest to be possessed. Chap. 5. pag. 27.  
Of M. Darrel's knowledge, who sent the Devil into Somers, and the rest. Chap. 6. pag. 36.  
Of the Causes pretended, why men are possessed. Chap. 7. pag. 39  
Of the means alleged by M. Darrell and others, whereby men are dispossessed. Chap. 8. pag. 42.  
Of the signs whereby M. Darrell and others do discern (as they say) when Satan is expelled. Chap. 9 pag. 51.  
Of M. Darrel, and M. Moor's conceit: that Satan being cast out of one, doth presently after seek to repossess him. Chap. 10. pag. 55.  
How those that took upon them to cast out devils, do get themselves work, and of their devices to cover their lewdness. Chap. 11. pag. 59    

The Contents of the Second Book.  

Of M. Darrel's intercourse with Somers by starts at Ashbye, from about the year 1592. until 1597. for his instruction how to dissemble himself to be possessed. Ca 1. pa. 78.  
of M. Darrel's private directions to Somers, whilst he was at Nottingham with him, how he should from time to time behave himself in his counterfeiting. Chap, 2 pag. 98.  
Of M. Darrel's instructing of Somers by speaking to others in his hearing, those things which he meant that he should practise from the 5. of novem. when he came unto him, until the seventh of the same, being the day of his pretended dispossession. Chap. 3. pag. 106.  
Of M. Darrel's cunning instructing of Somers, by speaking to others in his hearing of Satan's seeking to repossess him, and of the acting of certain tricks under a coverlet, from the seventh of November, until about the xxi. of the same. Chap. 4. pag. 127.  
Of M. Darrel's cunning instructing of Somers, by speaking to others in his hearing such things, as he meant he should practise in the detecting of Witches, from about the xxi. of November, until about the seven. of December. Chap. 5. pag. 137.  
Of M. Darrel's course, from about the seven. of December, until the xiiii. of januarie, whilst Somers refused to dissemble any longer. Chap. 6. pag. 144.  
How Somers about the xiiii. of januarie fell again to the acting of certain fits, wherein he continued at times, till about the xxiiii. of February, and how M. Darrell pretended that he was repossessed. Chap. 7. pag. 148.    

The Contents of the Third Book.  

How Somers confessed his dissimulation at S. john's in Nottingham, as soon as he was out of M. Darrel's disposition. Chap. 1. pag. 177.  
How M. Darrell dealt with Somers, for the revocation of his said confession, that he had dissembled. Chap. 2 pag. 184.  
How M. Darrell devised two or three shifts to have avoided Somers confession that he had dissembled. Ca 3. pag. 187.  
How M. Darrel & his friends to discredit Summer's confession did falsely report, that he was induced thereunto by promises, threatenings, and enchantments. Chap. 4. pag. 190.  
How M. Darrel's ridiculous pretence, that Somers was induced by the devil in form of a black dog and an Ass, to say he had dissembled. Chap. 5. pag. 195.  
How M. Darrell hath falsely affirmed. that. W. Somers was induced to say he had dissembled, for fear of hanging: whereas he falling into his fits before Commissioners at Nottingham, (upon a former Compact) the fear of hanging was one of the chiefest causes, that he then affirmed, that he had not dissembled. Chap. 6. pag. 198.  
How Somers was persuaded by threatenings, & promises to have continued his dissimulation, after he had been before the Commissioners at Nottingham, until M. Darrel might again dispossess him. Chap. 7. pag. 204  
Of the depositions taken in M. Darrel's behalf, at Nott. & how upon the reexamination of his own witnesses, it falleth out: that the bodily actions of Somers in his fits, were not extraordinary, as they have been misreported. Chap. 8. pa. 207.    

The Contents of the Fourth Book.  

How M. Darrell laboured from time to time, to make those things that Somers did, (& were but very toys) to be thought both strange and extraordinary. Chap. 1. pag. 219.  
How M. Darrell would not suffer, (as near as he could) any to deal with Somers in his fits, to try whether he were senseless or dissembled. Chap. 2. pag. 225.  
How M. Darrel endeavoured to excuse Somers, when he was taken short, and did such toys as did argue him sufficiently to be but a counterfeit. Chap. 3. pag. 230.  
How contrary to M. Darrel's assertion, Somers had his senses and understanding in his fits. Chap. 4. pag. 235.  
Of the motions and knockings which were heard and seen about Somers in his fits, that they were done and made by himself, and were not as M. Darrell hath reported, extraordinary or supernatural. Chap. 5. pag. 238.  
How Somers casting himself into the fire, was voluntary, & no extraordinary matter, as M. Darrell hath pretended. Chap. 6. pag. 242.  
Of Summer's pretended strength and weight in his fits, that contrary to M. Darrel's, and his friends reports, there was nothing extraordinary in them. Chap. 7 pag. 244.  
Summer's knowledge in his fits was not extraordinary, as M. Darrell and his friends have falsely pretended: neither could he speak Greek, Hebrew or Latin, otherwise than he had learned. Chap. 8. pag. 247.  
There was no impossibility in Summer's fits, as master Darrell and his friends have falsely pretended. Chap. 9 pag. 255.  
How contrary to M. Darrel's and his friends assertions. W. Somers was accounted by many in Nottingham, or a dissembler, from the time that he began his practices there, until he confessed the same himself. Cap. 10. pa. 258.    

The Contents of the Fift Book.  

How M. Darrel's credit touching his dealing with the boy of Burton, doth rely upon a false and foolish book, that was published of the said boys pretended possession and dispossession, Chap. 1. pag. 265.  
Of M. Darrel's rashness in affirming Thomas Darling to be possessed, and of his cunning instructing him, how to behave himself upon the day of his pretended dispossession. Chap. 2. pag. 270.  
Of M. Darrel's shifts and absurdities, concerning the pretended dispossessing of Thomas Darling. Chap. 3. pag. 278.  
Of M. Darrel's further practices with Darling to pretend that Satan sought to re-enter into him, & of some other his untrue assertions, concerning the boy's fits, and of his cunning dealing likewise with him, that he should never confess his dissimulation. Chap. 4. pag. 283.  
How Darling confesseth his own dissimulation. Ca 5. p. 294  
A brief of Katherine write Confession, touching the beginning of her dissimulation, and of the reasons that moved her so to do. Chap. 6. pag. 297.  
Of M. Darrel's proceedings with Katherine Wright, for her pretended dispossession. Chap. 7. pag. 299.  
Of M. Darrel's proceedings with Mary Cooper, the sister of William Somers. Chap. 8. pag. 314.   
FINIS.